# AGENTS Source: https://help.opus.pro/AGENTS # Agent instructions (Claude, Cursor, Codex) This repo is an **Opus help center** built with [Mintlify](https://mintlify.com). Content is MDX and Markdown; the app is driven by `mint.json` and served by the Mintlify CLI. ## Project layout * **`mint.json`** — Site config: name, tabs, nav, theme, analytics. * **Content** — MDX/MD under `agent-opus/`, `api-reference/`, etc. Navigation is defined in `mint.json`. * **`.cursor/rules/`** — Cursor/IDE rules; follow them when editing matching files. ## Rules to follow 1. **Style prop in JSX/MDX**\ Never use a string for the `style` prop. Use a JSX object with camelCase CSS keys (e.g. `style={{ border: 'none', textAlign: 'center' }}`). See `.cursor/rules/no-style-strings.mdc`. 2. **Docs practices**\ Follow [docs/practices/help-center-runbook.md](docs/practices/help-center-runbook.md) for every article create, update, and sunset. 3. **Quality**\ Prefer clear, precise edits and maintain high craftsmanship. ## Development * **Preview:** `npm run dev` or `make dev` (Mintlify dev server). * **Config:** Edit `mint.json` for nav, tabs, and theme; add or move MDX files and wire them in `mint.json` as needed. # Development Source: https://help.opus.pro/_development Learn how to preview changes locally > [!NOTE] > > **Prerequisite** You should have installed Node.js (version 18.10.0 or > higher). Step 1. Install Mintlify on your OS: ```bash npm theme={"dark"} npm i -g mintlify ``` ```bash yarn theme={"dark"} yarn global add mintlify ``` Step 2. Go to the docs are located (where you can find `mint.json`) and run the following command: ```bash theme={"dark"} mintlify dev ``` The documentation website is now available at `http://localhost:3000`. ### Custom Ports Mintlify uses port 3000 by default. You can use the `--port` flag to customize the port Mintlify runs on. For example, use this command to run in port 3333: ```bash theme={"dark"} mintlify dev --port 3333 ``` You will see an error like this if you try to run Mintlify in a port that's already taken: ```md theme={"dark"} Error: listen EADDRINUSE: address already in use :::3000 ``` ## Mintlify Versions Each CLI is linked to a specific version of Mintlify. Please update the CLI if your local website looks different than production. ```bash npm theme={"dark"} npm i -g mintlify@latest ``` ```bash yarn theme={"dark"} yarn global upgrade mintlify ``` ## Deployment > [!TIP] > > Unlimited editors available under the [Startup > Plan](https://mintlify.com/pricing) You should see the following if the deploy successfully went through: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/checks-passed.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=d9a2ba1941423289ebdb99f738d0bb02) ## Troubleshooting Here's how to solve some common problems when working with the CLI. > [accordion] Mintlify is not loading > > Update to Node v18. Run `mintlify install` and try again. > [accordion] No such file or directory on Windows > > Go to the `C:/Users/Username/.mintlify/` directory and remove the `mint` > folder. Then Open the Git Bash in this location and run `git clone > https://github.com/mintlify/mint.git`. > > Repeat step 3. > [accordion] Getting an unknown error > > Try navigating to the root of your device and delete the \~/.mintlify folder. > Then run `mintlify dev` again. Curious about what changed in a CLI version? [Check out the CLI changelog.](/changelog/command-line) # Quickstart Source: https://help.opus.pro/_quickstart Start building awesome documentation in under 5 minutes ## Setup your development Learn how to update your docs locally and and deploy them to the public. ### Edit and preview > [accordion] Clone your docs locally > > During the onboarding process, we created a repository on your Github with > your docs content. You can find this repository on our > [dashboard](https://dashboard.mintlify.com). To clone the repository > locally, follow these > [instructions](https://docs.github.com/en/repositories/creating-and-managing-repositories/cloning-a-repository) > in your terminal. > [accordion] Preview changes > > Previewing helps you make sure your changes look as intended. We built a > command line interface to render these changes locally. 1. Install the > [Mintlify CLI](https://www.npmjs.com/package/mintlify) to preview the > documentation changes locally with this command: `npm i -g mintlify` > 2\. Run the following command at the root of your documentation (where > `mint.json` is): `mintlify dev` ### Deploy your changes > [accordion] Install our Github app > > Our Github app automatically deploys your changes to your docs site, so you > don't need to manage deployments yourself. You can find the link to install on > your [dashboard](https://dashboard.mintlify.com). Once the bot has been > successfully installed, there should be a check mark next to the commit hash > of the repo. > [accordion] Push your changes > > [Commit and push your changes to > Git](https://docs.github.com/en/get-started/using-git/pushing-commits-to-a-remote-repository#about-git-push) > for your changes to update in your docs site. If you push and don't see that > the Github app successfully deployed your changes, you can also manually > update your docs through our [dashboard](https://dashboard.mintlify.com). ## Update your docs Add content directly in your files with MDX syntax and React components. You can use any of our components, or even build your own. > [card] [Style Your Docs](/settings/global) > > Add flair to your docs with personalized branding. > [card] [Add API Endpoints](/api-playground/configuration) > > Implement your OpenAPI spec and enable API user interaction. > [card] [Integrate Analytics](/analytics/supported-integrations) > > Draw insights from user interactions with your documentation. > [card] [Host on a Custom Domain](/settings/custom-domain/subdomain) > > Keep your docs on your own website's subdomain. # Agent Opus FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/agent-opus/article/ao-faq # 1. What is Agent Opus Agent Opus creates videos from ideas, scripts, images and supported audio or video inputs. Use this guide to choose a mode, prepare your content, review and edit your video, and understand credit charges. You can create explainers, stories, music videos, product ads and social content. The four preset modes are Standard, Standard+, Premium and Ultra. Each supports different visual capabilities, audio options and editing tools; [Choosing a mode](#3-choosing-a-mode) compares them. # 2. Getting started 1. **Sign in.** Open [Agent Opus](https://agent.opus.pro), create an account and log in using a one-time password. 2. **Start with your content.** Describe an idea, paste a script or select a creation tool for your audio, video reference or assets. See [Creation tools and supported inputs](#4-creation-tools-and-supported-inputs) for supported inputs. 3. **Choose and customize.** Set Quality, then choose your style, aspect ratio, audio and assets where available. [Choosing a mode](#3-choosing-a-mode) and [Customizing your video](#5-customizing-your-video) explain these controls. 4. **Submit and review.** Check the proposed plan and credit estimate before generation. Some checkpoints have an auto-confirm timer; see [Auto confirm and cancellation](#auto-confirm-and-cancellation). 5. **Check the result.** Watch the completed video, make any needed edits using [Editing and remaking your video](#8-editing-and-remaking-your-video) and download the version you want to use. ![The Agent Opus composer with Style, Assets, Audio, Brand brief, aspect ratio and Quality controls above creation tools for Script to video, Song to video, Audio to video, Reference to video, Assets to ads and Motion graphics.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-composer.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=a6f7a7124d9eef0639714cb9ad29b9d4) *The composer is the starting point for your request and project settings.* For inspiration, browse the sample projects. Open one to view its prompt and labeled visual style, or use Remix to recreate it. # 3. Choosing a mode Open **Quality** in the composer and move the slider to Standard, Standard+, Premium or Ultra. Choose the mode that fits the video you want to make. | **Feature** | **Standard** | **Standard+** | **Premium** | **Ultra** | | - | - | - | - | - | | **Best for** | Narrated explainers and stories | Videos with people or text on screen | Multi-shot scenes, dialogue and ads | Photorealistic visuals | | **Voice cloning** | Yes | Yes | No | No | | **Timeline editor** | Yes | Yes | No | No | | **Character dialogue with lip sync** | No | No | Yes | Yes | | **Reference video style matching** | No | No | Yes | Yes | | **Agentic Editor** | No | No | Yes | Yes | | **Plan availability** | Any plan | Any plan | Pro and Max | Pro and Max | Standard and Standard+ build visuals around narration and can connect scenes with flowing transitions. Premium and Ultra build multi-shot sequences using their supported character-dialogue controls. Results vary with your prompt, references and model; check visual continuity and accuracy. ## Custom options Expand **Custom** below the Quality slider to see the model choices available for your mode. Open **Video model** or **Image model** and compare the descriptions before selecting an option. ![The Quality menu open on Standard, with Custom expanded to Video model Vidu Q3 and Image model Seedream 5.0 Pro, and the Video model list showing Vidu Q3 at 1 credit per second.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/NF-1yMMQaiIsxf6_/images/imgs/ao-faq-quality-custom-vidu.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=NF-1yMMQaiIsxf6_\&q=85\&s=b3b4ebca6e6b7dd7fee61b3b684a0a9c) *Choose a preset mode with Quality, or open Custom to change the available models.* Preset modes use the default generation rates in [Credits pricing and refunds](#9-credits-pricing-and-refunds). Pricing varies by model when you select a custom model; its displayed rate applies. # 4. Creation tools and supported inputs Choose a creation tool along the bottom of the composer. Your mode determines which features are available. A video upload can supply spoken audio, music or a visual reference; select the appropriate tool so Agent Opus uses the content you intend. | **Tool** | **Start with** | **Limits and usage** | | - | - | - | | **Script to Video** | A written idea, script or transcript | Standard and Standard+: up to 1,700 words and a generated video up to 10 minutes. Spoken pace affects duration. | | **Audio to Video** | A spoken audio recording or a video containing speech | Up to 10 minutes. Available in all four modes. Uses the audio as narration; video visuals are discarded. | | **Song to Video** | One music file, or a video containing music on desktop | Up to 10 minutes. Available in all four modes. Audio up to 120 MB; desktop video up to 500 MB. Uses only the audio. The mobile picker accepts audio files. | | **Reference to Video** | A video upload or supported public video link | MP4, MOV or WebM up to 500 MB. Creates a Premium or Ultra video up to 3 minutes on Pro or Max. Reference audio is not used as voiceover. | | **Assets to Ads** | An ad brief and uploaded image references | Create a product or brand ad using your assets. See [Objects, characters and logos](#objects-characters-and-logos) for asset formats and upload limits. | | **Motion Graphics** | A text description | Create animated explainers, infographics, maps or text animations with [Motion Studio](#6-motion-graphics-with-motion-studio). | ## Accepted audio and video formats **Audio to Video:** Audio in MP3, M4A, WAV, AAC, FLAC, OGG and WEBA. Video in MP4, MOV, WebM, MKV, AVI, M4V, MPG and MPEG. The upload must contain speech; for music, use Song to Video. **Song to Video:** Audio in MP3, M4A, WAV, AAC, FLAC, OGG and WEBA, up to 120 MB. Video on desktop in MP4, MOV, MKV, AVI, M4V, MPG and MPEG, up to 500 MB. The mobile picker accepts audio files only. **Reference to Video:** Video in MP4, MOV and WebM, up to 500 MB. You can also paste a supported public video link instead of uploading a file. For other Premium or Ultra projects, use the duration options offered in the composer. Style Maker has separate reference limits, listed in [Customizing your video](#5-customizing-your-video); a style reference does not set the generated video's length. ## Articles, links and documents For an article, blog, X post or news item, paste the source text into the composer and describe the video you want. Ask Agent Opus to summarize or explain it for your audience, then review the proposed script for accuracy. Use a source-link field when a planning question offers one. Supported public video links belong in Reference to Video; other web addresses may not be importable directly. PDFs, Docs and similar documents are not accepted as files, so paste their text instead. # 5. Customizing your video Set the style, aspect ratio, brand brief, audio and assets in the composer before submitting. Available controls depend on your mode. ## Visual styles and Style Maker Choose a preset or saved style, or leave **Style** on **Auto** to receive proposals during planning. To create a custom style, open Style and select **Add style**. Check any plan requirement indicated by the crown badge. | **Style reference** | **Accepted formats** | **Limit** | | - | - | - | | **Images** | PNG, JPG, WebP | Up to 8 images | | **Video upload** | MP4, MOV, WebM | 1 video up to 10 minutes | | **Video link** | Supported public links, including YouTube, TikTok or a direct video-file link | 1 video up to 10 minutes | | **Style description** | Free text | Optional | 1. Add your references and adjust the **Describe style** text, then select **Generate**. 2. Review the proposed style description, color palette and three scene previews. Use chat to request a change, such as "warmer colors," or edit the palette's hex codes and add colors. ![Style Maker showing three scene previews, a style prompt, a color palette with hex codes, History and Add style controls, and a What should change chat box.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-style-maker-preview.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=1afb0fe1397caa7b36b609eb1cad87a9) *Style Maker shows a description, palette and scene previews before you save the style.* 3. Saving the palette or requesting a change generates fresh previews. Once satisfied, select **Save style** to add it to your library. 4. Use **History** to compare saved iterations and restore an earlier version. The pencil on a saved style reopens it for editing; the cross deletes it. ## Aspect ratio Use the aspect ratio control before submission. **9:16** is the default for vertical videos such as Reels, Shorts and TikTok. Choose **16:9** for landscape video or **1:1** for square posts. ## Voiceover Open **Audio** to set the voiceover. On Standard and Standard+ you can preview a built-in voice, clone a voice, or upload a spoken recording. On Premium and Ultra you can upload a spoken recording, but you cannot choose a built-in voice or clone one; those modes use character dialogue instead of this narration workflow. To clone a voice, upload or record a sample up to 30 seconds long. To use an existing recording as the voiceover, upload a supported audio or video file within the limits in [Accepted audio and video formats](#accepted-audio-and-video-formats). A video-upload prompt confirms that only its audio will be used. > [!NOTE] > > Voice cloning languages: Afrikaans, Arabic, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese (Mandarin), Chinese (Cantonese), Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Filipino, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hebrew, Hindi, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Malay, Norwegian, Persian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian and Vietnamese. ## Objects, characters and logos Open **Assets** to upload up to eight images in any combination of Objects, Characters and Logos. Supported formats are PNG, JPG, WebP, GIF, SVG, HEIC/HEIF, TIFF and AVIF. | **Category** | **Use for** | | - | - | | **Object** | A product, furniture, food or an app screenshot | | **Character** | A person, pet, mascot or story character | | **Logo** | A company logo, app icon or campaign badge | Each uploaded image appears as a labeled tag, such as `[Object image 1]` or `[Character image 1]`. Write your prompt around these tags to explain each image's role. You can insert an existing tag by typing `@`, or drag the tags to reposition them; you do not need to type the labels manually. ![The Add assets dialog with slots to add a character, logo or object, supported image formats listed, and a preview of a personalized story asset.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-assets-upload.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=aa9f90d44e8e9844abd3000cad710ed1) *Upload an Object, Character or Logo, then reference its tag in your prompt.* For example, upload a product image, a spokesperson image and your logo, then write: "Show `[Character image 1]` entering a meeting room and placing `[Object image 1]` on the table. End with `[Logo image 1]` on screen." **Where your uploads appear.** Because the whole scene is generated from your prompt, an uploaded image can appear anywhere in the story rather than being dropped on top of it. You might have your Character sitting at a desk holding your Object, with your Logo on a screen behind them. Agent Opus redraws each upload in the style you chose, so it belongs in the scene while staying recognisable. Image references guide the generated scene. Check likeness, proportions, text and fine details in the result, especially when using a real product or person. You can also use references for stories and explainers, such as a recurring animal character or a historical figure. # 6. Motion graphics with Motion Studio Motion graphics are made in Motion Studio, a separate Opus Labs tool rather than part of the Agent Opus flow described above. Choose **Motion graphics** in the composer and you are taken there. It is built for short, designed pieces such as logo stings, kinetic titles and concept B-roll, not narrated story videos. For a dedicated walkthrough, see [How to use Motion Studio](/opus-labs/motion-studio). ## Setting up Describe what happens, how it should feel and how it ends. You can attach references, up to 30 images, 10 videos and 10 audio files. Starting from a template such as Logo animation, Logo sting, Concept B-roll or Kinetic titles fills the prompt for you; edit it so it matches your project. To mention an uploaded reference in the prompt, type `@` and select the file. The upload has to finish first, so wait for it to complete before you try to mention it. The settings are **Model, Style, Length, Aspect** and an **Audio** toggle. The cost appears on the button before you commit. ![The Motion Studio composer with Model, Style, Length, Aspect and Audio settings, a Create shot plan button showing 80 credits, and a template gallery including Logo animation, Logo sting, Concept B-roll and Kinetic titles.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-motion-studio-composer.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=d79cda09fb4024be1cfaeff957818433) *The Motion Studio composer, with settings and the cost shown on the button.* ## Styles Motion Studio has its own style set, separate from the Agent Opus gallery and from Style Maker: Corporate explainer, 3D Studio, Crafted Woodland, Diffuse UI, Vertical Press, Neo-pop and Paper Cutout. Each one has a preview and a description of the look it produces. Choose **No style** to render your idea as-is, or upload your own style reference image. ![The Choose a style panel listing Corporate explainer, 3D Studio, Crafted Woodland, Diffuse UI, Vertical Press, Neo-pop, Paper Cutout and No style, plus an option to upload a style reference image.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-motion-studio-styles.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=046829c761d1c5ad7deeb8b518888fbe) *Each style has a preview and a description; you can also upload your own reference.* ## The shot plan Motion Studio plans before it renders. **Create shot plan** returns a beat-by-beat breakdown with timecodes, plus the style, subjects, look, camera, sound and any on-screen text it intends to use. Review it, then choose **Submit project** to render, or **Revise idea** to go back and change the brief. Nothing renders until you submit. You do not have to wait on the page. Once you submit you can leave, and check Projects for progress and to open finished results. ![A Motion Studio shot plan with timecoded beats, plus style, subjects, look, camera, sound and on-screen text, and a Submit project button.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-motion-studio-shot-plan.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=7e42f14a06ca99b53d847f400dc17bcb) *The shot plan: timecoded beats plus the look, camera, sound and on-screen text.* ## Your finished graphic When it is ready you can play it, **Download** it, or choose **Revise video** to make a new version. ![A finished 8-second Motion Studio graphic of a coffee bean on a studio stage, with Download and Revise video buttons.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-motion-studio-finished.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=210afdaeb91ec436695b2276f7504b8d) *A finished motion graphic, with Download and Revise video.* ## Revising **Revise video** opens a dialog where you describe what should change. Your original prompt, references, preset and style stay the same, so you are adjusting the existing piece rather than starting again. A revision is quoted and charged like a new render, and the cost is shown on the button before you confirm. ![The Create a revised version dialog with a What should change field and a Create revision button showing 80 credits.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-motion-studio-revise.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=aa76023c22f0ae62180561b4053f9fb2) *Describe what should change; the revision is priced before you confirm.* For the current rates, see the [quality levels page](https://agent.opus.pro/quality-levels) and the [Credits FAQ](/agent-opus/article/ao-faq-credits-faq). > [!NOTE] > > Motion Studio is in beta. The available models, settings and prices can change, so check the estimate shown beside the button each time rather than relying on a remembered figure. # 7. Reviewing and canceling your project After submission, Agent Opus uses your request to propose a plan. It may ask clarification questions first; a complete script or detailed brief may need fewer questions. Choose an answer, skip where offered or provide your own response. Review the available planning cards and the credit estimate before continuing. The stages differ by mode and project. ## Standard and Standard+ review stages **Summary** covers the topic, audience, pacing, tone and requirements, with settings such as aspect ratio, length, captions and background music. Ask for changes here, including to any **Must Not Violate** requirements. **Script** shows the proposed narration and word count against the 1,700-word limit. Review **Voiceover** for voice, speed and pronunciation; change it from Auto-select if you want a specific voice. If **Style** is set to Auto, Agent Opus proposes three styles with one already selected. Choose another, use the pencil on any option to adjust it, or select **View more** for the gallery and your saved styles. Otherwise, review the style you chose before submission. **Assets** shows the images your project needs; some projects need none. To use your own Characters, Logos or Objects, add them from Assets in the composer before you submit, or ask for the change in the project chat. A **Storyboard** is optional. At the review bar, choose **Create Storyboard** for a shot plan with timings, or **Create Video Now** to proceed directly. The credit estimate appears beside Quality and updates when you change it. Every stage stays open until you generate. Edit a card directly, or ask for the change in the project chat; both work, and you can switch between them at any point. Agent Opus then reworks whatever depends on what you changed, so shortening the runtime reshapes the script, which in turn changes the assets and the storyboard. You do not have to visit the stages in order, or revisit each one yourself after a change. ![The Standard review screen with Script ready for review, Voiceover, optional Create Video Now and Create Storyboard actions, and a generation estimate of 60 credits beside Quality.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-review-bar.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=1a28ebbf9b1f4275158f986d3186331f) *The review bar offers an optional storyboard and shows the generation estimate beside Quality.* ## Premium and Ultra review stages **Summary** sets the visual style, storytelling approach, tone, purpose and speech. **Screenplay** outlines scenes, timings and speech. **References** provides images of recurring characters and objects. **Clips** generates the individual shots, and **Video** assembles them. Request changes in the project chat. A change to duration or story structure may also affect the screenplay, references and clips. When a card offers **Confirm** or **Request changes**, review the proposed work and the estimate before proceeding. Lettered suggested actions are shortcuts; you can also type your own request. ![A Premium project Summary with Confirm and Request changes controls and a credit estimate of 1440.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-premium-confirm.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=e7c45d06ccbf150648460b545153fbb0) *Review the plan and credit estimate before selecting Confirm, or choose Request changes.* ## Auto confirm and cancellation Agent Opus is set to **Auto** by default. It still pauses at each checkpoint and asks, but if you step away it fills in the remaining details and carries on, which starts generation and uses credits. Closing the browser tab does not stop this; your project keeps processing after you leave the page. To stop this, use the **Auto** control beside the chat box and choose **Manual**. Agent Opus then waits for your reply at every step and nothing runs on its own. Switch back to Auto whenever you want it to keep moving while you are away. ![The Auto and Manual menu beside the chat box. Auto fills in remaining details if you step away; Manual waits for your reply before every step.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-auto-manual.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=9ae0c17ec5ae6c2582d3196a5f21f7ec) You can cancel a project up until generation starts. Use **Discard project** in the project itself while you are still reviewing the planning cards; it deletes the project and its script, and no credits are charged. You can also cancel from your **Projects** list, where the project menu offers **Cancel**. Wait for the cancellation status to confirm it has stopped. Once generation has started you cannot cancel it, and the project runs to completion. Closing the tab, deleting a message or discarding an editor preview does not stop it either. If a project is stuck or you think something has gone wrong, contact support with the project link using [Troubleshooting and support](#12-troubleshooting-and-support). ![The Discard project control with a tooltip that the project and its script will be deleted and no credits will be charged.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-discard-project.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=851055dbb59b625cd50aaf11d019ee81) ![A project menu in the Projects list with Download, Publish on Social, Share, Remix, Rename and Cancel.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-projects-cancel.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=8d67471e29f9821131d92b8962b3ad35) ![A Delete this project confirmation dialog warning that a deleted project cannot be recovered.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-delete-project.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=adfa8956f3a5157e0acc76baa29727a6) Because you can only cancel before generation starts, cancelling does not consume generation credits. Completed work is not automatically refunded. Check the project status and your credit history afterward. # 8. Editing and remaking your video Use the editing workflow for your mode. Standard and Standard+ have a timeline editor; Premium and Ultra use project chat. To create a new version with a different overall look, use Reimagine where available. Editing charges are explained in [Credits, pricing and refunds](#9-credits-pricing-and-refunds). ## Standard and Standard+ ### Before your first edit AI editing is experimental. The first time you edit a video, you are asked to confirm that edits may contain errors or may not match your request exactly. Select **Got it** to continue. You only see this once per project. ### Requesting an edit 1. Open a finished video and click its change box. Use **Screenshot** to identify a moment or **Timestamp** to select a point on the timeline. 2. Adjust the selected range by dragging either end. Describe the visual change you want, including any object or area to change. Use **+** to attach a reference image, then check the edit estimate before generating. ![The Standard timeline editor with a Timestamp prompt, Screenshot control and a credit estimate on the generate button.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-editor-prompt-bar.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=06a9386851867e5e7e6a4fe7580021d6) *The prompt bar combines a Timestamp, reference-image attachment and credit estimate.* ### Reviewing and applying an edit The editor generates a preview beside the original. Review the affected range and select **Apply to video** to use it, or **New preview** to request another generation. **Cancel** discards the preview; it does not reverse a completed generation charge. ![The editor showing the original frame beside a generated preview, with Cancel, New preview and Apply to video controls.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-editor-preview.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=1e5d5324e91a8e0a6d5fd6406ff5036e) *Compare the preview with the original before applying the edit.* After applying, wait for the updated video to finish rendering and check the latest completed version before downloading. Open **Show history** to review saved edits and select an available earlier version to continue from. ![The editor History panel open while a new version is generating, with saved edit versions listed on the right.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-editor-history.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=24e69b4cb21f0e779b05e913b117a7b1) *Show history lets you review saved edit versions after applying a change.* ### If an edit doesn't match your request Agent Opus checks each edit against what you asked for. If it doesn't match, you still see the result and can choose **Try again, free** or **Leave it**. Every video includes one free retry. After you use it, further attempts use credits. Describing the change differently usually works better than repeating the same request. *\[Screenshot to come: the "This edit didn't match your request" message with Try again, free and Leave it.]* *When an edit doesn't match your request, you can try again or keep the result.* ## Premium and Ultra ### Requesting and reviewing an edit Open the finished video and select **Edit**, or type your request in the project chat. Identify the scene or moment and describe the result you want, for example, "The ending feels abrupt. Hold on the finished loaf a little longer." ![A finished Premium or Ultra video with Edit and Download controls and an editing deadline.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-premium-edit-download.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=61004898cae26ff411653b7bc3d307b6) *A finished Premium or Ultra video with Edit and Download controls and an editing deadline.* Review the proposed change and its credit estimate, then use the available confirmation controls to proceed or revise the request. An edit may regenerate affected clips or require the video to be assembled again. Wait for the updated video and check that it reflects your request before downloading. ![Premium project chat with Confirm, Request changes and an Edit mode prompt for describing a change.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-premium-edit-chat.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=fb169183c04a88701277ec62600e1161) *The chat shows the proposed edit and its credit estimate.* ### The editing window Premium and Ultra projects have a limited 30-day editing window. Complete your edits before it closes. Afterward, further editing is unavailable and the project may appear as **Expired** or **Locked** in Projects. The completed video remains available to watch and download. ## Reimagine Reimagine is available on **any finished Standard or Standard+ video**. It creates a new version with a different style or an available mode option, while keeping the current video saved. 1. Open the finished video and choose **Reimagine** in the right-hand panel, beneath **Download** and **Publish on Social**. 2. Choose a preset or saved style, or select **Add style**. The existing style is labeled **Current**. Adjust the mode using the options offered in the dialog. 3. Review the settings and credit estimate on **Regenerate**, then confirm to create the new version. ![The Reimagine your video dialog with Current style, additional style options, Quality set to Standard+ and a Regenerate estimate of 210 credits.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy/images/imgs/ao-faq-reimagine.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BZjEd1Gj3IiqkNWy\&q=85\&s=f6b598a11cb7c17a995285d447970f45) *Choose the new style and available mode option, then review the Regenerate estimate.* Use the timeline editor above when you only want to change part of the video. # 9. Credits, pricing and refunds ## Generation pricing | **Preset mode** | **Credits per second** | **30 second video** | | - | - | - | | **Standard** | 1.0 | 30 credits | | **Standard+** | 3.0 | 90 credits | | **Premium** | 7 | 210 credits | | **Ultra** | 12 | 360 credits | These are the default generation rates. A custom model selection uses its displayed rate. Review the project estimate before generating; generation rates do not determine the cost of an edit. ## Editing charges Each edit has its own estimate based on the required work. In the Standard and Standard+ editor, the model, selected range, affected keyframes and transitions can change the cost. A preview uses credits before you apply it. Every generated edit is charged, including one that doesn't match your request. Each video includes one free retry. New previews after that use credits. Discarding a completed preview does not reverse its generation charge. Applying it incorporates the result into your video; review any further processing estimate shown. Premium and Ultra edits also have separate estimates, and the original generation charge does not cover every later edit. > [!NOTE] > > Screenshots show examples of pricing. Each video includes one free retry; no other edits are free. Check your current estimate before proceeding. ## Credit returns and payment refunds A system-detected failed generation automatically releases the credits reserved for that attempt. Edits that don't match your request are not refunded. Use your free retry instead, and try describing the change differently. If a completed video or edit has a technical bug, contact support for review before generating it repeatedly. Confirmed bugs are reviewed under the support recovery policy, including whether recovery was already provided for the same user and issue. Further related attempts are not automatically refundable, and a completed result that does not match your preferences does not automatically qualify for a credit return. A credit release is different from a refund to your payment method. Contact support for payment-refund requests; [Troubleshooting and support](#12-troubleshooting-and-support) explains what to include. For balances, expiry and recovery guidance, see the [Agent Opus Credits FAQ](/agent-opus/article/ao-faq-credits-faq). # 10. Plans and usage There is no cap on the number of projects you can create; you can keep going for as long as your credits allow. You can create projects while you have enough credits and your account supports the selected feature. Check any active-job limit or other restriction shown in the app before starting another project. Unlimited plans are not currently available. Free-plan downloads include an Agent Opus watermark that appears periodically in the video. [Supported Regions](/agent-opus/article/ao-supported-regions) explains product availability. [Onboarding & Referral Rewards](/agent-opus/article/ao-onboarding-referral-rewards) explains how to claim rewards and check their deadlines. Product availability and promotional eligibility are separate. # 11. Limitations and alternative workflows **Exact visual reproduction.** Generated visuals may not reproduce a person, product, location or logo exactly. Upload image references when you need a specific asset and review the result. Use original footage when exact appearance is essential. **Hands-on editing and repurposing.** Use the OpusClip editor to work with existing footage, including trimming and rearranging sections, adjusting captions and framing, adding media, or turning long videos into shorter clips. Use Agent Opus's editing controls for changes to its generated content. **Interpretive, not documentary.** Agent Opus builds a scene from your description rather than recording one. It is not the right choice when the video has to show exactly what a specific real person, place or building looks like. For those, use footage you already have, or the core OpusClip workflow, which can bring in real-world assets and stock footage. **Restricted source content.** Agent Opus cannot access material behind a paywall or login. Provide source text you can use, following the input guidance in [Creation tools and supported inputs](#4-creation-tools-and-supported-inputs). # 12. Troubleshooting and support ## Slow or stuck generation Processing time depends on video length, the selected model, requested changes and workload. Premium and Ultra generate clips before assembling the video. Open the project to check its progress and any error message. If generation remains in progress for more than three hours, contact support with the project link and a screenshot of the status. Elapsed time alone does not confirm failure or cancellation. A disappearing **Processing** label may mean the job finished, so check for a completed video. ## Failed generation or unsuccessful edits If a generation fails, read the error message and use the available recovery action. The reserved credits are released automatically. If an edit doesn't match your request, you'll see the result with the option to try again. Your first retry on each video is free. If a completed edit has a technical bug, contact support with the project and edit details. See [Credits, pricing and refunds](#9-credits-pricing-and-refunds) for credit-return guidance and [Reviewing and canceling your project](#7-reviewing-and-canceling-your-project) to cancel active work. Once the free retry is used, further attempts on that video use credits. ## Contacting support or sharing feedback For a project, editing or billing problem, [contact support](/docs/article/how-to-contact-support) and include your project link or ID, any error message, what you expected, and the relevant credit-history entry. Include a screenshot of the status for a stalled project. Support is the fastest route for anything you need help with. You can also ask other users in the [Agent Opus Discord community](https://discord.gg/MNPVXHNsht). # 13. What is next for Agent Opus Agent Opus continues to support Standard, Standard+, Premium and Ultra. Our current focus is maintaining reliability and addressing critical issues. We will announce additional features if and when they become available. # Agent Opus Credits FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/agent-opus/article/ao-faq-credits-faq Credits are how you pay for what you generate in Agent Opus. This guide covers what you get, what things cost, how to get more, and what happens when something goes wrong. # 1. What are credits Credits are the single currency used to create videos and access features in Agent Opus. Instead of tracking a separate price for every feature, you spend credits on what you generate. # 2. What your plan includes Paid plans grant credits every month. The Free plan works differently: it gives you a one-time allowance rather than a monthly one. | **Plan** | **Credits** | **How often** | | - | - | - | | Free | 60 credits, plus up to 25 more earned through [onboarding](/agent-opus/article/ao-onboarding-referral-rewards) | One time | | Pro | 300 credits | Every month | | Max | 1,500 credits | Every month | On Free, the 60 welcome credits and the onboarding credits are not replaced once they are spent. To keep generating, upgrade to Pro or Max, or buy credits. Top-up credits are rolling out to **Pro** and **Max**. If you do not see a **Buy credits** option yet, it is on the way. > [!TIP] > > You can check your balance and usage history at any time from the subscription page. # 3. When credits expire It depends on the type of credit. * **Monthly plan credits**, on Pro and Max, expire after 60 days, so they roll over for one additional month. * **Yearly plan credits** are billed annually, but they arrive monthly at the same rate as the monthly plan. The yearly figure shown on the plan card, for example 3,600 credits a year on Pro, is the sum of those monthly grants, not a single balance released up front. Unused credits roll over for 2 months. * **Top-up credits** are valid for 12 months from the day you buy them. * **Bonus and promotional credits** may carry their own terms, stated when you receive them. If you cancel your subscription, remaining credits keep their original expiry date, even if that falls after your billing cycle ends. **Top-up credits** behave differently: they are locked while you are unsubscribed and restored when you resubscribe, and their 12-month clock keeps running throughout. # 4. Where your credits can be used Paid plan credits and top-up credits work in both Agent Opus and OpusClip. One balance, either product. Free credits stay with the product that issued them. Welcome credits, onboarding credits, and bonus or promotional credits can only be spent where you earned them. # 5. What generation costs Cost is the finished length of your video multiplied by the credits-per-second rate of the quality level you choose. Nothing else changes the price, so a longer video or a higher level costs proportionally more. | **Quality level** | **Credits per second** | **Maximum length** | **Available on** | | - | - | - | - | | Standard | 1 | 10 minutes | Free and up | | Standard+ | 3 | 10 minutes | Free and up | | Premium | 7 | 3 minutes | Pro and Max | | Ultra | 12 | 3 minutes | Pro and Max | For a one-minute video that works out as: | **Standard** | **Standard+** | **Premium** | **Ultra** | | - | - | - | - | | 60 credits | 180 credits | 420 credits | 720 credits | For a full comparison of what each level includes, see the [quality levels page](https://agent.opus.pro/quality-levels). You always see the estimate before any credits are deducted. On Standard and Standard+ it appears on the review bar beside **Quality**; on Premium and Ultra it appears on the **Confirm** button itself. Changing the quality level updates the estimate straight away. ## Motion Graphics Motion Graphics is priced separately, at 3 or 10 credits per second depending on the video model chosen. ## Editing a finished video Each edit is charged separately from the original generation, and each one is quoted before you approve it. Cost depends on the work required. In the Standard and Standard+ editor, the model, the range you select and the affected keyframes and transitions all change the price. Every generated edit is charged, including one that doesn't match your request. Each video includes one free retry. Attempts after that use credits. # 6. Getting more credits * **Upgrade your plan.** A higher tier gives you more monthly credits. * **Buy credit packs** at any time through the subscription page. * **Buy top-up credits.** On **Pro** or **Max**, buy 100 to 10,000 credits as a one-off, with no plan change and no renewal. * **Claim free credits** through free credit links when they are available. * **Complete onboarding steps.** New Free and Trial accounts can earn up to 85 credits from one-time setup steps, plus a 50 credit bonus when you upgrade to Pro. Claim within 7 days of signing up. See [Onboarding & Referral Rewards](/agent-opus/article/ao-onboarding-referral-rewards). * **Refer a friend.** You and your friend each get 60 credits when they sign up through your link and make their first video, and 50 or 100 more if they upgrade to Pro or Max. # 7. Failed generations and cancellations When you confirm a project, the required credits are temporarily frozen. If the generation fails, they are returned to your balance automatically and you do not need to do anything. This applies to generations that fail to run. An edit that runs but doesn't match your request is charged. Use your free retry instead. Discarding a project before you confirm it costs nothing, because credits are only charged once generation starts. Once generation is under way it runs to completion and cannot be cancelled. # 8. Refunds An AI-generated video will not always match what you pictured. Credits spent on a successfully completed generation are generally not refundable, and edits that don't match your request are not refunded. Refunds may be considered where a project is affected by a technical problem, such as: * The project fails to generate or load. This is handled automatically. * The project stays stuck processing for more than 3 hours. # 9. Legacy video quotas All legacy video quotas have been converted into credits, at a rate of one video quota, meaning a one-minute video, to 100 credits. # 10. Getting help [Contact support](/docs/article/how-to-contact-support) for anything to do with your credits or billing, and include your project link or ID and the relevant credit-history entry. You can also share feedback through the in-app survey. # Onboarding & Referral Rewards Source: https://help.opus.pro/agent-opus/article/ao-onboarding-referral-rewards Agent Opus has two ways to earn free credits. Onboarding rewards pay you for setting up your account. Referrals pay you and a friend when they join through your link. They are separate programs with separate rules, and you can earn from both. | **Program** | **What earns credits** | **How much** | **Deadline** | | - | - | - | - | | Onboarding rewards | Seven one-time setup steps | Up to 135 credits, once | Claim within 7 days of sign-up | | Referrals | Friends who sign up or upgrade through your link | Up to 1,500 credits a month | None, but a friend must upgrade within 1 week of signing up | Reward credits from both programs are separate from the monthly credits included with your plan. See the [Agent Opus Credits FAQ](/agent-opus/article/ao-faq-credits-faq) for how those work. # Onboarding rewards ## 1. What onboarding rewards are Onboarding rewards are a limited program for new **Free** and **Trial** accounts. Each reward is tied to a short, one-time setup step that introduces a part of Agent Opus, such as making your first video or adding a brand kit. There are seven steps, worth 135 credits in total. ## 2. Where to find your rewards There are three ways into the rewards panel: * **The welcome pop-up.** Appears the first time you open Agent Opus after signing up. Select **Claim reward** to bank your welcome bonus and open the panel. * **The rewards launcher.** Sits in the corner of the screen and stays there until every reward is claimed. * **The notification bell.** Look for "Your setup rewards are waiting." The panel header shows your progress two ways: credits claimed out of the total available, and steps finished out of seven. The **Valid for 7 days** badge in the corner is your earning window. ![The rewards panel showing Create your account ready to claim for 60 credits, six remaining setup steps, a Valid for 7 days badge, and Invite friends at the bottom.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XtpX0dcARKnc2VBl/images/imgs/ao-onboarding-referral-rewards-panel.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XtpX0dcARKnc2VBl\&q=85\&s=b6e4e6848fdd0f2c4f36a3432d659a40) *The rewards panel, with the welcome bonus ready to claim.* ## 3. What counts as a step Each step is a short, one-time action, and every card tells you what to do and what it pays. Some steps unlock in sequence rather than all at once, because they build on each other. Polishing a video in the editor only becomes available once you have a video to polish. The list of steps changes as we improve the program, so your panel is always the accurate version for your account. ## 4. What each step pays | **Step** | **Credits** | | - | - | | Create your account | 60 | | Watch the video tutorial | 5 | | Make your first video | 5 | | Polish it in the editor | 5 | | Add your brand kit | 5 | | Create your first voice | 5 | | Schedule and publish (Pro) | 50 | | **Total** | **135** | **Create your account** is your welcome bonus for signing up, so it is already complete when you first open the panel. You still have to claim it. **Schedule and publish** is a Pro step, marked with a crown. Amounts change as we tune the program and can differ between accounts. The panel header shows the total you can still earn, and every card shows its own amount, so read the number off your own panel. ## 5. How to claim a reward Rewards are not added automatically. Each step moves through three states: 1. **Available.** Select the card and Agent Opus takes you to the place where you complete the step. 2. **Ready to claim.** You finished the step, and the card turns green with a **Claim reward** button. 3. **Claimed.** The credits are in your balance. Select **Claim reward** on each finished step. Credits land in your balance right away and appear in your credit history. You can complete the steps in any order. ## 6. Two deadlines to know about Onboarding rewards have two separate clocks, and they measure different things. | **Clock** | **What it limits** | | - | - | | **Time to earn:** 7 days from sign-up | How long you have to finish steps and claim them. The **Valid for 7 days** badge counts this down. Anything unclaimed when it runs out closes. | | **Time to spend:** 30 days from each claim | How long reward credits stay in your balance after you claim them. Each reward starts its own 30 days on the day you claim it. | Claiming early costs you nothing. A claimed reward starts its 30 days, but an unclaimed one disappears entirely when the first clock ends, so claim as you go. ## 7. Why you may not see the rewards panel Onboarding rewards are a limited program for new accounts. You will not see the panel if: * **Your account is on a paid plan.** Onboarding rewards are for **Free** and **Trial** accounts. Referrals are not affected. * **Onboarding rewards are not available in your region yet.** Availability is rolling out by region. For where Agent Opus itself is available, see [Supported Regions](/agent-opus/article/ao-supported-regions). * **Your account was not brand new** when you first opened Agent Opus, or your 7-day earning window has already ended. * **We have not rolled it out to your account yet.** We are releasing onboarding rewards gradually, so it may not appear on every new account. # Referrals ## 8. How referrals work Share your referral link. When a friend signs up through it, you both get credits, and you both get more if they upgrade. Rewards land automatically, and there is no code to enter. Unlike onboarding rewards, referrals have no steps to complete and no 7-day earning window, and they are not limited to new accounts. Open the referral panel from **Invite friends** at the bottom of the rewards panel. ![The Invite friends referral panel with a copyable referral link, sign-up and upgrade credit amounts, and a credit history summary.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XtpX0dcARKnc2VBl/images/imgs/ao-onboarding-referral-rewards-invite.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XtpX0dcARKnc2VBl\&q=85\&s=b6e44286a2d723a0fed6967b1bc0ee0b) *The referral panel, reached from Invite friends.* ## 9. What each referral pays | **What happens** | **Credits you each get** | | - | - | | Your friend signs up | 60 | | Your friend upgrades to Pro | 50 | | Your friend upgrades to Max | 100 | Both sides of a referral earn the same amount. Upgrade rewards only pay if your friend upgrades within one week of signing up. Referral earnings are capped at 1,500 credits a month. ## 10. Your referral link and tracking Your link is in the referral panel, under **Your referral link**. Select **Copy link** and share it anywhere. The panel tracks how many friends joined and what you have earned from sign-ups and upgrades separately, so you can see which part of the program is paying out. # Both programs ## 11. Where to see the credits you earned Open your credit history from the subscription page. Every reward appears as its own entry, named after the step or referral that earned it. You can also reach it from **View credit history** in the referral panel. ## 12. Getting help [Contact support](/docs/article/how-to-contact-support) for anything to do with your rewards, referrals, or credits. You can also share feedback in our [Discord channel](https://discord.com/invite/VCqdxQgRXB) or through the in-app survey. Onboarding rewards give you up to 135 free credits for getting started with Agent Opus. Complete seven short setup steps, claim each one, and the credits land in your balance. This guide covers where to find the rewards panel, what each step pays, and the two deadlines that apply. # Story Mode FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/agent-opus/article/ao-story-mode-faq # 1. What is Story Mode? ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-intro.gif?s=9c534c143e7595c2da885e6469dafd16) Introducing Story Mode, a new way to create your personal style that stays consistent across every shot. You can: Upload your custom style, Bring your own audio or script, Create all formats of polished mid-form videos. Whether it's explainers, faceless videos, hip videos, or marketing videos, Story Mode helps you tell a better story. Story Mode is built to solve the three biggest problems in AI video: the style consistency problem, where visuals feel disjointed, the static problem where videos lack real motion, and the transition problem where scenes "cut" or jump instead of flowing shot to shot. It uses a "Long Take" technique, creating a seamless, immersive experience where scenes morph and flow into one another without jarring cuts. This makes it perfect for a wide range of use cases: * **Narrative Storytelling**: Bring your stories to life with a consistent visual style that matches your narrative tone. Ideal for brand stories, historical explainers, or fictional narratives. * **Educational Content**: Create engaging and easy-to-follow educational videos. The fluid transitions help to keep viewers focused and engaged on the content. * **Marketing and Advertising**: Produce eye-catching marketing videos that stand out. The unique visual styles can help to build a strong brand identity. * **Social Media Content**: Quickly generate content of different formats for platforms like TikTok, Instagram Reels, and YouTube Shorts. # 2. How is Story Mode different from the original Agent Opus experience? The main Agent Opus video product is built for creating videos that are grounded in reality. It pulls together a hybrid mix of real-world assets, stock footage, AI-generated visuals, and avatars to produce polished, professional content. Story Mode is designed for purely imaginative and stylistic storytelling, where every single frame is generated by AI and shares the same visual DNA. | **Feature** | Core Agent Opus | New Story Mode | | - | - | - | | **Asset Source** | Hybrid (Real assets, stock, AI, Avatars) | 100% AI Generative, can include real world asset reference | | **Visual Style** | Can vary due to mixing different asset types | Hyper Consistent (Unified Art Style across every frame) | | **Transitions** | Standard cuts and fades from template | Fluid Morphs and Continuous Camera Movement | | **Primary Goal** | Realistic, accurate and professional narration | Immersion and Narrative Flow | # 3. How do I get started with Story Mode? ## 1. Open Agent Opus Create an account and log in at agent.opus.pro using a one-time password. ## 2. Enter Story Mode From the main Agent Opus dashboard, click the "**Story Mode**" button on the side panel. This takes you into the dedicated Story Mode interface. ## 3. Submit Your Request Once you are in Story Mode, you will see the headline "**Create a short video in your own style**." Below that is the input box, which is pre-tagged with @StoryMode. Type directly into the chatbot. You can start in several ways: * **Submit a script** (e.g., "Turn this script into a video: \[your script]") * **Describe a topic** (e.g., "Create a video about \[a video idea]") * **Upload audio** Note: Transcripts cannot exceed **450 words** or approximately **4 minutes of audio**. For the best results, provide a well-structured transcript that tells a clear story. Story Mode is optimized for narrative content. If audio has been uploaded, Story Mode can only take in the audio and clear all other prompts you have entered. The audio used must not be instrumental. ## 4. Select a Style and Submit Choose a visual style from the preset gallery at the top of the page. You can also create your own custom style if none of the presets match your vision. Once you are happy with your selection, hit submit and Agent Opus will handle the rest. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-sample-cases.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=c632a4c8e83592f8cb539b7d84c10491) ## 5. Sample Cases Want to get inspiration? Scroll down to the "**Top story mode**" section to browse sample projects in various styles: * See a project you like? Click it to see the prompt that was used or even recreate it using the recreate button. * Each example shows a different visual style with the style name labeled at the bottom, so you can quickly find a look that matches your vision. * Browse across styles like Claymation, 2D Line, Animation, Collage, Claire, Pen & Ink, Halftone, Schematic, Watercolor, and Blue Vox to see what each one looks like in a finished video. \[Image] # 4. What types of input does Story Mode accept? Story Mode is flexible about how you start your project. You can come in with a fully written script, a rough idea, or even just an audio recording. Here is a breakdown of inputs Story Mode accepts and how to use each one: | **Input** | Agent Opus (Main) | Story Mode | | - | - | - | | **Directly prompting** | ✓ | ✓ | | **Transcript (used as the video script)** | Need to prompt | Directly used as the transcript | | **Publicly available links** | ✓ | ✗ | | **Documents (Docs, PDF, etc...)** | ✓ | ✗ | | **Non-instrumental audio files directly applied in the video (Music or voiceover)** | ✓ | ✗ | | **Input Type** | Supported Formats | How to Use It | | | - | - | - | - | | **Transcript or Script** | Text (paste directly into the input box) | Paste your full script, and Story Mode will generate a video that follows your narrative bit by bit. The more structured your transcript, the better the output. | | | **Audio File** | .wav, .mp3 | Directly used as the transcript | Upload a voice recording or narration file. Story Mode will transcribe it and use it as the script for your video. This is great if you want to use a song or a podcast. | | **Prompt or Topic** | Text (paste directly into the input box) | Describe what you want your video to be about in a few sentences. For example, "Create a video explaining how black holes form" or "Make a video about the rise of electric vehicles." Story Mode will generate a full script from your prompt and then produce the video. The prompt can be simpler and more direct for story mode. | | The possibilities here are limitless. You could paste a blog post you wrote and turn it into a narrated video. You could record yourself talking through an idea on your phone, upload the audio, and let Story Mode handle the rest. You could describe a concept you have been thinking about and see it come to life in a visual style you love. The point is that Story Mode meets you wherever you are in your creative process. 5. How can I customize my video? (prior to project submission) ## 🎨 Visual Styles Story Mode offers a curated gallery of 12+ preset visual styles, each one carefully designed to maintain hyper consistency throughout your entire video. Every frame in your video will share the same visual DNA, so there are no jarring shifts between scenes. Available styles include:
![2D Line](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-2d-line.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=6baddf168cefd0a084686af2eef4080a)\ **2D Line**\ Clean, hand-drawn line art with sketch-like quality ![Animation](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-3d-animation.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=28a6e25026ca76eec0477a190417e31e)\ **Animation**\ Vibrant, colorful animated illustration ![Collage](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-blue-collage.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=75a0967a92b315fbecf3b3e5ce4322c5)\ **Collage**\ Textured, mixed media collage with a handmade feel
![Blue Vox](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-blue-vox.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=c4c49ee38f4a35a0fc732a66039c62d0)\ **Blue Vox**\ Stylized, Vox-inspired editorial graphics ![Claire](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-claire.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=e98b4d62396ff736311618d15232f147)\ **Claire**\ Soft, elegant illustration with gentle tones ![Claymation](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-claymation.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=ca8b2bf84c78e57699bc11d8f5bb433f)\ **Claymation**\ Stop motion clay aesthetic that looks like real claymation
![Economic](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-economic.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=656500c63ddeb5a09ece0abdbb1c5e6e)\ **Economic**\ Data-driven, infographic style with charts and figures ![Halftone](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-halftone.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=5c03bf0ba9c1078b378e6c217cc9fb15)\ **Halftone**\ Retro halftone print effect with a vintage newspaper look ![Marcinelle](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-marcinelle.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=1fa387b55dc24331d420c405248c8014)\ **Marcinelle**\ European comic book style with bold outlines
![Pen & Ink](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-pen-n-ink.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=eafb6e1840290e438a3b6b3f03e3d142)\ **Pen & Ink**\ Classic pen and ink illustration with crosshatching ![Schematic](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-schematic.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=c2f21d158573e8e7188f7cee8673357f)\ **Schematic**\ Technical blueprint style with a mechanical feel ![Watercolor](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-watercolor.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=8e70ee48f5501f6bb37cf5f58a628f53)\ **Watercolor**\ Soft, flowing watercolor painting aesthetic
![Vox](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-yellow-vox.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=8548b5140755cd713f2e88a271746d53)\ **Vox**\ Bold, editorial graphics with strong typography
## 🖌️ Custom Styles If none of the presets match your vision, you can create a **custom style**. Click the "**Add style**" button at the beginning of the style gallery to open the Style Creator. From there, you have two options: * **STYLE IMAGE**: Upload a reference image (PNG, JPG, or WebP) that represents the visual look you want. Story Mode will analyze the image and apply that aesthetic to your entire video. * **STYLE INSTRUCTION**: Write a text description of your custom style in the text box. For example, you could write "dark moody watercolor with heavy shadows and muted earth tones" and Story Mode will interpret that into a visual style. You can use either one or both together for the best results. Once you are happy with your custom style, click "**Apply**" to save it and use it for your project. Your custom styles are saved to your library so you can reuse them on future projects. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-custom-styles.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=e3bd741890cb9bcc9562a086bf644c7f) ## 📱 Aspect Ratio Story Mode supports multiple aspect ratios so you can create content optimized for different platforms. To change the aspect ratio, click the aspect ratio button in the input toolbar before submitting your project. * **9:16** (Vertical) This is the default setting and is ideal for TikTok, Instagram Reels, and YouTube Shorts * **16:9** (Horizontal) Best for YouTube videos and landscape content * **1:1** (Square) Works well for Instagram feed posts and LinkedIn ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI/images/imgs/ao-story-mode-aspect-ratio.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=gQ0YGdxFrfkckfAI\&q=85\&s=2cdb2e756a96cf813cea98ac6abefb56) ## 🎙️ Voiceover Story Mode gives you full control over how your video sounds. You can choose from the existing Agent Opus voice library, which includes a range of built-in AI voices with different tones, accents, and styles. To select a voice, click the "Voice" button in the input toolbar. From there, you can: * **Use a built-in voice**: Browse and preview the built-in AI voices to find one that matches the mood of your content * **Clone a voice**: Upload or record up to a 30-second sample of your voice or the voice you want and Story Mode will clone it to narrate the entire video Voice cloning is a powerful way to make your content feel personal and authentic. Whether you are building a personal brand or creating content for a specific audience, having your choice of voice on the video makes a big difference. # 6. How does Story Mode generate my video? Story Mode does not just "generate video." It **directs** it. After you submit your content, the system runs through a multi-stage AI pipeline that has been specifically designed to ensure narrative flow and visual consistency across every frame of your video. **Traditional AI Video**: Audio shots → Separate videos → Hard cuts **Story Mode**: Audio shots → Videos with transitions → Fluid morphs # 7. When should I NOT use Story Mode? While Story Mode is a powerful tool, it is not the right fit for every type of video. Here are some situations where you should use the core Agent Opus or OpusClip instead: * **Specific Real World Accuracy**: Story Mode is an interpretive tool, not a documentary tool. It cannot perfectly generate specific real people, real locations, or photorealistic scenes. If your video needs to show exactly what a person or place looks like, use the core Agent Opus which can pull in real-world assets and stock footage. * **Heavy editing or clipping**: For videos that require heavy editing or clipping long videos into shorter segments, use OpusClip or the core Agent Opus editor instead. Story Mode is designed as a "set it and forget it" experience. * **Online content**: Story Mode cannot pull content from links. # 8. What are the video length limits? Story Mode videos follow the same length requirements as the core Agent Opus. Transcripts cannot exceed **450 words** or **4 minutes of audio**. The recommended length for optimal quality and social media performance is under **3 minutes**, which aligns with the ideal format for TikTok, Reels, and YouTube Shorts. Keeping your videos in this range also helps with viewer retention and engagement. # 9. How many projects can I submit? Story Mode projects count toward your overall Agent Opus project quota. To allow as many users as possible to enjoy Agent Opus, there may be a limit on the total number of projects you can generate per day. # 10. How can I edit my videos? Right now, you can export the video and use OpusClip to edit it. # 11. What is the future of Story Mode? Story Mode is continuously evolving. The team is actively working on new features and improvements based on user feedback. Here is a preview of what is coming next: 1. **Integrating With Real World Online Assets**:\*\* Deep integration with real-time online assets to blend AI-generated content with real-world references. This will let you combine the consistency of Story Mode with the authenticity of real footage. 2. **Editor**: Clip editing and clip regeneration capabilities so you can fine-tune individual scenes without regenerating the entire video. 3. **Greater Personalization**: Avatar mode, the ability to upload your own assets, and smarter user intent understanding, so Story Mode can better interpret what you are looking for. # 12. How can I provide feedback? We are building Story Mode with your input, and we would love to hear from you. Feel free to share any feedback on our Discord channel ([https://discord.gg/MNPVXHNsht](https://discord.gg/MNPVXHNsht)) or through the in-app survey. # Supported Regions Source: https://help.opus.pro/agent-opus/article/ao-supported-regions Below is the current list of **countries, regions, and territories** from which **Agent Opus** is officially supported and accessible. We are actively working to **expand availability**, more regions will be added soon. If your country isn't listed yet, please stay tuned! ## Currently supported: * Albania * Andorra * Antigua and Barbuda * Argentina * Armenia * Australia * Austria * Azerbaijan * Bahamas * Bahrain * Barbados * Belarus * Belgium * Belize * Bolivia * Bosnia and Herzegovina * Botswana * Brazil * Bulgaria * Canada * Chile * Colombia * Costa Rica * Croatia * Cyprus * Czech Republic * Denmark * Dominica * Dominican Republic * Estonia * Fiji * Finland * France * Georgia * Germany * Greece * Grenada * Guyana * Hungary * Iceland * Ireland * India * Israel * Italy * Jamaica * Japan * Kiribati * Kosovo * Kuwait * Latvia * Liechtenstein * Lithuania * Luxembourg * Malaysia * Malta * Marshall Islands * Mexico * Micronesia * Moldova * Monaco * Montenegro * Netherlands * New Zealand * North Macedonia * Norway * Papua New Guinea * Paraguay * Peru * Philippines * Poland * Portugal * Puerto Rico * Qatar * Romania * Saint Kitts and Nevis * Saint Lucia * Saint Vincent and the Grenadines * Samoa * San Marino * Serbia * Singapore * Slovakia * Slovenia * Solomon Islands * South Africa * South Korea * Spain * Suriname * Sweden * Switzerland * Tonga * Trinidad and Tobago * Turkey * United Arab Emirates * United Kingdom * United States * Uruguay * Vatican City * Venezuela # Agent Opus Prompt Guide Source: https://help.opus.pro/agent-opus/prompt-guide A prompt is the text instruction Agent Opus turns into a video. What you write decides the quality, tone and accuracy of what comes back. This guide covers how to write a prompt, what each mode needs from you, how to bring in your own assets, and what to do when a generation misses. # 1. How to write an effective prompt These habits cover most of it. State what the video should cover, give the background Agent Opus cannot guess, hand over your source material or script directly, and keep your request inside what the product is built for. | **Do this** | **More effective prompt** | **Less effective prompt** | | - | - | - | | **Be clear and specific.** State what the video should cover and the style or tone you want. | Create an informative explainer video about future space tourism, with vibrant visuals and a friendly narrator. | Make a video about space travel. | | **Give context.** Name the topic, the audience, the style, and anything the video must include. | I want a faceless, informative video based on the article below. It should explain why Labubu is gaining popularity. My audience is marketing professionals interested in branding and audience engagement. Keep the facts accurate. \[Paste the article text here] | Create a video talking about Labubu. | | **Give the source material.** Paste the blog text, headlines or transcript you want used. Links may not import, and PDFs or Docs are not accepted as files. | Turn my blog post about Labubu below into a 60-second narrated video with smooth motion graphics. \[Paste the blog text here] | Here is my blog title: Labubu. | | **Paste your script.** On Standard and Standard+, Agent Opus turns a written script into voiced narration. A full script beats a summary of one. | Make a video about how AI pushes genuine creativity. Here is my script: Everyone's worried AI is flooding the world with generic content. But that is exactly what is pushing us forward. Tools can pump out endless art and music, but only by remixing what already exists. They cannot touch your lived experience, your voice, your truth. People say AI is lowering the bar. It is raising it. If you want to stand out now, you have to be specific. Honest. Unmistakably you. | Make a video about AI and creativity. Use my script somehow and make it look cool. | | **Know the limits.** Agent Opus generates new video from your prompt. To edit or clip raw footage, use [OpusClip](https://www.opus.pro/). | Agent Opus is not built to: - Add animated captions to raw videos. Use OpusClip. - Turn long videos into short clips. Use OpusClip. - Pull content from paywalled sources. Paste or summarize the content yourself. - Recreate exact logos or fonts from a text description. Upload your logo as a reference, but expect possible changes when it is regenerated. Style Maker sets colors; it does not resolve exact font reproduction. | N/A | > [!NOTE] > > If you get stuck, join our [Discord community](https://discord.com/invite/VCqdxQgRXB). We are around to answer questions and connect you with other creators. # 2. Pick your mode before you write Agent Opus has four modes in two families. Standard and Standard+ can turn a written script or transcript into narrated video. Premium and Ultra build scenes with optional dialogue. They can use an uploaded recording as narration or dialogue, but cannot generate a voiceover directly from a supplied transcript. For a full comparison of what each mode includes, see [Choosing a mode](/agent-opus/article/ao-faq#3-choosing-a-mode) in the Agent Opus FAQ. | **Mode** | **Best for** | **What your prompt should carry** | **Length** | | - | - | - | - | | **Standard** All plans | Narrated explainers and stories | A script, transcript or clear topic plus audience and tone | Up to 10 minutes | | **Standard+** All plans | Videos with people or text on screen | Same as Standard, plus what should appear on screen | Up to 10 minutes | | **Premium** Pro and Max | Multi-shot scenes, dialogue, ads and music videos | Scenes and actions, with dialogue when needed | Up to 3 minutes | | **Ultra** Pro and Max | Photorealistic visuals | Same as Premium, with detail on look and lighting | Up to 3 minutes | # 3. Standard and Standard+ Narration drives everything here. Agent Opus writes or takes a script, generates the voiceover, and builds visuals to match it. You can also upload a spoken recording. Standard and Standard+ are available on all plans and have no fixed video-duration cap. ## What it is best for | **Use case** | **Best for** | **Example prompt** | | - | - | - | | **Explainer** Teaching something clearly and simply | What is X videos, how-it-works videos, step-by-step guides, concept breakdowns | Create a video on the history of the internet. Include specific dates, breakthroughs and modern trends. | | **Thought leadership** Sharing your ideas, frameworks and opinions | Mental models, lessons learned, hot takes about your industry | Create a polished 45-second LinkedIn video on self-sabotage. Include these ideas: awareness means nothing without intentional action; self-sabotage is a set of habits, not an identity; inner reflection is how you spot the pattern. Keep the tone clear, concise and professional. | | **News** Explaining what happened and why it matters | Geopolitics, local updates, market changes, product launches | Create a 90-second video explaining this week's interest rate decision and what it means for mortgage rates. Keep the facts accurate. \[Paste the news article text here] | ## How to prompt * **Hand over the full script.** A complete script beats a description of one. Script length and speaking pace determine the final runtime. * **Name the audience and the tone.** Marketing professionals and curious teenagers get different scripts from the same topic. * **Paste your sources.** Paste the article text, transcript or notes you want the facts drawn from. Links may not import and paywalled pages cannot be read, so paste the text itself. * **Pick the voice.** Open **Audio** in the composer to choose a built-in voice, clone your own or upload a spoken recording. You can also change it at the Script stage. * **Leave shot-by-shot direction out.** Describe the story and the feel. The optional storyboard stage is where you shape individual shots. # 4. Premium and Ultra These modes build a sequence of shots, with lip-synced character dialogue when needed. Describe scenes and actions; dialogue is optional. Available on Pro and Max. Videos run up to 3 minutes, or up to 10 minutes with **Song to video**. ## What it is best for | **Use case** | **Best for** | **Example prompt** | | - | - | - | | **Ads and promos** Getting people interested in a product, event or service | Product launches, brand spots, campaign ads. **Assets to Ads** builds an ad from your own product images, and works in every mode. | Create a 30-second holiday ad for Agent Opus. Scene 1: a designer alone at her desk late at night, staring at an empty timeline. Scene 2: she types one line into Agent Opus and her screen fills with a snowy, cinematic city street. She says: "That took ten seconds." Scene 3: her teammate leans over her shoulder and says: "Ship it." | | **Stories with dialogue** Telling a story through characters who speak on camera | Skits, short films, character-driven social content | Create a 45-second comedy skit. Two coworkers in a break room argue over the last slice of pizza. Maya: "I called it this morning." Dev: "Calling it is not a legal claim." End on a third coworker walking in, already eating it. | | **Photorealistic scenes** Footage that should look filmed, not generated. Best on Ultra. | Lifestyle shots, products in use, cinematic b-roll | Create a 20-second photorealistic video of a barista pouring latte art at golden hour. Slow push-in, shallow depth of field, warm window light. | | **Music videos** Turning a song into a performance video, with visuals cut to the track | Upload the song with **Song to video**, up to 10 minutes. Only the audio is used. | Create a music video for my song. A singer performs on a rooftop at night as the city lights come on. Cut between close-ups of her singing and wide shots of the skyline. Moody, neon-lit, handheld feel. | | **Style match** Recreating the look of a video you already have, with **Reference to video** (beta) | Matching a past campaign, a mood reference or a trend format. The reference audio is not used. | Match the style, pacing and color grade of the attached video, but make it about our new running shoe. Use @Object image 1.png and @Object image 2.png for the product. | ## How to prompt * **Describe what happens.** Write the actions and visual details for each beat. Include the lines characters speak if the scene needs dialogue. Silent scenes and music videos do not need spoken lines. * **Add references for anything recurring.** Upload images of characters, objects and logos that appear more than once. Consistency across shots depends on them. * **Review the script before clips generate.** The script sets scene order, timing and speech. Fixing the story there is far cheaper than fixing it after the clips are made. * **Keep it within 3 minutes.** Premium and Ultra cap at 3 minutes. Shorten longer stories, or use Standard or Standard+ for a longer narrated video. **Song to video** is the exception and runs up to 10 minutes. * **Upload recorded speech for narration or a specific voice.** Premium and Ultra can use a spoken recording as off-screen narration or character dialogue. Unlike Standard and Standard+, they cannot generate a voiceover directly from a supplied transcript. Built-in voice selection and voice cloning are not available. * **For music videos, describe the performer and the look.** The track sets the pacing, so you do not need to time scenes to the lyrics. # 5. Referencing your own assets Your own images, audio and references make a video feel like yours. Agent Opus redraws uploaded images, including logos, in the chosen style. Uploads guide the result but do not guarantee exact reproduction. Check likeness, lettering, colors and fine details in the generated video. ## What you can bring in * **Images.** Product photos, screenshots, headshots and logos. Upload up to eight in **Assets**. * **Spoken audio.** Upload a recording through **Audio** in the composer or **Audio to video**. In Premium and Ultra, it can serve as narration or character dialogue. * **Music.** A song, through **Song to video**. * **Reference video.** A video file or public link, through **Reference to video**, to match its style. * **Articles and documents.** Paste the text into your prompt. Links may not import, and PDFs or Docs are not accepted as files. ## Upload first Open **Assets** in the composer and add each image as a character, logo or object, up to eight in total. Supported formats are PNG, JPG, WebP, GIF, SVG, HEIC/HEIF, TIFF and AVIF. ![The Assets panel with Character, Logo and Object slots, plus options to add an asset or a reference video.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2fbcyHLgxikYZpHf/images/imgs/ao-prompt-guide-assets.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2fbcyHLgxikYZpHf\&q=85\&s=ffce9d4664cc202f5ee86a4272344c38) *Open Assets in the composer and add each image as a character, logo or object.* ## Reference them clearly Type **@** in your prompt and pick the asset from the dropdown. It drops in as a tag linked to that image. Naming a file in plain text does not link it. ![A prompt using @ mentions for a character, object and logo image.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2fbcyHLgxikYZpHf/images/imgs/ao-prompt-guide-mention.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2fbcyHLgxikYZpHf\&q=85\&s=b0bda0e3fc3ed8d20777a4be578429c0) *Type @ in your prompt and pick the asset from the dropdown.* ## Describe the job, not just the file Say what the asset is and what you want it to do. * **Better:** Show @Character image 1.png placing @Object image 1.png on a desk. End on @Logo image 1.png. * **Worse:** Use my images somewhere. # 6. Why the AI sometimes gets details wrong The video models are powerful, but not perfect. You will sometimes see odd artifacts, physical impossibilities or details that morph mid-shot. ## Why it happens The model has no real understanding of physics, anatomy or logic. It generates video by predicting patterns from the images and clips it was trained on. Video is harder than a still image because the model has to hold characters, objects and backgrounds steady frame after frame. It is calculating probabilities rather than simulating the real world, so it loses track of complex structures as a shot goes on. ## What you will see * **Anatomical errors.** Hands and fingers are the usual culprits: extra digits, missing ones, limbs bending the wrong way. * **Physics and space.** Characters walking through walls, objects floating, liquids running upward, items changing size. * **Morphing and flickering.** Clothing changes color, faces shift, background objects appear or vanish. * **Object interactions.** Holding a cup, typing, playing an instrument. Hand and object often blend together. * **Text and logos within generated footage.** Lettering, signage and logos can become distorted or unreadable. This risk also applies to uploaded logos when they are regenerated. * **Reflections and shadows.** Mirrors and water reflect the wrong thing, and shadows fall in the wrong direction. > [!TIP] > > If you hit one of these, simplify the action or revise the visual direction. For Standard and Standard+, shape individual shots at the storyboard stage; for Premium and Ultra, describe shorter, simpler shots in the scene instructions. > [!NOTE] > > The models behind Agent Opus come from specialist third-party vendors. We do not train them in-house, so their limitations are ours too. > [!WARNING] > > Avoid repeatedly regenerating the whole project with the same prompt to fix a possible model limitation. Simplify the request first, and [contact support](/docs/article/how-to-contact-support) if the problem persists. Full-project regenerations are separate from the Standard and Standard+ editor free retry described below. # 7. Editing your video In every mode, editing generates new footage for the affected part and blends it back into the video. The final video may be reassembled with the regenerated footage. An edited shot is subject to the same model limitations as the original. Review the edit estimate before proceeding. ## Standard and Standard+ 1. **Acknowledge the warning.** Before your first edit in each project, acknowledge that AI editing is experimental and may contain errors or miss your request. Each video includes one free retry. 2. **Select the moment.** Open the finished video and click the change box. Use **Screenshot** to point at a moment, or **Timestamp** to pick a point on the timeline, then drag either end to set the range. 3. **Describe the change.** Name the object or area and what should happen to it. Change the sky to a sunset. Give the character a red jacket. Attach a reference image with **+** if it helps. 4. **Review the cost before generating.** Paid edit previews use credits when they are generated, before you apply them. The included free retry is the exception. 5. **Review the result.** Generated edits remain visible even when they do not match your request. Compare the preview with the original and apply it if you want to keep it. Discarding a paid preview does not reverse the charge; edit-quality failures are not refunded. 6. **Use the free retry if needed.** If the result is flagged as not matching your request, choose **Try again, free** to retry or **Leave it** to stop. There is one free retry per video, with no expiry. Once used, further attempts use credits. ## Premium and Ultra 1. **Edit through project chat.** Open the finished video and select **Edit**, or type the request in chat. Name the scene and describe the result you want, for example: the ending feels abrupt, hold on the finished loaf a little longer. 2. **Confirm the estimate.** Review the proposed change and its cost before confirming. The edit regenerates the affected footage and may rebuild the final video with those updated clips. 3. **Mind the 30-day window.** Premium and Ultra projects can be edited for 30 days. After that the project shows as **Expired** or **Locked** and editing is unavailable, though the finished video stays available to watch and download. ## Pro tips * **Be specific.** Mention lighting, colors and the exact action. * **Change one thing at a time.** Rewriting a whole scene in a single edit invites visual inconsistency. * **Expect the same limitations.** The editor generates new footage, so morphing and anatomical quirks can appear in an edit too. # 8. Content filters and error messages A content-filter block is different from a generated edit that misses your request. A generation blocked by the AI vendor's content filter does not cost credits. For a visible Standard or Standard+ edit that misses your request, follow the review and free-retry steps in [Editing your video](#7-editing-your-video); a quality warning does not block the result or trigger a refund. * **Rephrase in neutral language.** Describe the scene plainly. * **Rephrase harmless requests that are misread.** Terms associated with violence, explicit content, copyrighted figures or hazardous activity can trigger a filter. Describe your intended scene plainly and follow the product's content rules. * **Stay on the visual.** Describe lighting, camera angle and movement rather than abstract concepts. Some Standard and Standard+ editing requests are unsupported. If a request is refused before generation, follow the suggested route: rephrase it, use the OpusClip editor, or cancel. This is different from a generated edit that is shown with a quality warning. For recurring generation errors, [contact support](/docs/article/how-to-contact-support) before repeatedly regenerating the whole project. [Contact support](/docs/article/how-to-contact-support) with your project link or ID for anything else. # OpusClip MCP Server Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/agent-setup Connect OpusClip to an AI agent and work from natural-language prompts such as "clip this video" or "schedule this clip to post tomorrow at 9am." Pro-tier API access is in **Beta**. The limits described on [Limitations](/api-reference/limitation) apply to **Pro Beta** and **Max** unless noted otherwise. Business customers have API access per their contract. This page covers the **MCP Server** (`mcp.opus.pro/mcp`) for Cursor, Cline, Claude Code, ChatGPT / Codex, and other MCP hosts. Using Claude.ai? Use the [Claude Connector](/api-reference/claude-connector) instead. Prefer an API-key code package? See the [Skill](/api-reference/skill). **1. Install** OpusClip runs as a **hosted MCP server** — nothing to install or run locally, and OAuth sign-in on first use (no API key): ``` https://mcp.opus.pro/mcp ``` The MCP Server exposes the full tool catalog, including thumbnail, speech, music, and video generation. (The [Claude Connector](/api-reference/claude-connector) is a separate endpoint for Claude.ai: workflow tools only, and publishing there requires the user to confirm in OpusClip.) Any OpusClip account can complete the OAuth flow and view the tool catalog. Calling a tool requires **Pro Beta**, **Max**, or **Business** plan access; without it, the host returns an upgrade prompt. #### Install from a directory (one-click) OpusClip is listed across the agent-discovery ecosystem — the fastest ways to add it (all connect to `https://mcp.opus.pro/mcp`; complete the OAuth sign-in on first use): * **npm** — `npx @opusclip/mcp`, or add it to your host config: ```json theme={"dark"} { "mcpServers": { "opusclip": { "command": "npx", "args": ["-y", "@opusclip/mcp"] } } } ``` * **MCP Registry** — search `opusclip` (server name `io.github.opus-pro/opusclip`). * **Smithery** — [smithery.ai/servers/opusclip/opusclip](https://smithery.ai/servers/opusclip/opusclip). * **Cursor** — search `OpusClip` on [cursor.directory](https://cursor.directory), or use an **Add to Cursor** deep link. * **Cline** — search `OpusClip` in the Cline MCP Marketplace. #### Other MCP hosts (manual config) Point your host at `https://mcp.opus.pro/mcp` and complete the OAuth flow when prompted. For example, Cursor (`~/.cursor/mcp.json`) or Cline (`cline_mcp_settings.json`): ```json theme={"dark"} { "mcpServers": { "opusclip": { "url": "https://mcp.opus.pro/mcp" } } } ``` #### Tool catalog The MCP Server exposes the 37 tools below: 29 workflow tools, plus 8 media tools that only mcp.opus.pro serves. The [Claude Connector](/api-reference/claude-connector) is **not** the same surface. It exposes the same 29 workflow tools and none of the media tools, and — the difference that matters most — its posting, scheduling, unscheduling, and project-sharing tools **do not commit**: they return a link the user confirms in OpusClip. On this endpoint those same four tools commit directly, because you configured `mcp.opus.pro` yourself rather than reaching it through a listed connector. Do not assume a prompt that works here behaves identically there. > [accordion] Read tools (15) — no approval prompt > > * `opusclip_whoami` — identity check for the connected org > * `opusclip_get_usage` — show the org's current API usage against its cap > * `opusclip_list_projects` — list recent clip projects > * `opusclip_list_clips` — list clips inside a project > * `opusclip_describe_clip` — fetch a single clip's detail (transcript, layout, render status) > * `opusclip_list_collections` — list collections > * `opusclip_list_clips_in_collection` — list clips inside a collection > * `opusclip_list_brand_templates` — list brand templates > * `opusclip_list_social_accounts` — list connected social accounts > * `opusclip_list_scheduled_posts` — list scheduled and recent posts (returns the `schedule_id` that unscheduling requires) > * `opusclip_get_transcript` — fetch a project's source-video transcript > * `opusclip_get_social_copy_job` — fetch a social copy job > * `opusclip_analyze_video` — report what is on screen across a time range of the **source video**: faces and people with their positions, screen regions, document layout, and whether the person on camera is the one speaking · asynchronous — one call with `projectId`, `clipId`, `startMs` and `endMs` starts it and returns a `task_id`, then call again with `taskId` alone until `status` is `completed` and `segments` appear · offsets are measured from the start of the source video, not the clip · changes nothing and spends no credits > * `opusclip_list_pinterest_boards` — list the boards a connected Pinterest account can pin to. Pinterest requires a board on every pin, so pass the board ID as `boardId` to `create_post_task` or `schedule_publish`. > * `opusclip_preview_clips` — show a project's top clips as a playable card grid in chat (6 by default; set `limit`, or `clipId` for a single clip). Hosts that do not support MCP Apps get the same clip data as JSON. > [accordion] Write tools (14) — approval prompt per call > > * `opusclip_submit_project` — clip a YouTube or Vimeo URL · consumes credits > * `opusclip_create_upload_link` — get a signed URL to upload a local video > * `opusclip_edit_clip` — edit a clip with named operations in one call: captions, emoji, and keyword-highlight toggles; filler-word and pause removal; section trim, split, drop, and reorder; phrase cutting; caption colour, position, and casing; clip dubbing; and undo · re-renders the preview > * `opusclip_create_censor_job` — bleep or mask flagged content · consumes credits > * `opusclip_share_project` — make a project publicly viewable > * `opusclip_create_collection` — create a collection > * `opusclip_add_clip_to_collection` — add a clip to a collection > * `opusclip_export_clip` — get one clip's HD download URL (ready / rendering / unavailable) > * `opusclip_export_collection` — get HD download URLs for every clip in a collection > * `opusclip_duplicate_clip` — copy a clip to ` (Copy)`; free, no re-render > * `opusclip_create_social_copy_job` — generate platform-specific social copy > * `opusclip_create_post_task` — post a clip to a connected social account · Pinterest needs a `boardId` > * `opusclip_schedule_publish` — schedule a clip for future posting · Pinterest needs a `boardId` > * `opusclip_unschedule_publish` — cancel a previously scheduled post > [accordion] Media tools (8) — mcp.opus.pro only > > * `opusclip_create_thumbnail_job` — generate thumbnail options for a clip · consumes credits > * `opusclip_get_thumbnail_job` — fetch a thumbnail job's status and results > * `opusclip_create_speech_job` — generate a voiceover from text, with 30 prebuilt voices and optional style direction (up to 6,000 characters; each CJK character counts as 3) · consumes credits > * `opusclip_create_music_job` — generate a music track from a prompt: genre, instruments, BPM, structure, and mood, plus lyrics or "instrumental only" · consumes credits > * `opusclip_create_video_job` — generate an MP4 clip from a prompt or a first frame. Hailuo 3: 5–15 seconds, 768p or 2K, can start and end on a given frame. Seedance 2.5: 4–30 seconds, 480p or 720p, optional native audio · consumes credits > * `opusclip_get_media_generation_job` — fetch a speech, music, or video job's status, credits charged, and download URLs (valid for 24 hours) > * `opusclip_analyze_reference_media` — analyze a reference video or audio file (up to 300 seconds) against your prompt · holds 15 credits while it runs, then charges the actual cost > * `opusclip_get_reference_analysis` — fetch an analysis result and the credits charged > > Speech, music, and video generation have a fixed price. Before it spends anything, the agent gets a free quote (`maxCredits: 0`) and shows you the price. Each call sets the most credits it may spend, so it never charges more than you approved. Credits are held when the job starts, charged when it succeeds, and released if it fails. Retired tools: `opusclip_get_editing_script`, `opusclip_apply_editing_script`, and `opusclip_create_media_generation_job` are no longer listed. An agent that calls one from an outdated tool list is pointed to its replacement. `list_clips` and `describe_clip` return **preview** URLs only — the HD download URL comes from `export_clip` (one clip) or `export_collection` (a collection). #### Troubleshooting > [accordion] OAuth fails or returns 'No matching client' > > Sign in with the same identity provider used to create the OpusClip account (email, Google, or Apple). > [accordion] Tools return 'API access not enabled for this org' > > The org does not have the API entitlement. Pro Beta and Max orgs receive it automatically. Otherwise, [contact sales](https://www.opus.pro/contact-api). > [accordion] Which org does the connector use for a multi-org user? > > The one picked on the OAuth consent screen at connect time. It is fixed for the life of the connection, and no tool can switch it — there is no `list_orgs`. To act in a different org, disconnect and reconnect, choosing that org while signing in. `whoami` reports the current one. > [accordion] 401 errors keep firing > > Hosts refresh tokens automatically. If refresh fails persistently, remove the connector and re-add it. > [accordion] 403 or 429 responses > > `403` indicates the monthly cap (`15h` / `900` credits per workspace) has been hit. The cap resets on the first day of the next month (UTC). `429` indicates the concurrent-project limit (`4`) has been hit and clears as in-flight projects finish. See [Limitations](/api-reference/limitation). Tools consume credits and inherit the Pro Beta & Max caps (`15h` monthly, `10`-credit per-project floor, `4` concurrent projects). See [Limitations](/api-reference/limitation). **2. Try it** **Clip a video** > Clip this YouTube video and give me the top 5 best clips > `https://youtube.com/watch?v=...` **Inline edits** > Fix the typo in caption 4 of clip 3. ## What's next * Using Claude.ai? See the [Claude Connector](/api-reference/claude-connector). * Prefer an API-key code package? See the [Skill](/api-reference/skill). * Wondering what changed? See the [release notes](https://github.com/opus-pro/opusclip-mcp/releases). * Need higher limits? [Contact sales](https://www.opus.pro/contact-api). * On a **Business** plan? Your custom limits live in your contract. Talk to your account manager for details. # Brand Template Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/brand-template ## Customizing Brand Templates **1. Manage brand template on dashboard** > [card] [Customizing Brand Templates](https://clip.opus.pro/brand-templates) > > For a high level of customization, you can create and manage your brand template. **2. Get a list of brand templates** Send request to retrieve a list of brand templates. ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request GET \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/brand-templates?q=mine \ --header 'Authorization: <API_KEY>' ``` Get id of the brand template you want to use. ```json theme={"dark"} [ { "templateId": "your-brand-template-id", "name": "Karaoke Template", ...other properties } ] ``` **3. Create project with brand template** > [card] [Creating project with brand template](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#using-brand-templates) > > For a high level of customization, you can create and manage your brand template. ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "brandTemplateId": "your-brand-template-id" }' ``` ## Using Preset Brand Templates We provide popular templates for your convenience. You can directly use the id of the brand template you want to use. > [!TIP] > > Preview below preset brand templates, pick the one you like and use the `id` in your project. > [card] Karaoke > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Karaoke** > [card] Gameplay > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Gameplay** > [card] Beasty > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Beasty** > [card] Deep Diver > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Deep\_Diver** > [card] Youshaei > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Youshaei** > [card] Pod\_P > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Pod\_P** > [card] Mozi > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Mozi** > [card] Popline > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Popline** > [card] Simple > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Simple** > [card] Think Media > > <video /> > > id: **preset-fancy-Think\_Media** # OpusClip Claude Connector Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/claude-connector Automate your OpusClip workspace from Claude.ai: browse projects and clips, pull transcripts, organize collections, edit clips, export HD downloads, and prepare posts for your connected social accounts — all from natural-language prompts. OpusClip is listed in the Claude connector directory at **[claude.ai/directory/opusclip](https://claude.ai/directory/opusclip)** — add it from there in one click. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/oxoXczRzC00xFadt/images/imgs/claude-connector-directory-listing.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=oxoXczRzC00xFadt\&q=85\&s=c8e7d19444c07f5414fe42cc5dfe870c) > [!NOTE] > > **Nothing is published without your confirmation.** On this connector, posting, scheduling, cancelling a scheduled post, and sharing a project do not happen when the agent calls the tool. Each call returns a link you open in OpusClip, where you review the exact request and confirm it yourself. See [Publishing requires your confirmation](#publishing-requires-your-confirmation). > [!NOTE] > > The Claude Connector does not support media generation. It exposes no image, video, or audio generation tools, and the generation options of the workflow tools — clip dubbing, for example — are not available here either. If you need thumbnail, speech, music, or video generation, or dubbing, or you are configuring an IDE or CLI host such as Cursor, Cline, or Claude Code, use the [MCP Server](/api-reference/agent-setup) instead. Any OpusClip account can complete the OAuth flow and view the tool catalog. Calling a tool requires **Pro Beta**, **Max**, or **Business** plan access; without it, the host returns an upgrade prompt. See [Limitations](/api-reference/limitation) for the plan caps. ## Install Open **[OpusClip in the Claude connector directory](https://claude.ai/directory/opusclip)** and click **Add**, then complete the OAuth sign-in. You can also reach it from **Settings → Connectors** in Claude.ai by searching for **OpusClip**. Start a new conversation and try `List my recent OpusClip projects`. Adding an endpoint by hand as a custom connector is not the route here. If your host is not Claude.ai, or you need generation tools, use the [MCP Server](/api-reference/agent-setup) at `https://mcp.opus.pro/mcp` — it carries the full tool catalog. If you belong to more than one OpusClip org, you pick the org **on the OAuth consent screen while connecting**. That choice is fixed for the life of the connection: there is no tool that switches orgs mid-conversation. To work in a different org, disconnect the connector and reconnect, choosing that org on the consent screen. Ask the agent to run `whoami` to see which org it is currently acting in. ## Publishing requires your confirmation Four tools on this connector never commit anything on their own: | Tool | What the agent is requesting | | - | - | | `opusclip_create_post_task` | post a clip to a connected social account now | | `opusclip_schedule_publish` | schedule a clip for a future time | | `opusclip_unschedule_publish` | cancel a scheduled post | | `opusclip_share_project` | make a project publicly viewable | Calling one returns `status: "requires_approval"`, `committed: false`, and an `approval_url`. Opening that link in OpusClip shows you the exact request — the clip, the account, the time, and the caption the agent wrote — and the action runs only after you confirm it there, in your own signed-in session. What this means in practice: * **The agent cannot post on your behalf.** Not by mistake, not in the background, not while you are away from the conversation. * **A batch costs one confirmation.** If the agent prepares several posts, it can combine them into a single link, and confirming once runs all of them. * **The link is yours alone.** It works only for the account that made the request, signed in. Forwarding it to a colleague does nothing. * **Ignoring the link is how you decline.** There is no reject button to hunt for. Links expire on their own — one hour for an immediate post, up to the scheduled time for a scheduled one, twenty-four hours for sharing and cancelling — and an expired link has no effect. * **Credits are spent when you confirm**, not when the agent calls the tool. > [!NOTE] > > This is separate from the approval prompt Claude itself shows before running a write tool. That prompt is your host asking whether the agent may make the call; this confirmation is OpusClip asking whether the action may actually happen. Both apply to the four tools above. The [MCP Server](/api-reference/agent-setup) at `mcp.opus.pro` behaves differently: there the same four tools commit directly, because you configured that endpoint yourself rather than reaching it through a listed connector. ## Tool catalog The connector exposes the 29 workflow tools below. > [accordion] Read tools (15) — no approval prompt > > * `opusclip_whoami` — identity check for the connected org > * `opusclip_get_usage` — show the org's current API usage against its cap > * `opusclip_list_projects` — list recent clip projects > * `opusclip_list_clips` — list clips inside a project > * `opusclip_describe_clip` — fetch a single clip's detail (transcript, layout, render status) > * `opusclip_list_collections` — list collections > * `opusclip_list_clips_in_collection` — list clips inside a collection > * `opusclip_list_brand_templates` — list brand templates > * `opusclip_list_social_accounts` — list connected social accounts > * `opusclip_list_scheduled_posts` — list scheduled and recent posts (returns the `schedule_id` that unscheduling requires) > * `opusclip_get_transcript` — fetch a project's source-video transcript > * `opusclip_get_social_copy_job` — fetch a social copy job > * `opusclip_analyze_video` — report what is on screen across a time range of the **source video**: faces and people with their positions, screen regions, document layout, and whether the person on camera is the one speaking · asynchronous — one call with `projectId`, `clipId`, `startMs` and `endMs` starts it and returns a `task_id`, then call again with `taskId` alone until `status` is `completed` and `segments` appear · offsets are measured from the start of the source video, not the clip · changes nothing and spends no credits > * `opusclip_list_pinterest_boards` — list the boards a connected Pinterest account can pin to. Pinterest requires a board on every pin, so pass the board ID as `boardId` to `create_post_task` or `schedule_publish`. > * `opusclip_preview_clips` — show a project's top clips as a playable card grid in chat (6 by default; set `limit`, or `clipId` for a single clip). Hosts that do not support MCP Apps get the same clip data as JSON. > [accordion] Write tools (14) — approval prompt per call, and four also need your confirmation in OpusClip > > * `opusclip_submit_project` — clip a video from YouTube, Vimeo, Google Drive, Dropbox, Zoom, Loom, and other supported sources · consumes credits > * `opusclip_create_upload_link` — get a signed URL to upload a local video > * `opusclip_edit_clip` — apply named editing operations in one call: caption and emoji toggles, filler-word and pause removal, section trim / split / drop / reorder, phrase cut and caption fix, caption styling, text overlays, emoji placement, and undo · one preview re-render per call · see [Editing a clip](#editing-a-clip) > * `opusclip_create_censor_job` — bleep or mask flagged content · consumes credits > * `opusclip_create_collection` — create a collection > * `opusclip_add_clip_to_collection` — add a clip to a collection > * `opusclip_export_clip` — get one clip's HD download URL (ready / rendering / unavailable) > * `opusclip_export_collection` — get HD download URLs for every clip in a collection > * `opusclip_duplicate_clip` — copy a clip to `<title> (Copy)`; free, no re-render > * `opusclip_create_social_copy_job` — generate platform-specific social copy > * `opusclip_share_project` — **request** making a project publicly viewable · returns an approval link > * `opusclip_create_post_task` — **request** posting a clip to a connected social account · returns an approval link · Pinterest needs a `boardId` > * `opusclip_schedule_publish` — **request** scheduling a clip for a future time · returns an approval link · Pinterest needs a `boardId` > * `opusclip_unschedule_publish` — **request** cancelling a scheduled post · returns an approval link `list_clips` and `describe_clip` return **preview** URLs only — the HD download URL comes from `export_clip` (one clip) or `export_collection` (a collection). ## Editing a clip `opusclip_edit_clip` is the entire editing surface. It takes a list of named operations, applies them in order, and re-renders the preview **once** — so batching related edits into a single call is cheaper and faster than one call per change ("remove the filler words and turn the captions off" is two ops, one render). | Group | Operations | What they do | | - | - | - | | Toggles | `set_captions` · `set_emoji` · `set_keyword_highlight` | Turn captions, emoji, or keyword highlighting on and off | | Cleanup | `remove_filler_words` · `remove_pauses` | Hard-cut *um / uh / like*, or silences at or above `minPauseSec` (default `0.5`s) | | Structure | `trim_section` · `split_section` · `drop_section` · `reorder_sections` | Reshape the clip section by section, addressed by 0-based index | | Transcript | `delete_phrase` · `replace_phrase` | Cut a spoken phrase from **both** the video and the captions, or fix caption wording in place without touching the video or its timing | | Caption style | `set_style` | Caption colour, keyword-highlight colour, position, and upper-casing | | Text overlays | `add_text_overlay` · `set_text_overlay` · `remove_text_overlay` | A title card, lower third, or outro laid over the video — the clip keeps its length | | Emoji | `remove_emoji` · `move_emoji` | Act on one emoji at a time, picked by the moment it is on screen | | Undo | `undo` | Revert the previous `edit_clip` call | Removal ops shorten the clip; video, captions, and audio stay in sync. `dub` is the one operation this connector does not carry — it is voice generation, and it lives on the [MCP Server](/api-reference/agent-setup). **Ask before editing.** Pass `dryRun: true` and the tool reports what the batch *would* do, saving and rendering nothing. With an empty `ops` array it becomes a capability query — *what does this clip actually have?* — which is the cheapest way for an agent to orient before it proposes an edit. **See the result without waiting for the render.** Every result carries an `editor_deep_link`. Opening it shows the edited clip straight away, because the web editor rebuilds its preview from the saved edit rather than waiting on the render. The rendered preview follows asynchronously: the result returns `render_pending: true`, and `describe_clip` reports when it clears. No HD render is started — HD renders on demand at `export_clip`. **Undo has a 72-hour window.** `undo` must be the only operation in the call, and calling it twice redoes. It is refused if the clip changed after that edit — a save from the web editor, for example — so newer work is never discarded. ## Try it **Get clips from a video** > Clip this YouTube video and give me the top 5 best clips > `https://youtube.com/watch?v=...` **Inline edits** > Cut the filler words out of clip 3 and make the captions yellow. > What could you change about clip 2? Don't edit it yet. **Publish** > Schedule my latest clip to post tomorrow at 9am. The agent prepares the schedule and hands back a confirmation link. Open it, check the clip, account, time, and caption, and confirm — the post is scheduled at that moment, not before. ## Troubleshooting > [accordion] OAuth fails or returns 'No matching client' > > Sign in with the same identity provider used to create the OpusClip account (email, Google, or Apple). > [accordion] Tools return 'API access not enabled for this org' > > The org does not have the API entitlement. Pro Beta and Max orgs receive it automatically. Otherwise, [contact sales](https://www.opus.pro/contact-api). > [accordion] Which org does the connector use for a multi-org user? > > The one you picked on the OAuth consent screen when you connected. It is fixed for the life of the connection, and no tool can switch it. To act in a different org, disconnect the connector and reconnect, choosing that org while signing in. `whoami` reports the current one. > [accordion] The agent says it posted something, but nothing appeared > > Check whether it handed you an approval link. Nothing is posted, scheduled, or shared until you open that link and confirm. If the link has expired, ask the agent to make the request again — it will return a fresh one. > [accordion] The approval link says the request cannot be found > > Approval links work only for the account that made the request, and only while signed in to that account. If you are signed in as someone else, or the link belongs to a colleague's conversation, it reads as not found. Links also expire — see [Publishing requires your confirmation](#publishing-requires-your-confirmation). > [accordion] 401 errors keep firing > > Hosts refresh tokens automatically. If refresh fails persistently, remove the connector and re-add it. > [accordion] 403 or 429 responses > > `403` indicates the monthly cap (`15h` / `900` credits per workspace) has been hit. The cap resets on the first day of the next month (UTC). `429` indicates the concurrent-project limit (`4`) has been hit and clears as in-flight projects finish. See [Limitations](/api-reference/limitation). Tools consume credits and inherit the Pro Beta & Max caps (`15h` monthly, `10`-credit per-project floor, `4` concurrent projects). For the four tools that need your confirmation, credits are spent when you confirm, not when the agent calls the tool. See [Limitations](/api-reference/limitation). ## What's next * Using Cursor, Cline, Claude Code, or another MCP host? See the [MCP Server](/api-reference/agent-setup). * Prefer an API-key code package? See the [Skill](/api-reference/skill). * Need higher limits? [Contact sales](https://www.opus.pro/contact-api). # Create a Censor Job Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/censor-job/censor-job POST /api/censor-jobs You can create a censor job to process a specific clip by making a `POST` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/censor-jobs`. # Get Censor Job Status Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/censor-job/censor-job-status GET /api/censor-jobs/{jobId} You can get the censor job status by making a `GET` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/censor-jobs/{jobId}`. # Add a Clip to a Collection Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/collection-contents/create-collection-content POST /api/collection-contents You can add a clip to an existing collection by making a `POST` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/collection-contents`. # Remove a Clip from a Collection Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/collection-contents/delete-collection-content-by-condition POST /api/collection-contents/delete-collection-contents You can add a clip to an existing collection by making a `POST` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/collection-contents/delete-collection-contents`. # Create a Collection Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/collections/create-collection POST /api/collections You can create collections to organize your clips by making a `POST` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/collections` ## Related Schemas > [card] [Collection Schema](/api-reference/schemas/collection) > > Reference the underlying collection object returned by collection APIs. > [card] [Create Collection Response](/api-reference/schemas/collection-response) > > View the full response schema for creating a collection. # Delete a Collection Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/collections/delete-collection DELETE /api/collections/{collectionId} You can delete an existing collection by making a `DELETE` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/collections/{collectionId}`. Clips in the collection won't be deleted. # Export Clips from a Collection Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/collections/export-collection POST /api/collections/{collectionId}/export You can export all the clips from an existing collection by making a `POST` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/collections/{collectionId}/export` 💡Notice: Don't forget to add `{}` to your post body # Get Collections Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/collections/get-collections GET /api/collections You can get all the collections you have created by making a `GET` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/collections`. ## Related Schemas > [card] [Collection Schema](/api-reference/schemas/collection) > > Reference the collection object included in the list response. > [card] [Get Collections Response](/api-reference/schemas/get-collections-response) > > View the full response schema for listing collections. # Create a New Project Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/create-project Submit a long-form video to create a new clipping project. ### Introduction OpusClip identifies the most compelling hooks, extracts highlights from different parts of your video, and arranges them into viral shorts. The body of the `POST /clip-projects` endpoint has 9 main components: * [Video URL](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#video-url) * [Brand Template Selection](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#brand-templates) * [Curation Preferences](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#curation-preferences) * [Render Preferences](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#render-preferences) * [Import Preferences](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#import-preferences) * [Conclusion Actions](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#conclusion-actions) * [Curation Model](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#curation-model) * [Uploaded Video Attributes](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#uploaded-video-attributes) * [Response Schema](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#response-schema) *** ### Video URL This parameter defines the URL of the long-form video. OpusClip can import public videos from the following platforms: * `Apple Podcast`, `YouTube`, `Google Drive`, `Vimeo`, `Zoom`, `Zoom Clips`, `Rumble`, `Twitch`, `Facebook`, `LinkedIn`, `X`, `Dropbox`, `Riverside`, `Loom`, `Frame.io`, `StreamYard`, [Medal.tv](https://medal.tv/) * Any public video S3 link of an MP4 file ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes" }' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY` with your actual API key. *** #### Brand Templates We offer an option to customize the appearance of your clips by `brand template`. * If a brand template is specified, relevant render preferences will be applied. * It is recommended to define your brand templates within the OpusClip [dashboard](https://clip.opus.pro/dashboard) and set your default template. * If a brand template not defined, the default template on your account will be used automatically. > [card] [Customizing Brand Templates](/api-reference/brand-template#customizing-brand-templates) > > For a high level of customization, you can create and manage your brand > templates. > [card] [Using Preset Brand Templates](/api-reference/brand-template#using-preset-brand-templates) > > Not familiar with it? No worries, we provide popular templates for your > convenience. For example, to use the `Karaoke` brand template: ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "brandTemplateId": "preset-fancy-Karaoke" }' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY` with your actual API key. ### Curation Preferences Curation preferences define how your long-form video should be curated. Here you can define: * The duration of the resulting clips * The genre of the video * Topic keywords that you want to prioritize clipping for * The curation model you prefer to use * Whether to add an AI-generated headline to your clips * Whether to skip the clipping process entirely > [card] [Curation Preferences Schema](/api-reference/schemas/curation-preferences) > > Please refer to the curation preferences schema for more details. > [!TIP] > > ✨ **New Feature: ClipAnything** ✨ > > Curious to try **ClipAnything**? Click [here](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#curation-model) to learn more! > > You can also explore different examples by switching tabs between `ClipBasic` and `ClipAnything`. > [!NOTE] > > **Skip Clipping**: You can bypass the clipping process entirely by setting `skipCurate: true` in your curation preferences. This is useful when you want to upload and process the original video without clipping it. We also support and will continue to maintain `skipSlicing: true` for the same purpose. > > ```json theme={"dark"} > curationPref: { > skipCurate: true > } > ``` > [!NOTE] > > **`range` (optional)** restricts curation to a time window of the source > video. When provided, both `startSec` and `endSec` are required, measured in > **seconds**, with `startSec < endSec`. To clip the **whole video, omit > `range` entirely** rather than sending an empty (`"range": {}`) or partial > object. > [!NOTE] > > **Auto headline**: `enableAutoHook` controls the AI-generated headline shown > over the first seconds of a clip. It is **disabled by default** for projects > created through the API — omit it, or send `false`, and no headline is added. > Set it to `true` to opt in. It only applies to a clipping run, so it has no > effect together with `skipCurate` or `skipSlicing`. > > ```json theme={"dark"} > curationPref: { > enableAutoHook: true > } > ``` > [!NOTE] > > **`forceStrategy` (optional, advanced)** pins curation to an explicit > strategy instead of letting OpusClip auto-select one for your video. > [Talk to our support team](https://www.opus.pro/contact-support) to learn how > to use it. Example: ```bash ClipBasic theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "curationPref": { "model":"ClipBasic", "clipDurations": [ [ 0, 180 ] ], "genre": "Auto", "topicKeywords": [ "OpusClip" ], "range": { "startSec": 105, "endSec": 300 } } }' ``` ```bash ClipAnything theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "curationPref": { "model":"ClipAnything", "clipDurations": [ [ 0, 90 ] ], "genre": "Auto", "customPrompt": "OpusClip", "range": { "startSec": 105, "endSec": 300 } } }' ``` ```bash Skip Clipping theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "curationPref": { "skipCurate": true } }' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY` with your actual API key. *** ### Render Preferences Render preferences allow you to customize how your clips are rendered, including layout options, caption settings, and audio processing features. #### Layout Aspect Ratio You can initiate a clip project and define the desired layout aspect ratio (such as portrait, landscape, square) by including it in the renderPref field of your request to the Opus API. Example: ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "renderPref": { "layoutAspectRatio": "square" } }' ``` #### Remove Filler Words You can automatically remove filler words (such as "um", "uh", "like", etc.) from your video clips to create cleaner, more professional content. This feature is available via the Quickstart API configuration. Example: ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "renderPref": { "quickstartConfig": { "enableRemoveFillerWords": true } } }' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY` with your actual API key. *** ### Import Preferences Import preferences let you define the language of the original video. OpusClip supports videos in `20+ languages`. By default, the video language is automatically detected. It is recommended that if your video is not in English, you should specify the language. > [card] [Video Languages Supported](/docs/article/video-languages-supported) > > Please refer to the list of supported languages. Example ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "importPreference": { "sourceLang": "de" } }' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY` with your actual API key. > > Ensure you fill in `sourceLang` with language code. *** ### Conclusion Actions Conclusion actions allow you to call a webhook or email a specific person when your results are ready. > [!TIP] > > You can explore different examples of using webhooks or email notifications by > switching tabs below. > [!NOTE] > > Every `WEBHOOK` delivery is signed with the `X-Opus-Signature`, `X-Opus-Salt`, and > `X-Opus-Timestamp` headers so your server can confirm it genuinely came from Opus. Verify the > signature before trusting the payload — see [**Securing your webhook**](/api-reference/webhook#securing-your-webhook). ```bash Webhook theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "conclusionActions": [ { "type": "WEBHOOK", "notifyFailure": true, "url": "https://webhook.site/#!/view/d3ba169d-f9eb-4c78-a229-771eab9d6e67" } ] }' ``` ```bash Email theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "conclusionActions": [ { "type": "EMAIL", "notifyFailure": false, "email": "opusclip@opus.pro" } ] }' ``` ```bash Both theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "conclusionActions": [ { "type": "WEBHOOK", "notifyFailure": true, "url": "https://webhook.site/#!/view/d3ba169d-f9eb-4c78-a229-771eab9d6e67" }, { "type": "EMAIL", "notifyFailure": false, "email": "opusclip@opus.pro" } ] }' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY` with your actual API key. *** ### Curation Model Curate video clips using either `ClipBasic` or `ClipAnything`, depending on your needs. * `ClipBasic` is optimized for **talking-head videos**, providing precise scene selection. * `ClipAnything` is our most **advanced and versatile** model, capable of extracting key moments from **any video type**, including vlogs, sports, TV shows, behind-the-scenes footage, news, music videos, and more. When to Use `ClipAnything`? > `ClipAnything` is ideal when you need advanced scene selection beyond talking-head videos. It utilizes **multimodal reasoning, natural language prompts, and deep scene analysis** to curate the most relevant moments based on **objects, actions, emotions, and genre**. For more information about `ClipAnything`, refer to the link below. > [card] [What is ClipAnything](/docs/article/9947095-clip-anything) > > Explore the ClipAnything wiki for more details. Model Selection & Parameters > By default, `ClipBasic` is used. To switch to `ClipAnything`, update your **Curation Preferences**. > > * The `topicKeywords` parameter is **only applicable to `ClipBasic`**. > * The `customPrompt` parameter is **exclusively available with `ClipAnything`**. For details on configuring curation settings, refer to the link below. > [card] [Curation Preferences Schema](/api-reference/schemas/curation-preferences) > > View the curation preferences schema for more details. Example: > You can explore different examples of using `ClipBasic` and `ClipAnything` by switching tabs below. ```bash ClipBasic theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "curationPref": { "model":"ClipBasic", "clipDurations": [ [ 0, 180 ] ], "genre": "Auto", "topicKeywords": [ "OpusClip" ] } }' ``` ```bash ClipAnything theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "AI Agents: The Future of Work?" }, "curationPref": { "model":"ClipAnything", "clipDurations": [ [ 0, 90 ] ], "genre": "Auto", "customPrompt": "Compile all the hilarious moments", } }' ``` ### Playground > [card] [Generate Code Snippet](/api-reference/playground/create-project) > > You can use this code generator to generate code snippets easily. *** ### Uploaded Video Attributes You can set custom attributes for your uploaded video, including a custom title for your project. * `title`: Set a custom title for your clipping project Example: ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "uploadedVideoAttr": { "title": "YOUR_TITLE" } }' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY` with your actual API key and `YOUR_TITLE` with > your desired project title. *** ### Response Schema > [card] [API Response Schema](/api-reference/schemas/project-representation) > > For more details of response, please refer to the API response schema. # Create a Thumbnail Job Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/generative-jobs/create-thumbnail-job POST /api/generative-jobs Create an asynchronous thumbnail generation job by making a `POST` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/generative-jobs`. Returns a `jobId` to poll. Charges 7 credits when the job completes successfully; refunds on failure. > [!NOTE] > > **Experimental.** Subject to change; daily caps apply and the endpoint may be temporarily disabled via a runtime kill switch. Currently published jobType: `thumbnail`. # Get a Generative Job Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/generative-jobs/get-generative-job GET /api/generative-jobs/{jobId} Poll an asynchronous generative job by making a `GET` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/generative-jobs/{jobId}`. Returns status, progress, and result for jobs created via `POST /api/generative-jobs`. > [!NOTE] > > **Experimental.** Polling cadence: client-driven; respect rate limits. # Get Brand Templates Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/get-brand-templates Retrieve a list of brand templates available for your organization. ### Introduction The `GET /api/brand-templates` endpoint returns a list of brand templates that are available for use in your projects. Each template is associated with a unique ID that you can use to reference it in your project. ### Request Parameters * `q` (required): Query type, must be `mine`. ### Example ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request GET \ --url 'https://api.opus.pro/api/brand-templates?q=mine' \ --header 'Authorization: <API_KEY>' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY` with your actual API key. ### Playground > [card] [Generate Code Snippet](/api-reference/playground/get-brand-templates) > > You can use this code generator to generate code snippets easily. ### Response Schema > [card] [API Response Schema](/api-reference/schemas/brand-template-representation) > > For more details of response, please refer to the API response schema. # Get Clips Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/get-clips GET /api/exportable-clips Retrieve a list of clips for a specific project. ### Introduction The `GET /api/exportable-clips` endpoint returns a list of clips that are available for use in your projects. Each clip is associated with a unique ID that you can use to reference it in your project. ### Request Parameters * `q` (required): Query type, must be one of `findByProjectId` `findByCollectionId`. * `projectId` (required when q=`findByProjectId`): The unique identifier of the project. * `collectionId` (required when q=`findByCollectionId`): The unique identifier of the collection. ### Example ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request GET \ --url 'https://api.opus.pro/api/exportable-clips?q=findByProjectId&projectId=<PROJECT_ID>' \ --header 'Authorization: <API_KEY>' \ --header 'x-opus-org-id: <ORG_ID>' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY`, `PROJECT_ID`, and `ORG_ID` with your actual values. ### Playground > [card] [Generate Code Snippet](/api-reference/playground/get-clips) > > Use this code generator to easily create code snippets. ### Response Schema > [card] [API Response Schema](/api-reference/schemas/clip-representation) > > For more details of response, please refer to the API response schema. # Share a Project Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/share-project Share the project with other users by updating the project's visibility settings. ### Introduction The `POST /api/clip-projects/{projectId}/update-visibility` endpoint allows you to share a project with other users by updating the project's visibility settings. You can set the visibility of the project to `PUBLIC` to allow any users to view, edit and export the project. ### Request Parameters * `projectId` (required): The unique identifier of the project. ### Request Body * `visibility` (required): The visibility setting for the project. Must be one of `DEFAULT` or `PUBLIC`. ### Example ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects/<PROJECT_ID>/update-visibility \ --header 'Authorization: <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "visibility": "PUBLIC" }' ``` > [!TIP] > > Ensure you replace `API_KEY` and `PROJECT_ID` with your actual values. ### Playground > [card] [Generate Code Snippet](/api-reference/playground/share-project) > > Use this code generator to easily create code snippets. ### Response Schema > [card] [API Response Schema](/api-reference/schemas/project-representation) > > For more details of response, please refer to the API response schema. # Cancel a Scheduled Post Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/cancel-scheduled-post DELETE /api/publish-schedules/{scheduleId} You can cancel a scheduled social post by making a `DELETE` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/publish-schedules/{scheduleId}`. # Create a Social Copy Generation Job Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/create-social-copy-job POST /api/social-copy-jobs You can start a social copy generation job by making a `POST` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/social-copy-jobs`. # Get Social Accounts Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/get-social-accounts GET /api/social-accounts You can retrieve the social accounts connected to your Opus organization by making a `GET` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/social-accounts`. # Get Social Copy Generation Result Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/get-social-copy-job GET /api/social-copy-jobs/{jobId} You can retrieve the result of a social copy generation job by making a `GET` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/social-copy-jobs/{jobId}`. # Social Posting Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/overview Connect social accounts, generate social copy, publish clips instantly, or schedule them for later. ### Introduction The social posting APIs let you take an Opus clip that already exists and distribute it to connected channels without leaving your workflow. ### Workflow Use the following workflow when you want to turn completed clips into social posts. **1. Step 1: Get Social Accounts** Call [Get Social Accounts](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/get-social-accounts) first so you know which connected destinations are available and which `postAccountId` and `subAccountId` values to use later. ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request GET \ --url 'https://api.opus.pro/api/social-accounts?q=mine' \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' ``` **2. Step 2: Create a Project** Submit your source video with [Create a New Project](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project). This starts the normal Opus clipping workflow and returns a `projectId`. **3. Step 3: Wait for Project Completion** Wait for the project-completed callback from OpusClip, or otherwise confirm the project has finished processing before you try to fetch exportable clips. **4. Step 4: Fetch Clips** After the project is complete, call [Get Clips](/api-reference/endpoints/get-clips) to retrieve the clips created for that `projectId`. ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request GET \ --url 'https://api.opus.pro/api/exportable-clips?q=findByProjectId&projectId=<PROJECT_ID>' \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'x-opus-org-id: <ORG_ID>' ``` > [!WARNING] > > The `id` field in the response is a composite `{projectId}.{clipId}` (e.g. `P0000000demo.CUexample1`). The social-posting endpoints in the following steps expect the **bare** `clipId` (e.g. `CUexample1`) — strip everything up to and including the dot before passing it to `POST /api/social-copy-jobs`, `POST /api/post-tasks`, or `POST /api/publish-schedules`. Use the `curationId` field if you prefer not to parse the `id`. **5. Step 5: Generate Social Copy** For each clip and each selected social destination, call [Create a Social Copy Generation Job](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/create-social-copy-job), then poll [Get Social Copy Generation Result](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/get-social-copy-job) until the job status is `COMPLETED`. **6. Step 6: Publish or Schedule** If the post should go out immediately, call [Publish a Post Instantly](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/publish-post). If it should go out later, call [Schedule a Post](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/schedule-post) with a future UTC timestamp. **7. Step 7: Cancel a Scheduled Post** If a scheduled post needs to be withdrawn before publish time, call [Cancel a Scheduled Post](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/cancel-scheduled-post) with the `scheduleId` returned by the scheduling call. ### Supported Platforms Connected accounts may report one of these platform values: * `YOUTUBE`: YouTube channel * `TIKTOK_BUSINESS`: TikTok account * `FACEBOOK_PAGE`: Facebook account * `INSTAGRAM_BUSINESS`: Instagram account * `LINKEDIN`: LinkedIn account * `TWITTER`: X (formerly Twitter) account ### Rate Limits * `GET /api/social-accounts`: `10 req/s` * `POST /api/social-copy-jobs`: `1 req/s` * `GET /api/social-copy-jobs/{jobId}`: `10 req/s` * `POST /api/post-tasks`: `1 req/s` * `POST /api/publish-schedules`: `1 req/s` * `DELETE /api/publish-schedules/{scheduleId}`: `1 req/s` ### Credit Consumption for X When posting clips to `X`, each post consumes `3` credits. Posting one clip to several X accounts is charged once per account. This applies to: * instant publishing with `POST /api/post-tasks` * scheduled publishing with `POST /api/publish-schedules` ### Endpoints > [card] [Get Social Accounts](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/get-social-accounts) > > List the connected social destinations available for posting. > [card] [Create Social Copy Job](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/create-social-copy-job) > > Generate post copy for a clip with optional tone guidance. > [card] [Get Social Copy Result](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/get-social-copy-job) > > Poll a social copy job until the generated content is ready. > [card] [Publish Instantly](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/publish-post) > > Publish a clip immediately to a connected social account. > [card] [Schedule a Post](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/schedule-post) > > Queue a clip for future publishing with a UTC timestamp. > [card] [Cancel a Scheduled Post](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/cancel-scheduled-post) > > Cancel an existing scheduled publish task. # Publish a Post Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/publish-post POST /api/post-tasks You can publish a clip immediately by making a `POST` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/post-tasks`. # Schedule a Post Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/schedule-post POST /api/publish-schedules You can schedule a clip for future publishing by making a `POST` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/publish-schedules`. # Get a Source-Video Transcript Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/transcripts/get-transcript GET /api/transcripts Fetch the trimmed source-video transcript for a project by making a `GET` request to `https://api.opus.pro/api/transcripts?q=findByProjectId&projectId=...`. Returns paragraphs with start/end times in seconds, text, optional speaker, and per-word timings. ASR internals (seek, tokens, log-probabilities, etc.) are stripped. > [!NOTE] > > For API callers on a range-limited project, paragraphs are filtered to the **billed curation range** (the portion the user paid to clip). Internal callers and full-source submissions get the full transcript. ## Related Schemas > [card] [TranscriptExportParagraph](/api-reference/schemas/transcript-export-paragraph) > > Reference the paragraph object returned in the transcript. > [card] [TranscriptExportWord](/api-reference/schemas/transcript-export-word) > > Reference the per-word timing object inside each paragraph. # Upload Video and Create Clip Project Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/endpoints/upload-video-create-project Upload a video file to Google Cloud Storage and create a clip project using the Opus API. ## Overview This guide outlines the step-by-step process to upload a video file to Google Cloud Storage (GCS) using the Opus API and subsequently create a clip project. This includes generating an upload link, initiating a resumable upload session, uploading a video, and creating a clip project using that uploaded file. *** ## Authentication All API requests require an API key: ``` Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY> ``` > [!TIP] > > Replace `<API_KEY>` with your valid API token. *** ## Step 1: Generate Upload Link ### Endpoint ``` POST https://api.opus.pro/api/upload-links ``` ### Headers ``` Accept: application/json Content-Type: application/json Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY> ``` ### Request Body ```json theme={"dark"} { "video": { "usecase": "LocalUpload" } } ``` ### Response Example ```json theme={"dark"} { "url": "https://storage.googleapis.com/ext.gcs.opus.pro/upload/org_000000000/google-upload", "uploadId": "abc123xyz456", "dnsUrl": "https://api.opus.pro", "useAmount": 0, "totalAmount": 107974182498 } ``` ### cURL Example ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/upload-links \ --header 'Accept: application/json' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --data '{ "video": { "usecase": "LocalUpload" } }' ``` *** ## Step 2: Initiate Resumable Upload Session ### Endpoint ``` POST <url_from_previous_step> ``` ### Headers ``` x-goog-resumable: start Content-Length: 0 ``` ### Request Body (empty) > [!NOTE] > > * Replace `<url_from_previous_step>` with the `url` received from Step 1 > * No response body is returned > * Look for the `location` header in the response which contains the resumable upload URL ### Example Response Headers ``` HTTP/2 201 x-goog-resumable-upload-id: AAkIAwy-YC6V... location: https://storage.googleapis.com/ext.gcs.opus.pro/upload/org_000000000/google-upload ``` ### cURL Example ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url "<url_from_previous_step>" \ --header 'x-goog-resumable: start' \ --header 'Content-Length: 0' \ --verbose ``` *** ## Step 3: Upload Video File ### Endpoint ``` PUT <resumable_upload_location> ``` ### Headers ``` Content-Type: application/octet-stream ``` ### Upload File Use the `--upload-file` option with your actual video file (e.g., `test.mp4`). ### cURL Example ```bash theme={"dark"} curl -X PUT -v \ -H "Content-Type: application/octet-stream" \ --upload-file test.mp4 \ "<location>" ``` > [!TIP] > > Replace `<location>` with the `location` URL from Step 2 response headers. *** ## Step 4: Create Clip Project ### Endpoint ``` POST https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects ``` ### Headers ``` Accept: application/json Content-Type: application/json Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY> ``` ### Response Headers ``` ...other headers x-opus-upload-id: <source_id_from_upload_source> ``` ### Request Body ```json theme={"dark"} { "videoUrl": "<uploadId>", "conclusionActions": [ { "type": "EMAIL", "notifyFailure": true, "email": "opusclip@opus.pro" } ], "curationPref": { "range": { "startSec": 28, "endSec": 636 }, "clipDurations": [ [ 0, 90 ] ], "topicKeywords": [ "OpusClip" ], "genre": "Auto", "skipCurate": false }, "importPref": { "sourceLang": "auto" }, "brandTemplateId": "preset-fancy-Karaoke" } ``` ### cURL Example ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Accept: application/json' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "<uploadId>", "conclusionActions": [ { "type": "EMAIL", "notifyFailure": true, "email": "opusclip@opus.pro" } ], "curationPref": { "range": { "startSec": 28, "endSec": 636 }, "clipDurations": [ [ 0, 90 ] ], "topicKeywords": [ "OpusClip" ], "genre": "Auto", "skipCurate": false }, "importPref": { "sourceLang": "auto" }, "brandTemplateId": "preset-fancy-Karaoke" }' ``` > [!NOTE] > > **`forceStrategy` (optional, advanced)** pins curation to an explicit > strategy instead of letting OpusClip auto-select one. > [Talk to our support team](https://www.opus.pro/contact-support) to learn how > to use it. > [!NOTE] > > * Replace `<uploadId>` with the ID returned in Step 1 > [!TIP] > > For detailed explanations of the project-creation request body, refer to [Create a New Project](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project), which documents the `POST /api/clip-projects` API. *** ## Full Workflow Summary **1. Generate Upload Link** Get `url` and `uploadId` from the upload-links endpoint **2. Start Resumable Session** Get `location` from response headers using the `url` from Step 1 **3. Upload Video File** Upload your video file to the `location` from Step 2 **4. Create Clip Project** Create a new clip project using the `uploadId` from Step 1 *** ## Related Endpoints > [card] [POST /api/clip-projects](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project) > > Refer to the full API reference for creating a clip project. > [card] [Get Clips](/api-reference/endpoints/get-clips) > > Retrieve clips from your created projects # Limitations Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/limitation ## Credits Ensure your account has sufficient credits to process the video before submitting a new project. When posting clips to `X` (formerly Twitter) through the social posting APIs, each post consumes `3` credits. Learn more about credits [here](/docs/article/how-are-credits-consumed). ## Rate Limit The standard OpusClip API rate limit is `30` requests per minute per API key for the core project and clip APIs. Exceeding this limit will result in a `429` status code response. ### Monthly API Cap The **Pro Beta** and **Max** plans include **15 hours** / **900 credits** of API usage per calendar month, per workspace. **Business** plans follow your contract. When you have used **900 credits**, the API returns **`403`** (not `429`) so agent frameworks do not retry in a loop. Your API access resumes on the **first day of the next month (UTC)**, or you can [contact sales](https://www.opus.pro/contact-api) to upgrade. The OpusClip **web app** stays fully usable while the API is capped. **Cap-hit response** ```json theme={"dark"} { "code": "API_MONTHLY_CAP_REACHED", "reset_at": "2026-06-01T00:00:00Z", "upgrade_url": "https://www.opus.pro/contact-api" } ``` ### Social Posting Rate Limits Social posting APIs use their own per-endpoint rate limits. Refer to [Social Posting Rate Limits](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/overview#rate-limits) for the current limits for: * `GET /api/social-accounts` * `POST /api/social-copy-jobs` * `GET /api/social-copy-jobs/{jobId}` * `POST /api/post-tasks` * `POST /api/publish-schedules` * `DELETE /api/publish-schedules/{scheduleId}` ### Workspace posting limit The API allows a maximum of **500** posts per rolling 24-hour period per workspace. Once you reach the limit, further posting requests fail until older posts age out of the window. **When it resets:** Continuously. As posts pass the 24-hour mark, they no longer count toward the limit, and your quota frees up gradually. There is no fixed daily reset time. ## Video Duration & Size Limit The maximum video duration is `10` hours, with a maximum file size of `30` GB. ## Storage Limit By default, all projects expire in `30` days. If auto-save is enabled for your account, projects will be automatically saved to your storage. Learn more about storage [here](/docs/article/cloud-storage). ## Concurrency Limit * **Pro Beta & Max:** up to **4** projects running simultaneously. * **Business:** up to **50** projects running simultaneously. * Exceeding your limit returns **`429`** with response header `X-Cap-Reason: concurrent`. * The limit lifts as soon as any in-flight project finishes (usually within a minute or two for short clips). * Retry-after-backoff is the correct pattern. ## API project minimum API projects have a **10-credit minimum** (about **10 minutes** of clip time). Submissions through the OpusClip **web app** are not subject to this API-only minimum. ## Supported Languages We support over 20 languages, please take a look at the list of supported languages [here](/docs/article/video-languages-supported). # Overview Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/overview The `OpusClip API` empowers you to **transform long-form videos into viral, short-form clips** tailored to your preferences—at scale. With just a few steps, you can seamlessly integrate video transformation capabilities into your applications. To begin using the OpusClip API, you will need an API key, which serves as your authentication credential. The `OpusClip API` provides the following endpoints to streamline the video processing workflow. Each submitted video is managed as a project, allowing you to track and organize your content efficiently. ## Quickstart > [card] [Make your first API request](/api-reference/quickstart) > > A complete guide to creating and querying projects and clips. > [card] [Create a Project](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project) > > Detailed API documentation to create a new project. > [card] [Query Clips](/api-reference/endpoints/get-clips) > > Fetch clip details with this API specification. > [card] [Brand Templates](/api-reference/brand-template) > > Customize the appearance of your clips with brand templates. > [card] [Share a Project](/api-reference/endpoints/share-project) > > Share your projects with others using this API endpoint. > [card] [Social Posting](/api-reference/endpoints/social-posting/overview) > > Generate social copy and publish or schedule clips to connected accounts. > [card] [Webhook](/api-reference/webhook) > > Receive real-time notifications from the API with webhooks. > [card] [Edit Clips](/api-reference/agent-setup) > > Trim and extend a clip and fix typos in captions. ## Accessing the API & Requirements After getting access to the OpusClip API, you can find your organization’s API access key in the lower left corner of the [dashboard](https://clip.opus.pro/dashboard). API access is available on **Pro (Beta)**, **Max**, and **Business** plans. See [Limitations](/api-reference/limitation) for plan-specific limits. <video /> ## Requirements 1. Generate an API key from your [dashboard](https://clip.opus.pro/dashboard). 2. Ensure you have sufficient credits. Remaining credits can be viewed in the credits tab in the top right corner of the dashboard. 3. Check your storage capacity. While we’re enhancing storage usage visibility, your account manager will keep you updated. Stay tuned! ## Limitations > [card] [Credits](/api-reference/limitation#credits) > > Ensure your account has sufficient credits to process the video before submitting a new project. > [card] [Rate Limit](/api-reference/limitation#rate-limit) > > The standard OpusClip API rate limit is `30` requests per minute per API key. > [card] [Social Posting Rate Limits](/api-reference/limitation#social-posting-rate-limits) > > Social posting endpoints use separate per-endpoint rate limits. > [card] [Video Duration & Size Limit](/api-reference/limitation#video-duration-size-limit) > > The maximum video duration is `10` hours, with a maximum file size of `30` GB. > [card] [Storage Limit](/api-reference/limitation#storage-limit) > > By default, all projects expire in `30` days. If auto-save is enabled for your account, projects will be > automatically saved to your storage. > [card] [Concurrency Limit](/api-reference/limitation#concurrency-limit) > > **Pro Beta & Max:** up to `4` projects in parallel. > **Business:** up to `50` projects in parallel. > [card] [Supported Languages](/api-reference/limitation#supported-languages) > > We support over 20 languages. Please take a look at the list of supported languages. > [card] [Monthly Cap (Pro Beta & Max)](/api-reference/limitation#monthly-api-cap) > > Pro Beta and Max plans include 15 hours of API video per month. Business is per contract. ## Essential Information > [card] [Understand API Pricing](/docs/article/how-are-credits-consumed) > > Learn how credits are calculated based on the length of your video submissions. 1 Credit = 1 minute of video > processing. > [card] [How Storage Works](/docs/article/cloud-storage) > > Discover flexible storage options tailored to different plans. Free trial and Pro plan users enjoy seamless > cloud storage. > [card] [Help Center](/docs/article/introduction-to-opusclip) > > Before creating your first clips, log in to your account, set up your brand template, and connect your social > accounts. > [card] [Per-project minimum (NEW)](/api-reference/limitation#api-project-minimum) > > API projects have a 10-credit minimum (about 10 minutes of clip time). Web submissions are unaffected. ## Contact Us For any inquiries regarding the API, please contact us through your dedicated VIP support group on Slack. # Create a Censor Job Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/playground/censor-job POST /api/censor-jobs Create a censor job to censor words in a clip. 👆Use above tools to generate API request code snippets. # Get Censor Job Status Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/playground/censor-job-status GET /api/censor-jobs/{jobId} Get the status of a censor job by its jobId. 👆Use above tools to generate API request code snippets. # Create a New Project Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/playground/create-project POST /api/clip-projects Submit a long-form video to create a new clipping project. 👆Use above tools to generate API request code snippets. # Get Brand Templates Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/playground/get-brand-templates GET /api/brand-templates Retrieve a list of brand templates. 👆Use above tools to generate API request code snippets. # Get Clips Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/playground/get-clips GET /api/exportable-clips Retrieve a list of clips for a specific project. 👆Use above tools to generate API request code snippets. # Share a Project Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/playground/share-project POST /api/clip-projects/{projectId}/update-visibility Share the project with other users by updating the project's visibility settings. 👆Use above tools to generate API request code snippets. # Quickstart Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/quickstart The OpusClip API allows users to transform long-form videos into short, viral clips using advanced AI. Below is a quick guide to get started with the OpusClip API. ## Steps to Get Started **1. Step 1: Get API Key** Get your [API Key](/api-reference/overview#accessing-the-api) from the [dashboard](https://clip.opus.pro/dashboard) and include it in your request. <video /> **2. Step 2: Customize Brand Template** Follow below steps to customize the appearance of your clips by `brand template`: > [card] [Customizing Brand Templates](/api-reference/brand-template#customizing-brand-templates) > > For a high level of customization, you can create and manage your brand templates. > [card] [Using Preset Brand Templates](/api-reference/brand-template#using-preset-brand-templates) > > Not familiar with it? No worries, we provide popular templates for your convenience. **3. Step 3: Create a New Project** Use the [Create a New Project](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project) endpoint. Provide the `videoUrl` and `API_KEY`, then run the following command to create a new project with minimal preferences: ```bash basic usage theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes" }' ``` ```bash advanced usage theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "videoUrl": "https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEXaoozFRes", "brandTemplateId": "preset-fancy-Karaoke", "curationPref": { "range": { "startSec": 28, "endSec": 636 }, "clipDurations": [ [0, 180] ], "topicKeywords": [ "OpusClip" ], "skipCurate": false, "genre": "Auto" }, "importPref": { "sourceLang": "en" }, "conclusionActions": [ { "type": "WEBHOOK", "notifyFailure": true, "url": "https://webhook.site/#!/view/d3ba169d-f9eb-4c78-a229-771eab9d6e67" }, { "type": "EMAIL", "notifyFailure": false, "email": "opusclip@opus.pro" } ] }' ``` > [!TIP] > > You can customize the project creation request by providing additional preferences: > > * [Brand Templates](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#brand-templates) > * [Curation Preferences](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#curation-preferences) > * [Import Preferences](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#import-preferences) > * [Conclusion Actions](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#conclusion-actions) > * [Curation Model](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#curation-model) > > Switch to the `advanced usage` tab above to see an example with all preferences. **4. Step 4: Get Clips** Use the [Get Clips](/api-reference/endpoints/get-clips) endpoint. Provide the `Project ID` returned from the project creation response. ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request GET \ --url 'https://api.opus.pro/api/exportable-clips?q=findByProjectId&projectId={projectId}' \ --header 'Authorization: Bearer <API_KEY>' \ --header 'x-opus-org-id: <ORG_ID>' ``` **5. Step 5: Share the Project** Use the [Share a Project](/api-reference/endpoints/share-project) endpoint to share the project you just created with others. ```bash theme={"dark"} curl --request POST \ --url https://api.opus.pro/api/clip-projects/<PROJECT_ID>/update-visibility \ --header 'Authorization: <API_KEY>' \ --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \ --data '{ "visibility": "PUBLIC" }' ``` ## Using the Playground You can use the 👉 [Playground](/api-reference/playground) to generate code snippets easily for the endpoints mentioned above. <video /> # Brand template representation Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/brand-template-representation # Censor job request Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/censor-job-request # Censor job response Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/censor-job-response # Censor job status response Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/censor-job-status-response # Clip representation Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/clip-representation # [SCHEMA] Collection Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/collection # Collection content response Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/collection-content-response # Collection response Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/collection-response # Curation preferences Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/curation-preferences # Export collection response Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/export-collection-response # Generative job create response Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/generative-job-create-response # Generative job status response Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/generative-job-status-response # Generative thumbnail job request Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/generative-thumbnail-job-request # Get collections response Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/get-collections-response # Import preferences Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/import-preferences Please refer to the two character language code [ISO 639](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639_language_codes) for the list of supported languages. # Project representation Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/project-representation # Render preferences Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/render-preferences # Simple success Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/simple-success # Transcript export paragraph Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/transcript-export-paragraph # Transcript export word Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/transcript-export-word # Transcript response Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/schemas/transcript-response # OpusClip Skill Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/skill A code package the agent loads. It documents how to call the OpusClip API and includes worked samples the agent adapts at runtime. Pro-tier API access is in **Beta**. The limits described on [Limitations](/api-reference/limitation) apply to **Pro Beta** and **Max** unless noted otherwise. Business customers have API access per their contract. > [!NOTE] > > Prefer a hosted, OAuth-based integration with no API key handling? Use the [MCP Server](/api-reference/agent-setup) (Cursor, Cline, Claude Code, and other MCP hosts) or the [Claude Connector](/api-reference/claude-connector) (Claude.ai). ## Install Get an API key from the [OpusClip dashboard](https://clip.opus.pro/dashboard) under **API Access → Create key**. Set it in the shell that launches the agent: ```bash theme={"dark"} export OPUSCLIP_API_KEY=sk-... ``` > [!WARNING] > > Do not paste API keys into chat with the agent. Chat content can be retained in transcripts, logs, and model context. Set the key in the shell environment as shown above. Install the skill in your host: **Claude Code** ```text theme={"dark"} /plugin marketplace add opus-pro/opus-skills /plugin install opusclip@opus-skills ``` **Codex (CLI and App)** ```bash theme={"dark"} codex plugin marketplace add opus-pro/opus-skills ``` **OpenClaw** ```bash theme={"dark"} openclaw plugins install clawhub:opusclip-pro ``` **Claude.ai Web and Claude Cowork (Pro+ Anthropic subscription)** * Clone the repository: ```bash theme={"dark"} git clone https://github.com/opus-pro/opus-skills.git ``` * `cd skills && zip -r opusclip-skill.zip opusclip` * Upload the zip at **Settings → Customize → Skills**. **Other hosts with npx skills** ```bash theme={"dark"} npx skills add opus-pro/opus-skills ``` ## Verify installation Start a new conversation and run: > List my recent OpusClip projects The agent should call the skill and return a list (or report that the API key is missing). If nothing happens, confirm the plugin loaded and that `OPUSCLIP_API_KEY` is set in the shell that launched the host. ## What's next * Marketplace listing and security work at [skills.sh](https://skills.sh). * Need higher limits? [Contact sales](https://www.opus.pro/contact-api). * On a **Business** plan? Your custom limits live in your contract. Talk to your account manager for details. # Webhook Source: https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/webhook Webhooks are a way for your application to receive real-time notifications from the API when a specific event occurs. For example, you can use webhooks to receive notifications when a new `project` is created. ## Example > [card] [Webhook for Project Creation](/api-reference/endpoints/create-project#conclusion-actions) > > Create a new project and receive a webhook notification. ## Securing your webhook Every webhook we send is signed so that your server can confirm it genuinely came from Opus and was not modified in transit. The signature is built from a **secret key** that only you and Opus share — it is never sent in the request. > [!NOTE] > > **Your secret key is your Opus API secret key** (the `sk-…` value from your API settings). > Opus signs each webhook with your organization's API secret key, so verify with that same > value. If your organization has multiple API keys, the **first key created** is the one used > for signing — keep it active, and if you rotate keys, update the secret on your server to > match. Each POST request carries three headers: | Header | What it is | Why it's there | | - | - | - | | `X-Opus-Signature` | An HMAC-SHA256 hash of the request body combined with the salt, keyed with your secret. | **Authenticity & integrity** — only a party holding the secret can produce it, so a valid signature proves the payload is genuine and unaltered. | | `X-Opus-Salt` | 8 random bytes (hex), regenerated for every request. | Mixed into the signed input so two identical payloads still produce different signatures. | | `X-Opus-Timestamp` | The Unix time (in seconds) when the webhook was sent. | Lets you reject obviously old deliveries. See the note on replay protection below. | ### How the signature is computed We generate the value of `X-Opus-Signature` like this: ``` signature = HMAC-SHA256(secretKey, body + salt) ``` Where `secretKey` is your Opus API secret key (the `sk-…` value — see the note above), `body` is the exact raw JSON request body, and `salt` is the value sent in `X-Opus-Salt`. Because the salt is appended to the body before hashing, you must use the **raw body bytes** — re-serializing the parsed JSON may change whitespace or key order and break the comparison. > [!NOTE] > > The timestamp is **not** part of the signed input — only `body + salt` is hashed. The > freshness check in Step 4 is therefore best-effort: it rejects stale deliveries, but a > determined attacker who captures a request could replay it with a fresh timestamp. For > strong replay protection, also record the `X-Opus-Salt` (or the signature) of each request > you accept and reject any value you have already seen. See **Replay protection** below. ### Verifying a webhook on your server **1. Step 1: Read the raw request body** Capture the request body exactly as received, before any JSON parsing. Also read the `X-Opus-Signature`, `X-Opus-Salt`, and `X-Opus-Timestamp` headers. **2. Step 2: Recompute the signature** Calculate `HMAC-SHA256(secretKey, body + salt)` using your shared secret and the salt from the header. **3. Step 3: Compare the signatures** Compare your computed value against `X-Opus-Signature` using a **constant-time** comparison. Decode both values to fixed-length buffers and check their lengths match *before* comparing — `crypto.timingSafeEqual` throws if the buffers differ in length, so a malformed or empty signature header must be rejected rather than allowed to crash your handler. If they don't match, reject the request. **4. Step 4: Check the timestamp (recommended)** Reject the request if `X-Opus-Timestamp` is outside an acceptable window (for example, more than 5 minutes from the current time) to drop obviously old deliveries. **5. Step 5: Reject replays (recommended)** Record the `X-Opus-Salt` of each request you accept (e.g. in a short-lived cache keyed by salt). If you see a salt you have already processed, reject the request as a replay. ### Example (Node.js) ```javascript theme={"dark"} import crypto from 'crypto' const seenSalts = new Set() // use a TTL cache (e.g. Redis) in production function verifyWebhook(rawBody, headers, secretKey) { const salt = headers['x-opus-salt'] const timestamp = parseInt(headers['x-opus-timestamp'], 10) const received = headers['x-opus-signature'] if (!received || !salt || Number.isNaN(timestamp)) return false // Step 2: recompute the signature const expected = crypto .createHmac('sha256', secretKey) .update(rawBody + salt) .digest('hex') // Step 3: constant-time compare — guard length first so a malformed // signature is rejected instead of throwing a RangeError. const a = Buffer.from(received, 'hex') const b = Buffer.from(expected, 'hex') const signatureValid = a.length === b.length && crypto.timingSafeEqual(a, b) if (!signatureValid) return false // Step 4: reject stale requests (5-minute window) const fresh = Math.abs(Math.floor(Date.now() / 1000) - timestamp) < 300 if (!fresh) return false // Step 5: reject replays if (seenSalts.has(salt)) return false seenSalts.add(salt) return true } ``` > [!NOTE] > > Keep your secret key private and store it securely. Anyone with the key can forge valid > signatures. If you suspect it has leaked, rotate it. # Team Management Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/6219255-team-management Team workspace allows seamless collaboration for teams to create videos together. You can share credits, videos, and brand templates within your team. ## How to create a team? ### Creating a team You can create a **Team Workplace** and invite your teammates to join the team. Here is how you can do this: 1. Click your **Profile image** on the left sidebar and go to **Create a Team** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/nfs8k7joMOwNh3iE/images/imgs/screenshot0413-04.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=nfs8k7joMOwNh3iE\&q=85\&s=070ee67b9ceeaf2fdecfb3d19e20064a) 2. Name your **Team Workspace**, add a logo and create the team ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/add-team-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=42da578d10670081b00aac0061dd26e0) 3. Copy the **invitation link** and send it to your teammates. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/add-team-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=100376947ea20c4750a1e75fbb84baed) 4. Then your teammates can join the team by clicking into the **invitation link**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/add-team-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=d26f0fce080267a263e35eda2d649249) 5. As the **team owner**, you can also manage the team members on the **Team settings** page ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/add-team-5.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=a99ce15d4414b8205f65931872dd84ec) ### Need more than 4 seats? Pro plan users have 2 seats per pack, and up to 4 seats (2+ packs). You can change your pack number in the subscription page. > [!NOTE] > > If you need more than 4 seats, please fill out this form: [https://www.opus.pro/contact](https://www.opus.pro/contact) ## FAQs 1. **Can a user be part of multiple teams?** A user can be part of multiple teams: * For example, you can be the owner of team A, and a member of team B * You can also be a member of team C, and a member of team D * However, a user associated with an email address can only be the owner of one team in the current version. We might support being the owner of multiple teams in the future versions. If you need this feature, submit a request [here](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests). 2. **Are there any plans for introducing a chat window for the team workspace so that team members can communicate, leave notes, etc.** This is not supported in the current version. We welcome feature requests and you can submit new request [here](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests)! 3. **What would happen if a user who is a team owner is currently not part of the same work environment and becomes inactive? How it is decided who will be the new team owner?** Please reach out to our customer support team at our [contact page](https://www.opus.pro/contact-support). If you are a paid customer, you can reach out to us directly via Intercom. 4. **What will happen when a user is removed from the team? Do they still have access to the clips that they worked on in the team workspace in their own personal dashboard?** If a member is removed from a team, they no longer have access to the clips in that team workspace. However, for the team owner, even if the team has been disbanded or they downgrades to individual account, they can still access the clips in their individual account. 5. **I'm a paid user who joined a workspace as a member. Will my credits be used?** The answer is no. When you join other people's workspace, you will consume the owner's credits. The team workspace will only follow its owner's subscription status, and will not be impacted by member status. 6. **Do I need an existing OpusClip account to receive a team invite?** They don't need an existing account. We will guide them to create an account ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-34.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=ec91c63371cd66989cdd895579e3cb45) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-35.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=31c983f46fe02b529025256db1310eb1) 7. **Can I promote a team member to a team owner?** Not supported in the current version. We will support the transfer owner feature in future versions. 8. **If I am invited to a team workspace, do I still have access to my personal account?** Yes. If you have an existing account, and you join another team workspace, we will ask you which account you are logging into. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-32.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=2f69fe4413d43ac5bbe901dbe494cd57) You can switch accounts anytime by clicking on your profile dropdown in the left sidebar. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-33.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=bb8d9d708d2d908a97f6969bc9e719c0) 9. **Whose credits will be consumed in a team workspace?** The **team owner**'s credits will be consumed in a team workspace. If you need more credits in a team workspace, the team owner needs to buy more packs, members can't manage subscriptions & billing in a team workspace. 10. **What would happen to my team if I reduced the number of packs purchased, or canceled my subscription?** If you reduce the number of packs, you will have less seats. If there are more people in your workspace than the number of seats, the most recently joined members will lose access to your workspace. If you cancel subscription, at the end of your current billing cycle, you will lose access to the team workspace feature. As the owner, you can still access everything, but all your members will lose access to your workspace. 11. **How many members can I invite to my workspace?** The number of people you can invite to your workspace is based on the number of packs you purchase. Each pack provides 2 seats, with up to 4 seats for Pro Plan. To put this into perspective: * If you purchase 1 pack, you will have 2 seats, and can invite 1 person to your team * If you purchase 2+ packs, you will have 4 seats, and can invite 3 people to your team If you need more than 10 seats, please contact customer support. 12. **How quickly can I see changes made by my team?** Changes made by your team to videos or brand templates are instantly visible after the changes are saved. If you encounter any delays in seeing the updates, ensure that your team has saved the changes and consider refreshing the webpage. In cases where multiple team members save changes, the most recently saved modification will overwrite any previous changes. 13. **What are the permissions for team owners and team members?** Team owner: * Create and manage teams, invite or remove members, and delete teams. * Full access to content, members, and subscription details. * Future capability to assign diverse roles and permissions (coming soon) Team member: * Submit videos using shared credits. * Access shared projects, videos, brand templates, and social account posting. * Cannot manage the team or subscription plan. 14. **Are there any plans for introducing a chat window for the team workspace so that team members can communicate, leave notes, etc.** * Not supported in the current version. We welcome feature requests and you can submit new request [here](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests) 15. **Can I merge 2 team into 1?** Not supported in the current version. We welcome feature requests and you can submit new request [here](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests) 16. **As the team owner, can I track which team members uploaded specific videos?** Not supported in the current version (The credits usage history doesn't display which member consume that credits currently). We welcome feature requests and you can submit new request [here](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests) # Requesting a feature? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/6219261-requesting-a-feature ## How can I have the team prioritize my feature request? Yes, there is a way if you'd really like your feature request boosted. Submit your request via this [link](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests), and post your feature request up there. We prioritize feature requests with the most upvotes onto our roadmap, and will notify you once the feature you requested or supported is under review/planned/completed! # Apply to Become an Affiliate! Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/6219263-apply-to-become-an-affiliate ### Do you have an affiliate program? Yes! You can apply to our affiliate program here: [https://www.opus.pro/affiliate](https://www.opus.pro/affiliate) # Best Practices Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/6219271-best-practices ### What types of videos should I upload for optimal results? For best results, upload videos with the following characteristics: * Duration: 15-180 minutes long videos preferred for our algorithm to effectively detect and repurpose content. * Content: Informative speech videos, as our system extracts the most valuable and engaging parts based on automatic speech recognition. * Video containing words less than 30 will be rejected ### How do I set up my brand template? Brand template is a place where you can set up your branding preferences and apply them to all of your clips. To set up your brand template, click the "Brand Template" icon in the left sidebar. In the brand template page, you can set up your preferences. Now users are able to set up 2 brand templates. ***Apply brand template setting when you edit a clip.*** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-15.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=bb9a331570d0640a7b60477d7a25997b) ***Set a default template for future projects & Rename each template*** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-16.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=e881ed3f8608bf7bd5144c379aeb3905) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-17.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=81114f625a69bb2617c9a86aa93f821c) # Email Login Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/7285176-email-login ## Can I login with an email account? Yes, we allow users to login with email accounts from any email provider. ## If I have already registered with Google SSO, can I use email to login? You can "Log out" first, then "Log in", use the same email as your Google SSO, and input the 2FA code that is emailed to you. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-8.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=4751a6672fa58744a3e1d3fc371e08b5) # Upgrade & Downgrade Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/7285187-credit-related-questions > [!NOTE] > > Your Subscription Page can be accessed [here](https://clip.opus.pro/subscription). ## Upgrading ### Upgrading your plan If you are a Starter plan user, you can upgrade to Pro plan in your **subscription page**. **You only need to pay for proration and your Pro plan will begin immediately**. This means that you only need to pay for the difference between your current plan and the Pro plan. For example: * Your current plan is Starter plan * You want to upgrade it to a two pack Pro plan. * You have already used the current plan for 20 days. Then you only need to pay for (Pro plan price-Starter plan price) \* (30-20) / 30 to upgrade. Here is what will happen next: * Your plan will be changed to Pro plan immediately and all your projects will be able to use Pro features * You will get 300 minutes \*2 \* (30-20) / 30 = **200 minutes of extra credits**. These are your unused Pro plan credits. * All your current credits will be transferred to the Pro plan. ### Adding more packs If you're on the Pro plan, you can upgrade by adding more packs for extra resources like team seats and monthly credits. This upgrade starts a new billing cycle immediately, and you'll be charged for the full amount of the new plan. Your unused credits will also have their expiration extended to the end of this new cycle. ### Upgrade to yearly plan Upgrading from a monthly Starter or Pro plan to a yearly plan provides cheaper credits with a 12 month expiration, compared to the 60 day limit on monthly plans. ## Downgrading Sometimes you might find that your usage is not as high as you expected, or you think basic features are enough for you. You can downgrade your plan from Pro to Starter or remove packs to reduce your cost. **All downgrades happen at the end of the current billing cycle**, so you can enjoy all the benefits of your current plan until then. # How can I upload a video from Google Drive? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9058950-how-can-i-upload-a-video-from-google-drive To upload a video from Google Drive, simply connect your Google Drive account by clicking on the Google Drive icon located below the URL submission box. Once connected, grant access to OpusClip. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-48.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=0d0bf7d0ebebe115abd7b309cb87c848) Afterward, you will be able to select a single video from your connected Drive account and submit it. # How can I disconnect my Google Drive account? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9069523-how-can-i-disconnect-my-google-drive-account 1. Go to Google connection page [`https://myaccount.google.com/connections?pli=1`](https://myaccount.google.com/connections?pli=1) 2. Find the app or service connected to Google and revoke or disconnect access. Alternatively, you can follow the instructions below: 1. Go to your Google account page and click on the "Security" tab. 2. Scroll down and click on "Manage third-party access." 3. Find the app or service connected to Google and click on it. 4. Look for the option to revoke or disconnect access. 5. Confirm your decision if prompted. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-49.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=a83712e3c7701bdc444f5bc266e81ea7) # Social account FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9432410-social-account-faq ## Which social media platforms can I post clips to? ### Post immediately For Pro plan users, you can post real time posts to YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, LinkedIn, Facebook Page, X (Beta version), Pinterest, Threads and Bluesky. For Starter plan users, you can post real time posts to YouTube, TikTok and Instagram. ### Schedule future posts For Pro plan users, we support multiple Social Media Scheduler: YouTube, TikTok Feed, Instagram Reels, Facebook Page, LinkedIn, X (Beta version), Pinterest, Threads, Bluesky and more is coming! For Starter plan users, you can only post real time posts. You can schedule posts simply by clicking on "Schedule" and post your content anytime you want!\ ​ > [!NOTE] > > We currently only support connection to Facebook Page. Connection to private Facebook Profile and Facebook Group is not supported for now. ## How many accounts can I add to each social media platform? Our Pro plan users can connect multiple accounts to each social media platform. You can connect up to 6 social accounts as a Pro user. If you need more, you can now purchase an add-on pack to double your cap to 12 social accounts. To add multiple accounts for one platform, simply choose "Add Accounts" and select that platform again. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-72.png?s=04ca56c0ba1cdea266e1a849e5610e45) ## How can I manage my social account connections? You can remove or add social account connections by selecting "Social accounts" in the dropdown menu. Note that your future posting schedules will be canceled once you remove your social connection. We will delete all your account information from our systems when you remove your account. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-73.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=cb6fc8c7e31e614416c1a2cdc6993606) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-74.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=84917cc361836b63e3db6d66146a73fc) ## Reauthorize my account Your social accounts might sometimes get disconnected from OpusClip. This happens because we use APIs from social platforms like YouTube, Instagram, and TikTok to post clips to your accounts. As a security measure, these platforms periodically require you to reconnect your account to OpusClip. **If you don't reauthorize your social accounts, you won't be able to post your clips through OpusClip.** * *This issue is most common with Instagram and Facebook.* When your accounts are disconnected, you will see the following reminders: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-89.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=91e8f3b10379c73df162e307caf66ada) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-90.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=457105b9ccd7312d80abc16c7a40c88a) # Posting your clips FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9432411-posting-your-clips-faq # Can I upload my local video to schedule on OpusClip? Yes, you can! Here is how you can do this: ## Step 1: Go to the Social Media Calendar ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-75.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=2d06cbbd53ffc23d0058f3115dab6bc5) ## Step 2: Select a date to post ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-76.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=025ed01e4e9c2eab7884f85b937a0919) ## Step 3: Upload your local video ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-77.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=a87e43c6dae824e7b6f95c18a75e372e) ## Limitations For unedited local files, we only support mp4 files and files under 200MB for now. If you are uploading a TikTok video, please make sure that the FPS is above 23 to comply with platform rules. If you are uploading an Instagram video, please make sure each clip is between 30 and 90 seconds. If you are uploading multiple clips at once, note that **all** clips must meet this requirement. If any single clip falls outside the 30 to 90 second range, the entire upload will be blocked until the timing is fixed. # What happens when I edit and save a clip in a scheduled post? When you schedule a post, we will save the version of the clip at the time when the post is created. Therefore, if you edit and save the clip again after scheduling it, the changes will not be reflected in the scheduled post. You can schedule the clip again after editing it. # Can I schedule posts beyond my project expiration date? Yes, you can schedule posts to a date even after your projects expire. We will save the clip when you create the posting schedule, so it won't be influenced by your project expiration. Even if you lose access to your project, your scheduled post will still be sent out. ## Why are my posts delayed for 1 minute when I schedule them? We will delay your posting schedule for 1 minute if there is already an existing one at the same time for the same account. Many platforms will detect if you are using automated posting tools, and will fail your posts if you post too frequently. This is why we will add a delay when posting. # General questions Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9442019-general-questions ## How to use the Social Media Calendar Our newest social media calendar is a powerful tool that lets you **schedule your whole month's posts in 10 minutes**. With the new calendar, you can: 1. Connect multiple accounts to each social platform 2. View everything you’ve published, drafted, and plan to publish in one calendar 3. Drag and drop posts from one day or time to another To use our social media calendar effectively, we recommend: ### 1. Link your account(s) to each social platform To connect your accounts to your platforms, please: 1. Click the Social Accounts icon in the left sidebar 2. Click "Add Account" 3. Connect your accounts to various platforms ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-56.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=f35279698924a673f961324f0c2b7e34) ### 2. Schedule your posts using the social media calendar To schedule your posts, please: 1. Click "Calendar" in the left sidebar 2. Choose your desired date on the calendar 3. From there, choose the clips and platforms for your posts. Our AI will *auto-generate descriptions and hashtags* ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-57.png?s=a5e2fd2586adc370ae2242ef4d72fa93) You can easily manage all your scheduled posts from the calendar. Give it a try and let us know your feedback! # About the result clips Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9442054-about-the-result-clips ### The generated clips content is not the best moment We train our AI to find the best moments from your long videos. If you want to clip specific parts of the video, you can use our **AI-Copilot** feature where you can select a specific timeframe to clip, as well as a specific topic to clip by entering keyword(s) you'd like to include in the clips. ### Why is my clip resolution low? If your original video is a YouTube video, it's most likely that when you submitted the YouTube video to our server, YouTube is still processing HD (which may take several hours). That's why we can't generate HD clips. Before you submit the video, you need to make sure your original video’s HD is fully processed. To see if your video has finished processing in higher qualities, check the video’s watch page. 1. Open your video’s watch page. 2. In the video player, select Settings. 3. Click Quality. ### How many clips will Opus generate from a single video? The number of clips that Opus creates is dependent on the video length that you process, and the model you use. ClipAnything usually yields slightly more clips than ClipBasic: * 0-3 min: 1-2 clips * 3-10 min: 3-14 clips * 10-30 min: 5-21 clips * 30-60 min: 23-32 clips * 60-120 min: 32-42 clips * Over 120 min: 42-55 clips We are constantly working on improving our models so that we will generate more clips for you. Stay tuned! # Trimming Clips/Adding New Sections Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9442115-trim-the-clip-or-add-new-sections-from-original-video ### Can I trim/extend/remove the sections of clips? Currently, you can **trim or extend** the beginning and the end of each clip on ***Caption*** tab of editing page. Hover over a word to set it as start or end.👇 ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-25.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=510722a76dbba0c42ea8657be7259548) You can also **edit out/remove** some sections that you don't like.👇 ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-26.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=955f25e1c55b03d844058afcd43ae7f0) # I can't login with my email Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9545456-i-can-t-login-with-my-email ### Trouble Logging In? Having trouble logging in? Try these steps to troubleshoot some of the most common problems. ### Troubleshooting Tips #### Check Your Email Address Try a different email address and double check to make sure the email you entered is spelled correctly. #### Check Your Spam Folder Our email might have been labeled as spam. Be sure to check your spam inbox. #### Free Up Inbox Space Free up space in your inbox. Your mailbox could be too full. Resend the verification code to your email after you free up space. #### Whitelist Our Email Address Our email address could be blocked. Whitelist our email address: [login@app.opus.pro](mailto:login@app.opus.pro) on your email platform. #### Wait and Retry Your email server could be temporarily down. Try waiting a couple of minutes before resending the verification code to your email. # Customize My Posts Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9747769-customize-my-posts ## Add hashtags for my social posts ### Add hashtags You can add hashtags when scheduling your posts by directly typing the hashtags. The hashtags will be automatically recognized by different platforms. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-86.png?s=c91ca8c2b13566c9dfc7548481c3599f) ### Popular hashtag trends For TikTok, you can also search for popular hashtags and see their trendiness. You will see how many times the hashtag has been used. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-87.png?s=ce56c3087b6a2fc062b5103d9fbd6690) ## Tag other collaborators in my post You can now tag other collaborators when scheduling an Instagram post. You just need to type the correct handle in the post descriptions. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-88.png?s=81442226c4ace27f1549a8103cc3c1d2) ### AI Features / Post Customization AI-generated titles, descriptions, and hashtags are also available and editable before posting on the **OpusClip iOS app**. ### Limitations: * The tags have to refer to a valid Instagram handle, and the account must be public. * Now we only support tagging other users on Instagram. If you want this feature for other platforms, please let us know by clicking upvote for that feature! ## Include YouTube link to full video in my social posts You can now add the full video link automatically when publishing posts to YouTube. Just tick the **"Add the full video link to your YouTube post"** checkbox — the link lands between your caption and hashtags. ![](https://public.cdn.opus.pro/changelog/include-link-to-full-video-0904.avif) ### Limitations: * Available on OpusClip Web only. * We currently only support adding the full video link when publishing to YouTube. If you want this feature for other platforms, please let us know by clicking upvote for that feature! # What is ClipAnything? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9947095-clip-anything ClipAnything is the **first-ever multimodal AI clipping** that lets you **clip any moment from ANY video** using visual, audio, and sentiment cues, including videos with little to no dialogue. Here is how it works: **1. Analyze everything in a video** ClipAnything uses state-of-the-art video understanding that analyzes each frame through visual, audio, and sentiment cues, identifying objects, scenes, actions, sounds, emotions, texts, and more. Each scene is then rated based on its virality potential. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-86.gif?s=ea413b26319a5d426c63ea59a631ad94) **2. Clip any video with customized prompts** Whether you want to compile all the scoring from a sports game, or highlight the best scene from your travel vlog, just type your prompts, and we'll personalize your clips and automatically capture key moments to match your vision. To learn more about how to use prompts to find specific moments, please go to [ClipAnything Prompts Manual](./clip-anything-prompt-manual). ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-87.gif?s=a4356de687b6b6f58fe9ba76b3120c4d) **3. Reframe Anything into social ready clips** *`Alpha`* Whether it's a football soaring across the field, a whale gliding through the ocean, or a host speaking in the newsroom, our Reframe Anything identifies key objects and actions, tracks them across frames, and seamlessly reframes your clips to 9:16, 1:1, and cinematic 16:9. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-88.gif?s=f8657318b572bd80da6cc0f0b7faf7da) # Add a Viral Hook to your video Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/add-a-viral-hook A viral hook turns the first few seconds of your video into a polished, scroll-stopping opening. Pick a template and OpusClip fills it with either your captions or the video theme, then adds animated text, zoom effects, and matching sound effects on top of your existing footage. 💡 **Image placeholder:** Before/after GIF of a video opening with a viral hook applied. <video type="video/mp4" /> # Before you start * **Plans:** Available on Trial, Pro, Max, and Business plans. * **Credits:** Each hook uses credits. See **How credits work** below. * **Best results:** Talking-head videos with a single speaker and a clear opening line. Hooks work best when the first few seconds are one continuous shot. # Add a hook in a Recipe In any Recipe, you can turn on viral hook. 1. Upload your video and choose a Recipe. 2. In the recipe settings, find **Auto hook** and make sure the **Viral hook** toggle is on. 3. Browse the templates and hover over one to preview it. 4. Select the template you want, then start processing. When your video is ready, the hook plays over its opening, filled with your own words. 💡 **Screenshot needed:** Auto Edit workflow settings with the Viral hook toggle on and the template picker open. # Add hooks when clipping When clipping, viral hook is off by default. 1. Upload your video and choose **Get clips in 1 click**. 2. In the clipping settings, turn on **Auto hook** > **Viral hook**. 3. Choose a template. 4. Choose how many of your top clips get a hook. 5. Click **Get clips**. The hook is applied to the opening of each selected clip. It comes with its own sound effects and zoom, and doesn't change the rest of your clip. 💡 **Screenshot needed:** Clipping settings with the Auto hook option highlighted. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/exjVZHzn-QQzWeW0/images/imgs/viral-hook-clipping.gif?s=d6a5b901938f6a45b0aebe85c8fde08e) **Already have clips?** On the results page, select 'edit clip' to continue adding viral hook. # Add or replace a hook in the editor 1. Open your clip or video in the editor. 2. In the right sidebar, click **Hook**, then select the **viral hook** tab. 3. Filter templates by style, for example **Clean & corporate** or **High-energy**, and select one. 4. Click **Apply hook**. If your video already has a hook, click **Replace hook** instead. 💡 **Screenshot needed:** Editor Hook panel showing the viral hook tab, style filters, and the Apply hook button. # Customize your hook Select the hook on the timeline or in the preview to open **Hook settings**. You can: * **Edit the text:** Change any word, for example "lunch" to "Lunch menu". * **Style the text:** Change the color, highlight color, and weight, or apply bold, italic, or underline. * **Resize and reposition:** Adjust the size and position of the headline. * **Swap images:** If the template includes pictures, replace them with your own. * **Hide captions:** Turn off your captions while the hook plays so the two don't overlap. * **Turn off sound effects:** Keep the visuals and remove the hook's sound. 💡 **Screenshot needed:** Hook settings panel with text, color, size, Hide captions, and Sound effects controls. # Remove a hook 1. Open your clip or video in the editor. 2. Select the hook on the timeline. 3. Press **Delete**, or click the delete icon in Hook settings. Your original opening is restored. # How credits work | Where you add the hook | Credits | | - | - | | Clipping (up to 10 clips) | 20 credits | | Editor (1 hook) | 2 credits | # FAQ **Does a hook make my video longer?** No. The hook plays over your existing opening. It doesn't add new footage, change your voice, or extend your timeline. **Where does the hook text come from?** OpusClip reads the transcript of your opening and fills the template with your own words. You don't need to replace any placeholder text. **Does it work with multiple speakers or split-screen layouts?** Yes **Can I choose a different template later?** Yes. In the editor, open **Hook** > **viral hook**, pick a new template, and click **Replace hook**. # Add motion graphics to your video Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/add-motion-graphics Motion graphics are animated text and graphics that appear at key moments in your video. In the Auto Edit recipe, OpusClip reads your transcript, finds what's worth highlighting, like a guest's name, a big number, or an important date, and adds a matching graphic at the right moment. No more hunting for the right moment, finding an element, and typing in the text by hand. You can also add motion graphics manually from the editor. 💡 **Image placeholder:** Example clip with a "2.4M views in 30 days" stat card animating in next to the speaker. # Before you start * **Plans:** Available on Trial, Pro, Max, and Business plans. * **Credits:** Automatic motion graphics use credits based on video length. See **How credits work** below. * **Best results:** Talking-head videos with clear speech and specific details, such as names, numbers, and dates. # Turn on motion graphics in Auto Edit 1. Upload your video and choose the **Auto Edit** recipe. 2. In the recipe settings, turn on **Motion graphics**. 3. Start processing. If you also turned on an AI viral hook, your motion graphics match the style of your hook template, so the whole video looks consistent. 💡 **Image placeholder:** Auto Edit workflow settings with the Motion graphics toggle on. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/FYGl9Js_m7avymK7/images/imgs/add-motion-graphics-auto-edit-settings.gif?s=b0a66f01e3fb32e3a7e067ed90249ff5) # Add a motion graphic in the editor 1. Open your video in the editor. 2. Move the playhead to where you want the graphic to appear. 3. In the right sidebar, click **Graphics**. 4. Browse by category, or search for a template. 5. Click a template to add it. | Category | Use it to | Examples | | - | - | - | | Data | Turn numbers into visuals viewers can scan quickly | Big number, bar chart, trend line, gauge | | Social | Add social proof and drive engagement | Follow button, like burst, review card | | Promo | Create urgency and drive action | Save the date, countdown timer, sale badge | Looking for animated text, like name tags and keyword pop-ups? You'll find them under **Text**. 💡 **Image placeholder:** Editor Motion panel showing the All, Data, Social, and Promo filters. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/FYGl9Js_m7avymK7/images/imgs/add-motion-graphics-editor-panel.gif?s=36af6580379c93a0f85771a8bfba2a27) # Edit a motion graphic Select a graphic in the preview or on the timeline to open **Motion graphic settings**. You can: * **Edit the content:** Change the text, number, or label. * **Style it:** Change the font, text color, and background color, or apply bold, italic, or underline. * **Resize and move it:** Drag the corners to resize, or drag the graphic to reposition it. * **Change the timing:** Drag the edges of the graphic on the timeline. A shorter graphic animates faster; a longer one animates slower. * **Hide captions:** Turn off captions while the graphic is on screen. 💡 **Image placeholder:** Motion graphic settings panel for a "Big number" graphic with Label, Background color, and Text color fields. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/FYGl9Js_m7avymK7/images/imgs/add-motion-graphics-edit-settings.gif?s=fd951ef435029fd047b75dbd71e2fb39) # Delete a motion graphic 1. Select the graphic on the timeline. 2. Press **Delete**, or click the delete icon. # How credits work Automatic motion graphics in Auto Edit use 6 credits per minute of uploaded video. From the editor, manually adding motion graphics is free of charge. # FAQ **Why didn't OpusClip add a graphic where I expected?** OpusClip highlights the moments most likely to keep viewers watching and spaces graphics out to avoid clutter. You can add any graphic yourself from the Motion panel. **Does it work with multiple speakers or split-screen layouts?** Motion graphics work best with a single speaker. With multiple people on screen or changing layouts, check the placement and adjust it in the editor. **Do motion graphics add sound?** No. Motion graphics are visual only. # Add Music Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/add-music-to-your-clips Want to make your clips more exciting and engaging? Now you can easily add copyright free music to your clips. Choose a track from our music library or upload your own music files to set the perfect tone. Here's how to get started: > [!NOTE] > > Although our music is licensed and generally free from copyright claims, sometimes claims may occur on videos due to mismatches from other companies or individuals fraudulently claiming our content. If this happens, please contact us and we will investigate and help resolve the issue. Please also ensure that you are following the NCS usage policy as outlined here: [https://ncs.io/usage-policy](https://ncs.io/usage-policy). > > Additionally, we recommend visiting: [https://ncs.io/](https://ncs.io/). > > Use the "Search tracks & artists" function to find the specific track you used. Once you open the track page, you will see the required credit section in the description. Make sure you copy and paste that exact credit format into your video description to help prevent copyright claims. 1. **Navigate to the Editor:** Open the specific clip editor page you want to work on. 2. **We provide two ways to select music files** 1. **Bring your own Music** In the **Audio** panel, click **Upload** to open the Add audio dialog. There are two ways in: * **Upload a file** — audio (mp3, m4a, ogg, wav) or video (mp4, mov, mkv). Give us a video and we keep the sound. * **Paste a link** — a public video or audio URL. We fetch it and pull the audio out. It's also saved to **Media › Audio** and **Asset Library**, so you can reuse it in any other clip without uploading again. Only use audio you own or have permission to use. ![The Add audio dialog with Click to upload or drop a file here, and a Paste a video or audio link field.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qhqzUq7cOIwYVOOV/images/imgs/add-music-add-audio.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qhqzUq7cOIwYVOOV\&q=85\&s=935be510a89c0ea1a0249f940268678c) 2. **Select from the music library:** * Go to the right panel and select **"Music"** and look up the music you want to add to the list. * You can switch the type of music or search for your favorite music * If you come across a favorite song, you can also click to favorite it, so that you can quickly find it under the Liked category in the future. * Click the play button to preview the music first ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0409-07.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=43171ca516dd6c352638f2c25a622b5a) 3. **Add music to tracks:** There are two ways to add music to tracks 1. Click the **Add** button on the music file , and the file will be added to the soundtrack after the timeline 2. Drag the music and drop it into the specified position on the soundtrack 4. **Cut the music to the appropriate length** and remove excess parts 1. Select the music file on the soundtrack you want to edit, and position the timeline at the desired cut point. 2. Click the split button to split the audio into two segments 3. You can delete unnecessary segments by clicking the delete button 5. **Adjust the music:** Select the music clip on the soundtrack and use the properties panel on the right. * **Volume:** Drag the slider to set how loud the music sits under your video (15% by default). * **Speed:** Play the track faster or slower (from 0.5× to 2.5×). * **Fade in / Fade out:** Set up to 5 seconds on each side so the music eases in and out instead of cutting. This also works on sound-effect tracks (0 seconds by default). * If your track contains multiple pieces of music, simply select **"Apply settings to all"** to apply the same settings across all tracks. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/POE01J53Yu5PFrlr/images/imgs/add-music-properties-panel.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=POE01J53Yu5PFrlr\&q=85\&s=c4824e38244d89fdd8a7eab99867c743) 6. **Delete the music files on the track** 1. Select the segment you want to delete and click the Delete button. ## FAQs and More Is there a maximum upload limit for audio files? * Yes, at the moment, the platform supports up to a maximum of 30 minutes per file. Is music copyrighted? Will there be copyright issues when using it? * Yes, our music library contains copyright-free and licensed music that you can add to your clips. However, sometimes claims or copyright issues may occur on videos due to mismatches from other companies or individuals fraudulently claiming our content. If this happens, please [contact us](https://www.opus.pro/contact-support) and we will investigate and help resolve the issue. # Add Social Accounts Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/add-social-accounts > [!NOTE] > > If you are a **Pro plan user**, you can connect **multiple accounts** to each social platform. > > Now we support autoposting to **YouTube, Instagram Reels, TikTok, Facebook Page, LinkedIn Business, X, Pinterest, Threads, Bluesky** 1. Click the **Social accounts** tab ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-116.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=b2be4a08ce74a7a8a88e907a65e9af9b) 2. Connect your accounts to various platforms ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-117.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=f7f718d0c7ab7db7cb9bc0ecb3f16d8c) 3. Choose the platform you'd like to connect to, then follow the provided instructions to link your account. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-118.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=c859a2db860eaefd214bc12e26151a45) > [!NOTE] > > **NOTE:** You can also connect and manage your social accounts from the **OpusClip mobile app**. Go to your Profile page → Social accounts to add or remove connected platforms. # Add Text Overlays Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/add-text-overlays ## Edit your clips You can add **custom text overlays** as visual cues, calls-to-action, lower thirds, name tags, or headlines by clicking the **Text** tab in the right sidebar. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/w14MIikQWwclGw55/images/imgs/text-overlays-1.gif?s=c42ddaac1c03075faa1954612c8c40a9) ## Stack up to 5 text layers You can add up to **5 text overlays** at the same time. Each overlay gets its own track in the timeline. OpusClip automatically places a new overlay on a free track. If all tracks are occupied at that moment, it places the overlay on the last available track. ## Customize, move, and resize a text overlay Click a text overlay on the canvas or timeline to open its settings panel in the right sidebar. Under **Font settings** you can adjust: * **Words background color** — sets the fill color of the text box * **Text box radius** — controls the corner shape, from sharp (0 px) to fully rounded (up to 80 px) * **Text box width** — sets how wide the box is as a percentage of the frame (1%–100%) To reposition it, drag the overlay anywhere on the canvas. To change how long it appears, drag the edges of the clip in the timeline. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/w14MIikQWwclGw55/images/imgs/text-overlays-2.gif?s=81012d302c788cefc2e964bc8be3b66d) ## FAQ ### How many text overlays can I add? Up to 5 at the same time, each on its own timeline track. ### Can I change the font? Yes — select a text overlay and adjust the font, size, weight, and color from the settings panel in the right sidebar. ### My text overlay isn't showing up. What's wrong? Check the timeline to make sure the clip is placed at the right time. Also confirm the overlay isn't hidden behind another track. # Add Transition Effects Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/add-transition-effects ## Turn on auto-transition effects You can enable **Auto Transitions** using the toolbar on the right side of the editor. Our system will automatically detect jump cuts in the clip and apply the transition effects you’ve selected. If you want to add more transitions, you can also manually insert them. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/add-transitions-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=5750f96e88f1cfdad623669a40dbbea8) ## Manually add transition effects To add more visual engagement and reduce abrupt cuts between your clips, you can now easily apply **Auto Transitions** or choose from 6 effects on the right sidebar: cross fade, cross zoom, zoom in, zoom out, fade in, and fade out. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0409-03.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=e9f2b00d86c6bad4774ea150d54b3d3e) # Change Aspect Ratio Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/adjust-the-aspect-ratio You can change your aspect ratio in **Editor > Clip Layout Settings**. You can adjust your aspect ratio to either **9:16 (Vertical), 1:1 (Square), 16:9 (Landscape) or 4:5 (Portrait)**. Once you've chosen your desired ratio, please click **Save Changes** to apply. If you'd like to change the aspect ratio of your Crop, please check out [this article](/docs/article/can-i-customize-crop-ratio). ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uGK3kBFDPCx0MlYc/images/imgs/change-aspect-ratio-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uGK3kBFDPCx0MlYc\&q=85\&s=ec9cb76318d33269c360953799c0687f) # Affiliate Program FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/affiliate-program-faq ## How does the affiliate link work? You can share your affiliate link with others to have them join OpusClip. If your link is used to sign up, you will earn a 25% recurring commission through the first year of each new subscriber that you refer. ## How often are payouts made? You will automatically get paid on the 15th of each month. It may take a few days to process the payment, so please give it 3-5 days to see the funds hit your account. We pay out affiliate commissions in USD directly to your Paypal account. Therefore, in order to receive a payout for your referrals, you must have an active PayPal account. The commissions are recurring. You'll keep getting paid as long as the person you refer remains subscribed. > [!NOTE] > > Referrals cannot be generated on your own purchases (this includes using a different email address) ## How do I track referred signups? You can log into your affiliate account to track your referrals. As long as you've used your unique referral URL correctly, the data you see in your dashboard will be accurate. ## Who can join as an affiliate? We welcome every creator to apply for our affiliate program. We will review each application, and if we think you are a good fit, we will reach out to you. ## Is there a minimum number of sign-ups required to participate? If your link isn't generating traffic within the first 6 months, we will deactivate the account so that we can make room for other active participants in the program. In order to remain an active affiliate, you should plan to make OpusClip promotions a regular part of your editorial calendar. ## Is there a minimum fee that I need to reach to get paid? To receive your first commission, you need to earn a minimum of 20 USD commission. Once you've reached this threshold, we'll pay you on each billing cycle (15th of each month), as long as your earnings remain above 20 USD. We reserve the right to increase the minimum threshold in the future. ## Can I advertise using my affiliate link? You may not use your affiliate link in any paid media. This includes search engine ads, Facebook ads, or anything similar that would compete with OpusClip’s marketing and cause confusion for potential customers. Abuse, gaming, and policy violations will result in having your account banned and any existing and future commissions forfeited. ## What are your terms and conditions? You can click [here](https://www.opus.pro/affiliate-terms) to review our terms and conditions. You will also be asked to read and agree to our terms and conditions when you sign up for the program. ## I have more questions! Please [contact us](https://www.opus.pro/contact-support) if you have more questions about our affiliate program. # What is the Status of My Affiliate Request? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/affiliate-request-status After you've applied for the affiliate program and you are deemed a good fit, please allow for at least one week to be approved. Once approved, you'll get your unique affiliate link to share. # Add B-roll to your video Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/ai-broll B-roll keeps viewers watching by showing what you're talking about. OpusClip finds the best moments for B-roll and fills them with AI images, AI video, or stock footage. You get to review every spot before anything is added. ## What types of B-roll can I add? * **AI image:** images generated for each spot. All images are planned together from your whole video, so they stay on topic and share one consistent style. * **AI video:** short video clips generated for each spot. By default, **AI Style** matches the color, lighting, and camera feel of your footage. You can also pick a preset style. * **Stock video:** footage from our stock library that matches each spot. You can mix B-roll types in the same clip. ## Add B-roll automatically ### From the clips page You can trigger the B-roll functionality directly next to clips you want to add B-rolls to. This will take you to the editor and trigger the **Find spots** functionality in the editor below. In Grid view, hover over the scissor icon to find **Add B-roll**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM/images/imgs/ai-broll-clips-grid.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM\&q=85\&s=ef8e84a06c5e932699e46930696f188d) In List view, hover over the **AI tools** button to find **Add B-roll**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM/images/imgs/ai-broll-clips-list.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM\&q=85\&s=d4a89a80644639def20acefcad5f87c6) ### From the editor * Open a clip in the editor and click **B-roll** in the right-side panel. * Click **Find spots**. OpusClip reads your transcript and suggests where B-roll fits. This takes about 30 seconds. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM/images/imgs/ai-broll-find-spots.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM\&q=85\&s=1e2f519cea7d41fa45d1619100b24498) * Review the suggested spots and deselect any you don't want. * Under **Fill with**, choose **AI image**, **AI video**, or **Stock video**. * For AI video, choose a **Video model** and a style. **AI Style** matches the color, lighting, and camera feel of your footage. You can also pick a preset style. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM/images/imgs/ai-broll-fill-with.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM\&q=85\&s=a804e603463a31e5e6e90f43d7b0f646) * Click **Add B-rolls**. The B-roll is added to your timeline. ## Add B-roll at a specific moment ### From the timeline and the B-roll panel * In the B-roll panel, click **Add B-roll**. * Move the playhead to where you want B-roll and click **Add at \[time]**. * Describe your idea in **Enter prompt**, click **Upload media**, or click **Search stock footage**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM/images/imgs/ai-broll-add-at-time.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM\&q=85\&s=728fde8c7a6580bd29987c7c03d3756a) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM/images/imgs/ai-broll-stock-search.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM\&q=85\&s=8a0d610eb8e95792d7afd6ef1b73a973) ### From a specific sentence * Simply drag-and-highlight part of the transcript you would like to add B-roll to, and then select the **Add** option to trigger the **Add B-roll** prompt box. * Describe your idea in **Enter prompt**, click **Upload media**, or click **Search stock footage**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM/images/imgs/ai-broll-from-sentence.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=WMXFusCPuQBQuKUM\&q=85\&s=691134af08d553a99aa8cfaa65a2d351) ## Add B-roll when you create a project You can add B-roll automatically to your video up to 120 minutes. * Select **AI B-roll** from the dashboard. * Add your video and choose **AI video B-roll**, **AI image B-roll**, or **Stock video B-roll**. * Click **Create** or **Add B-roll in one click**. B-roll is added to your video automatically. ## Edit or regenerate B-roll * **Move or trim:** drag a B-roll on the timeline, or drag its edges. * **Regenerate:** click a B-roll, then change the prompt or style and generate again. * **Go back to earlier results:** open **Recent B-roll** in the B-roll panel. ## Frequently Asked Questions ### Is B-roll available for everyone? AI image B-roll and stock B-roll are available for users with a **Starter** plan or above, while AI video B-roll is available for **Pro/Max/Business** plans. The B-roll feature is currently not available for free plan users. ### Why did Find spots return nothing? Yes. Open the B-roll panel and click **Recent B-roll** to see earlier results for this clip and add them back. ### Will Find spots replace the B-roll I already added? It replaces Auto B-roll at the spots you select. B-roll you added manually is kept. ### Do failed generations use credits? No. Credits for failed images or clips are returned. ### What's the difference between AI Style and a Preset style for Video B-roll? **AI Style** is the default style for AI video B-roll. It looks at your original footage and matches its color, lighting, and camera feel, so the B-roll blends in with your video. If you want a specific look instead, pick a preset style before you click **Add B-rolls**. ### Can I edit generated B-roll? Currently, you have the ability to drag and reframe the B-roll. You are also able to move B-roll on the timeline by clicking-and-holding it and moving it wherever you please on the timeline. Furthermore, you can also extend or trim B-roll. Please note: For Stock B-roll, you are not able to extend it past the original stock footage. ### Can I regenerate B-roll? Absolutely! Simply click on the B-roll you wish to change. You can revise the prompt, or for AI video, change the style, then generate again to get a fresh B-roll. ### How much does B-roll cost? AI image and AI video B-roll use credits: * **In the editor**: priced per B-roll * **When you create a project**: priced per minute of video You'll see the exact credit cost before you add B-roll. Credits for failed generations are returned. Stock video B-roll is free. ### Am I able to search for B-roll from the stock library? Yes. In the B-roll panel, click **Or add B-roll manually**, then click **Search stock footage** and type in a keyword to pull the perfect B-roll clips from the stock library. ### Can I move or extend/trim B-roll? You are also able to move B-roll on the timeline by clicking-and-holding it and moving it wherever you please on the timeline. Furthermore, you can also extend (image B-roll only) or trim B-roll as per your preferences. # AI Emojis/Keywords Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/ai-emojis-keywords OpusClip uses AI to automatically add relevant emojis to your subtitles. ## How to turn on AI emojis? You can click into **"AI Enhance"** from right sidebar and toggle on **"AI Emoji"** feature. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0409-11.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=909d971a374f90070dbaea32063053e2) ## How to edit emojis? You can click a word and then select **Emoji** option from the dropdown list of **Add**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0409-01.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=398445f56462ba55536019e29ff97089) # AI Voiceover Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/ai-voiceover [**New Editing Feature: Add AI Voiceovers!**](https://opusclip.canny.io/changelog/new-editing-feature-add-ai-voiceovers) \*\* **Exciting News, AI Voiceovers are now available to all users and now accessible via the right-hand side within the editor!** \*\* ## What is the AI Voiceover feature? Enhance your videos with AI-driven voiceovers that bring your text to life! Our product, similar to 'Text-to-Speech' (TTS) technology, uses AI to instantly convert written words into spoken language. While our voices are optimized for English, they've also been shown to work effectively with other languages, including Italian, Portuguese, and Spanish. ## What value can I get from the AI Voiceover feature? Any common use cases? AI voiceovers open up a world of possibilities for enhancing your videos. Whether you're looking to strengthen the hook (by changing or adding it), breathe life into silent or dull moments in a clip, or layer commentary over existing audio, AI voiceovers offer the perfect solution! ## Where can I generate AI Voiceovers from? There are two main ways to generate AI Voiceovers. 1. The **first way** is to go within the editor and click on **"AI hook"** within the right hand side menu. 1. Then type in the script you would like the AI Voiceover to read 2. (Optional) Select the Speaker's Voice 3. (Optional) Change the Tone Stability or original audio volume 4. Click on **"Generate AI hook"** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0409-09.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=014d69f39e6bd13339c5e6502bac1e40) 2. The **second way** is to click on the "AI hook" button via the results page. However, this feature is still under testing so more information on this will be coming soon! ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0409-10.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=5333cc931c2d3cdfd6481646db477be8) ## How many voices can I choose from? You have 20+ AI Voices to choose from, and all these voices can be sampled using the play icon on the left of their name before using them. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/ai-voiceover-3-f.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=85720a1137e3e99a05f0ff47ff2cb71d) ## Can I change the original video audio in case I want AI Voiceovers to be more prevalent? Yes, the original video audio and the AI voice tone are adjustable via sliders! ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/ai-voiceover-4-f.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=7c8896c6fb6c40f39aaa791bec26da3a) ## Can I edit, move or delete the AI Voiceovers once created? Yes, AI Voiceovers can be edited, moved, and deleted within the Editor. To do so, simply click on the AI Voiceover at the bottom of the video, and you will be able to delete it (or move it across the timeline as you please) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/ai-voiceover-5-f.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=eeaa5340c9e9b6b5f617c70ca686705b) So, once you generate an AI Voiceover, you can easily move it on the timeline by clicking and dragging it to your desired position. You can also delete or edit any voiceovers you have created as you please. > [!WARNING] > > You may be limited to creating new AI Voiceovers if there are overlapping AI Voiceovers or if there is not enough space on the timeline. ## Which OpusClip plans are able to use the AI Voiceovers feature? Currently, the AI Voiceover feature is not limited to any plans, so all users are able to access it. However, in the future it is likely that only Pro users will have extended functionality of the feature. ## How many AI Voiceovers can I generate? At the moment, you are limited to 20 voiceovers per day since this feature is in Beta. This limit will be revisited once this feature is settled in. ## How many characters can I generate via the AI Voiceovers? The Beta limit is 2000 characters per AI Voiceover generation. ## Is there a Feature Demo? See below! ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/ai-voiceover-6.gif?s=ca12cfe6370e19065a5ce0b57c152aad) # Android App Supported & Unsupported Features Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/android-app-supported-unsupported-features The OpusClip Android app brings AI video clipping to your phone. Here's a clear picture of what's available now and what's coming in future updates. > [!NOTE] > > Available on **Android 12+** via Google Play in the US, UK, Canada, Australia, Germany, France, Spain, and Brazil. English only at launch. ## Which features are available on the Android App? ### Login & Signup * Sign in with **Google** or **Email** * Projects created on the web sync automatically to the app ### Import * **YouTube URL:** Paste any YouTube link to start clipping * **Local upload:** Upload videos directly from your device gallery or local files The following are not available yet: * **Google Drive Import:** Not supported on Android * **Auto Import:** Not supported on Android ### Clipping & Output * AI clipping with **Virality Score** (0–99), scored on Hook, Flow, and Trend * Clip settings: video length, clip length, clipping mode, aspect ratio, and caption preset * **Animated captions** at 97%+ accuracy * **AI Reframe** for 9:16, 1:1, 4:5, and 16:9 * Download to phone or share to social in one tap * **Watermark removal** (Pro) ### Account Page From the Account page you can: * Manage personal account settings * Submit a **Feature Request** * Access **Get Support** * View the **OpusClip WebApp** link — for a more advanced editing and publishing experience, use OpusClip on the web ## Current limitations on Android App ### Editing & Customization The Android app does not include an editor at this time. The following are not available yet: * Manual / transcript editor * AI enhancements, B-Roll, and Image overlay * Brand Templates For full editing, please log in to OpusClip via a desktop browser. ### Other current limitations * **Social Media Scheduling:** Direct posting and scheduling is not available yet. Use the web version for scheduling and posting. * **Storage & Auto Save:** Cloud storage and auto-save settings are not supported yet. You can manage these from the web version. * **Push Notifications:** Not available at launch — check back in the app manually when your clips are ready. * **Billing:** All upgrades use **Google Play Billing** only. There is no "upgrade on web" option on Android. * **Language:** English only at launch. More languages are coming in a future update. ### We're Improving > [!TIP] > > The Android app launched in June 2026 with core clipping features — and more is on the way! We're actively working to expand the Android app. The editor, scheduler, bulk download, push notifications, localization and more are planned for future updates. Want to share feedback? Use the **Feature Request** option in the app's Account page — we read everything. # API Requests Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/api-requests API access is available on **Pro (Beta)**, **Max**, and **Business** plans. See [Limitations](https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/limitation) for plan-specific limits, or for more information, view our full [API documentation](https://help.opus.pro/api-reference/overview). # Can I Use Apple Pay to Purchase a Plan? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/apple-pay Yes, if you're using a supported device, browser, and region, you can use Apple Pay to pay for your subscription plan. Here's what you need to know: ## Supported Browsers & System | Browser | System | Apple Pay Support | | - | - | - | | Safari | iOS 10+ macOS Sierra+ | ✅ supported | | Chrome / Firefox / Edge | iOS 16+ | ✅ supported | ## Supported Regions * Apple Pay checkout is available worldwide, except India. * Recurring payments with Apple Pay are supported, except in India and Mexico. If you meet these conditions, you’ll be able to complete your purchase with Apple Pay. # Adjust Layout Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/apply-the-layouts ## Adjust Layout To change a clip's layout, click **Layout** at the top and select one. Your layout is applied wherever it fits. ### Change the layout of a segment To relayout a single scene, select it from the timeline, then right-click the canvas or open the **Layout** dropdown and choose a layout. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/KPZfitdFkt_kwa4N/images/imgs/apply-the-layouts-1.gif?s=9b2e3dc4ac93d858c251dcb655b78a35) ### Change the layout of a B-roll segment Segments with B-roll unlock extra framing options. Select the B-roll clip on the timeline, then right-click the canvas or open the **Layout** dropdown to pick a framing: * **Fill** (default) fills the screen * **Picture-in-Picture (PIP)** keeps your speaker in a small window over the B-roll * **Split** stacks the speaker and B-roll top and bottom (not supported for 16:9) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/sNFa6xRy0hcq2gSN/images/imgs/apply-the-layouts-broll-framing.gif?s=33c767fbca11a6a9ab6ebaaed9d4713c) #### One B-roll per segment for Picture-in-Picture Picture-in-Picture only applies to **one B-roll at a time**. If a segment contains two B-rolls, split it into separate segments on the timeline first — then apply Picture-in-Picture to each segment individually. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/sNFa6xRy0hcq2gSN/images/imgs/apply-the-layouts-broll-pip-note.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=sNFa6xRy0hcq2gSN\&q=85\&s=9a5a7a79c850482b1730622ba3579e59) ## Set default layout You can customize your layout preferences using the brand template and apply them to your entire project before submitting it. To get started, navigate to the brand template tab and create a new template. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/KPZfitdFkt_kwa4N/images/imgs/apply-the-layouts-3.gif?s=e6a3f45cc1b8aa975bbe511c98f3c233) # Apply to Become an Affiliate! Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/apply-to-become-an-affiliate Yes! You can apply to our affiliate program here: [https://www.opus.pro/affiliate](https://www.opus.pro/affiliate) # Fix lighting and color with Auto color correction Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/auto-color-correction Auto color correction makes poorly lit footage look professionally graded. OpusClip analyzes your video and fixes white balance, brightness, and contrast, so you get publish-ready color without touching a single slider. It's free to use. 💡 **Image placeholder:** Side-by-side before/after of a talking-head video with Auto color correction applied. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/g8919QwxPEAh1dXJ/images/imgs/auto-color-correction-before-after.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=g8919QwxPEAh1dXJ\&q=85\&s=9cffe64b3aa884f1dd94d6e7d09d850a) # Before you start * **Plans:** Available on Trial, Pro, Max, and Business plans. * **Cost:** 1 credit. * **Best results:** Talking-head videos with dim, uneven, or off-color lighting. # Turn on Auto color correction You can turn it on in three places: when you set up your Recipe workflow, in the editor sidebar, or above the preview in the editor. ## When you set up your workflow 1. Upload your video and choose **Auto Edit** or **"Get clips in 1 click"**. 2. In the workflow settings, turn on **Auto color correction**. 3. Start processing. Every video or clip from this workflow gets color corrected. 💡 **Image placeholder:** Workflow settings with the Auto color correction toggle highlighted. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/g8919QwxPEAh1dXJ/images/imgs/auto-color-correction-workflow-settings.gif?s=99c8d7987341975dde3b806182bc3580) ## In the editor sidebar 1. Open your video or clip in the editor. 2. In the right sidebar, click **AI enhance**. 3. Turn on **Auto color correction**. 💡 **Image placeholder:** Editor AI enhance panel with the Auto color correction toggle. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/g8919QwxPEAh1dXJ/images/imgs/auto-color-correction-editor-ai-enhance.gif?s=a911a86873906770f6996b61e6dfae8d) # Adjust the intensity If the result looks too strong, dial it back for a more natural look. 1. In the editor, click **AI enhance**. 2. Under **Auto color correction**, drag the **Intensity** slider. The default is 100%. 3. Preview your video and adjust until you're happy with it. 💡 **Image placeholder:** Intensity slider under Auto color correction. You can also adjust the intensity directly from the editor preview: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/g8919QwxPEAh1dXJ/images/imgs/auto-color-correction-intensity.gif?s=365f6f8955b7a3d856ad4899cf3cdde4) # FAQ **Does Auto color correction use credits?** It costs 1 credit. **What does Auto color correction change?** It balances white balance, brightness, and contrast so skin tones look natural and the scene looks evenly lit. It doesn't apply a stylized filter. **Why didn't my video improve much?** Auto color correction works best on clear footage with fixable lighting. Results may be limited on blurry video or footage with extreme contrast, like a bright window behind a dark subject. **Can I undo it?** Yes. Turn off **Auto color correction** in **AI enhance** or above the preview at any time to restore your original colors. # Auto headline Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/auto-headline ## What is Auto headline (text overlay)? Auto headline (previously called Auto hook or Auto Text Overlay Hook) automatically generates a short, one-line text overlay that appears at the beginning of your clip. The headline is designed to: * Provide instant context to viewers * Capture attention in the opening seconds * Improve short-form retention and engagement When enabled, OpusClip applies the headline to the **top 10 generated clips** in your project. ## How It Works 1. You can enable **Auto headline** from multiple places: the **Submit Panel** when uploading, the **editor**, and your **auto-import** settings. It's turned on by default for manual uploads and off by default for auto-imported videos. 2. OpusClip analyzes your content and generates a one-line text overlay headline. 3. The headline is automatically added to the beginning of each of the top 10 clips. You can also pick a new style for it in the editor. 4. You can review the clips on the **Results Page** as usual. 5. We also provide a notice banner at the top of this page to quickly disable it. If you click "disable", the auto text will be disabled, and you can enable it again when submitting the project. The next **five projects you submit** will also display a reminder banner related to Auto headline. When uploading, you can toggle **Auto headline** directly in the submit panel: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/UzlpvyEyqCr5kMUa/images/imgs/auto-headline-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=UzlpvyEyqCr5kMUa\&q=85\&s=85d5d51af233c6a9234d3b01e940280d) On the **Results Page**, a banner lets you disable the headline or refine it further: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/UzlpvyEyqCr5kMUa/images/imgs/auto-headline-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=UzlpvyEyqCr5kMUa\&q=85\&s=492b056988d4b9011dcfee47b0052858) ## Style Your Headline with Brand Templates You can customize how the Auto headline looks — **font, size, weight, font color, word background color, corner radius, and text box width** — in the **Auto headline** section of your Brand Template. The style is saved once and applied automatically to all clips generated with that template. See [How to add a Brand Template](/docs/article/how-to-add-a-brand-template) for details. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/UzlpvyEyqCr5kMUa/images/imgs/brand-template-auto-headline.gif?s=b9dfed15ed0303ae3625fe20c0f0f06e) ## Auto headline with Auto Import Auto headline now works with [Auto Import](/docs/article/auto-import). Turn it on in your auto-import / playlist settings, and the Auto headline style from your Brand Template is applied automatically to clips generated from your imported videos. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/UzlpvyEyqCr5kMUa/images/imgs/auto-headline-auto-import.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=UzlpvyEyqCr5kMUa\&q=85\&s=60b8c730f7da676fe01ceb6e42e57e87) > [!NOTE] > > Auto headline is not applied to videos brought in through Zapier. ## Turning Auto headline On or Off * Disable: If you turn off the Auto headline toggle before submitting, none of the generated clips will include the headline. * Re-enable: You can turn the toggle back on when submitting a new project. # Auto Import Your Latest YouTube Videos Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/auto-import ## What is Auto Import? Auto Import lets **Pro** and **Starter** users **automatically process** their latest public YouTube videos into clips. No more manual uploads — just log into OpusClip, and your videos are **already imported and ready to use.** ## How to Set Up Auto Import 1. Go to My projects. 2. Click the "**Auto Import**" button on the right-hand side. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/601o3PmyOVRsxAzz/images/imgs/auto-import-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=601o3PmyOVRsxAzz\&q=85\&s=2ed45365a218481cd4587c5df89513d4) 3. Sign in with your YouTube/Google account and grant OpusClip permission to connect to your youtube channel. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/auto-import-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=4b2a0eaf899b7f6825274955209c6f14) > [!NOTE] > > If you have already connected to your YouTube channel from the scheduling feature, you can enable auto import without having to re-connect your channel again. 4. Once connected, OpusClip will check for new videos and process them based on your chosen settings. You can choose to have OpusClip pull all your new (longer than 3minutes) public videos, or pull only from specific public playlists: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/auto-import-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=5e1e11b380ef790df28590453ce83ca7) ## Processing Options **✔ Notify me via Email (Manual Processing)** * OpusClip will send you an email when a new video is detected. * You can manually decide whether you want to clip the video. **✔ Auto create projects (Automatic Processing)** * OpusClip will **automatically process your new videos** using your saved clip settings. * No need to log in or start processing manually—your videos will be ready when you open OpusClip. * Credits will be deducted based the full video length. > [!NOTE] > > You can change your processing preference and clip settings anytime in **My projects > Auto Import**. ## How to Manage Auto Import Settings You can update or disable Auto Import at any time by going to **My projects -> Auto Import**: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/auto-import-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=b6a83de946b6f40c04d798959fecd73d) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/auto-import-5.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=c3b21d9bd2e5202acde5c49192786786) * **Switch between Manual** (Email Reminder) **and Auto Processing** * **Reauthorize your channel** if you have not used OpusClip and the youtube connection is lost * **Re-enable Auto Import** by following the setup steps above again * **Manage your connections** to toggle between channels you want OpusClip to pull from * **Specify playlists** to pull from by selecting "From specific playlists". ## How to manage clip settings? * You can pre-select your preferred clip length and presets/template for each video detected * We will use your last-used model for clipping (ClipAnything or ClipBasic) to process your videos. * **Auto headline**: Enable Auto headline in your Auto Import / playlist settings to automatically add the headline to clips created from imported videos. The headline uses the style set in your [Brand Template](/docs/article/how-to-add-a-brand-template). Learn more in [Auto headline](/docs/article/auto-headline). ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/UzlpvyEyqCr5kMUa/images/imgs/auto-import-6.gif?s=5ef39b2e01f6c186dd2be8c5a0905278) ## When will my video be processed by OpusClip? * We will check if new videos are available **every hour**. Please allow some time for YouTube to finish processing your video and bring your video to the highest resolution. > [!WARNING] > > If you submit your video link to OpusClip before Auto Import detects it (e.g. between the regular checks), we will not auto create the same video again. ## What types of videos will Auto Import detect? * Auto Import will only detect **your own public YouTube videos** that are **longer than 3 minutes, uploaded after your Auto Import set up** * Private or unlisted videos will not be imported. * Shorts and livestream videos will not be imported. * If you have **specified playlist(s)** for OpusClip to pull from, only qualifying videos in the playlist(s) will be processed. > [!NOTE] > > With **playlist selection**, you can control exactly **which videos** get imported, giving you more flexibility and better control over how your credits are spent. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/auto-import-7.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=59566849fcf2eefe018e01787e986069) ## Will Auto Import work on older videos? * Auto Import currently only detects newly uploaded videos after you link your channel. * More custom Auto Import options will be coming soon! ## Why did my Auto Import fail? * Your auto import may fail due to a few reasons: * If you have downgraded to a Free plan * If there isn't enough credits on your account to process the next video * If we have lost access to your YouTube authorization due to inactivity # Add sound effects automatically with Auto SFX Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/auto-sfx Sound design can make the difference between a flat clip and one that stops the scroll. Auto SFX watches your video, detects key moments, and places production-quality sound effects on your timeline automatically — no editing experience needed. ## How to apply auto SFX ### From the recipe page Turn on Auto SFX in your recipe to apply it once, or save it to a custom recipe to apply it automatically every time. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/Ampo3Fel6awlejmS/images/imgs/auto-sfx-recipe-page.jpg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=Ampo3Fel6awlejmS\&q=85\&s=35d94d57b27f10990e1daefb9191fd42) ### From the editor 1. Open a clip in the editor and click **AI enhance** in the right sidebar, then click **Auto sound effects**. You can also click **Audio** in the right sidebar and open the **Sound effects** tab. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/Ampo3Fel6awlejmS/images/imgs/auto-sfx-editor-audio-menu.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=Ampo3Fel6awlejmS\&q=85\&s=111e641f3e344265384693fb117449e8) 2. Click **Add sound effects**. The number of credits it uses is shown on the button. It takes about 30 seconds for most clips. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/Ampo3Fel6awlejmS/images/imgs/auto-sfx-add-sound-effects.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=Ampo3Fel6awlejmS\&q=85\&s=7b2ec43cd061f76e7d7b6cc9e5e63bba) 3. Your sound effects appear on the timeline and in the **Sound effects** tab. Click any sound in the list to play your clip from just before it. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/Ampo3Fel6awlejmS/images/imgs/auto-sfx-timeline.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=Ampo3Fel6awlejmS\&q=85\&s=1c356863754119d4eb5555adfeb040ca) If your clip doesn't need any sound effects, for example a music video, you'll see **No sound effects needed for this clip**, and you won't be charged. ## Edit your sound effects Every sound effect is a block on your timeline. You can: * **Move** a sound by dragging it * **Change its volume** by clicking it * **Split** or **delete** a sound like any other block ## How many credits does Auto SFX use? 7 credits per minute of clip, rounded up to the next minute. You will not be charged if Auto SFX fails or doesn't add any sounds. ## Plan availability | Plan | Auto SFX | | - | - | | Free | — | | Starter | — | | Pro | ✅ | | Max | ✅ | | Business | ✅ | | Enterprise | ✅ | Auto SFX is also available during a free trial. ## FAQ **How long does it take?** About 30 seconds for most clips. Longer videos take longer. **What kinds of sounds does it add?** OpusClip adds sounds for transitions, impacts, UI moments, reactions and more, matched to your video's content and tone. Every sound comes from a curated library, so it sounds clean and consistent. **Why didn't Auto SFX add a sound where I expected one?** Auto SFX only adds a sound where it fits the moment, and skips some to keep your clip from feeling cluttered. **Can I undo the sound effects?** Yes. Delete any sound on the timeline without affecting the rest. To run Auto SFX again, delete all of its sounds, then click **Add sound effects**. Each run uses credits. **Why do the sounds sound different from before?** Auto SFX used to generate each sound with AI. It now picks sounds from a curated library, so they're cleaner and timed more precisely. **Does Auto SFX work in any language?** Yes. Auto SFX looks at what happens on screen as well as what's said, so it works with any language. **Is there a length limit?** No. Longer videos take longer to process and use more credits. **Will this change my original video?** No. Sound effects are added to the clip you're editing and can be removed at any time. Your original upload stays unchanged. **Why do the sounds sound different from before?** Auto SFX used to generate each sound with AI. It now picks sounds from a curated library, so they're cleaner and timed more precisely. **Does Auto SFX work in any language?** Yes. Auto SFX looks at what happens on screen as well as what's said, so it works with any language. **Is there a length limit?** No. Longer videos take longer to process and use more credits. **Will this change my original video?** No. Sound effects are added to the clip you're editing and can be removed at any time. Your original upload stays unchanged. # Brand Vocabulary Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/brand-vocabulary ## How to Ensure Proper Nouns, Brand Vocabulary and Key Terms Are Accurately Transcribed? OpusClip provides a suite of features to ensure proper nouns, brand vocabulary and key terms are consistently and accurately transcribed in a clip or across all clips. Here's how to use them based on your needs: 1. Correcting terms in a clip: * Double-click on the word you want to correct in the editor. * Update the word as needed. * Click **Apply to all** to automatically fix all instances of the word in the clip. * You can also add the corrected word to your brand vocabulary by checking the **"Add to brand vocabulary"** checkbox. By doing so, all new clips will automatically transcribe this word correctly. <video type="video/mp4" /> 2. Correcting terms across all projects: * Go to Asset Library * Under **'Brand Vocabulary'**, click on **'Add proper nouns'** * Type in the term/name you want to add to your vocabulary and click 'Enter'. You can add multiple terms. * Once you've added all your terms, click on **'Add to Brand Vocabulary'** * All new clips going forward will transcribe the terms you added correctly (You'll need to reprocess your existing clips you created earlier to apply this change) <video type="video/mp4" /> # Bulk Download Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/bulk-download With the **Pro** plan, you can download multiple clips at once. Here’s how: 1. **Navigate to your project**: Open your projects' results page. 2. **Select Clips**: * Click on "**Select**" in the top right corner of the results page ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-download-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=6288f26fc1a82b54f2b84e7ce02fb585) * Check the box next to each clip to make your selection or use **Select all** to choose all clips at once. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/nfs8k7joMOwNh3iE/images/imgs/screenshot0413-02.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=nfs8k7joMOwNh3iE\&q=85\&s=1665457e333dd1664d41e94fd512a897) 3. **Download**: Click the **Bulk Download** button to start bulk downloading. 4. **Upgrade if needed**: If you're prompted to upgrade, just follow the instructions to switch to the Pro plan. **Troubleshooting**: * **Download Issues**: Refresh the page and try again. For persistent issues, contact support. * **Partial Downloads**: If your network connection drops, the download stops and shows a message with a **Retry** button. Check your connection, then click **Retry**. Retry downloads only the clips that are missing. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/YnYy3RjPlLu_ESnH/images/imgs/bulk-download-partial-retry.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=YnYy3RjPlLu_ESnH\&q=85\&s=2e7f0189afe89d256d64e750ba8fb120) Retry progress shows on the Bulk download button. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/YnYy3RjPlLu_ESnH/images/imgs/bulk-download-retry-progress.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=YnYy3RjPlLu_ESnH\&q=85\&s=57c9589cb9a539ec2227194cb443a98c) * **Browser prompt**: Your browser can ask for permission to download multiple files. Click **Allow**, then check that all files were saved. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/YnYy3RjPlLu_ESnH/images/imgs/bulk-download-browser-prompt.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=YnYy3RjPlLu_ESnH\&q=85\&s=b0e7439b0ef4dff8abf86ed0701abe12) # Bulk Scheduler Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/bulk-scheduler You can now bulk schedule your clips directly from the results page. 1. **Navigate to your project**: Open your projects' results page. 2. **Select Clips**: * Click on "**Select**" in the top right corner of the results page. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=71c705c6298c7a379a35d51b81197732) OR * Click on the **calendar icon** for a given clip and then click on "**Bulk Schedule**" ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=58aab94b68b724a635a68137516ae88c) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=1a96d5b542a7f40ffdaefdd5d2e701fc) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=97a39b065e8edee4ffe094bb61a9fa7c) 3. Check the box next to each clip to make your selection or use "**Select all**" to choose all clips at once ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-5.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=8f5e0f3dd3269240cb025321676d51fb) 4. After choosing your clip, click on "**Bulk Schedule**" in the top right corner ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-6.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=7e67490f832615b97a43db56ad9cdc64) 5. **Configure your scheduling**: After selecting your clips, you'll now set when and how they will be published in bulk. This step defines the **posting order, start time, and frequency** — our AI will handle the rest. * **Arrange the clip order**: Manually assign the order: Click on the number next to each clip and enter its position in the posting sequence (e.g., 1 for the first clip, 2 for the second). > [!NOTE] > > This number determines the exact order in which your clips will be published. For example: A clip marked "1" will go out first, a clip marked "2" will be posted next, and so on. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-7.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=cdede66cc1ea93d85ce12857b6d22fd3) * **Set time & frequency**: * Pick the date and time you want the first clip (order 1) to be published. * Click of "**Frequency**" to define how often you want each clip to be published after the first one. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-8.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=2986241fbfc281127ca6deb953d9da41) 6. Our AI will automatically create: * **Engaging descriptions** * **Relevant hashtags** 7. **Check schedule**: You can **preview times and edit captions**. Once you're happy with the order, start time, and frequency, click the “**Schedule**” button. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-9.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=2a74f85a09306f5029b5155fe8cc2413) 8. All your selected clips will now be **scheduled for automatic posting** in the order and timing you configured. To **review or make changes**: * Head to the **Calendar page** (accessible via the **left-hand thumbnail sidebar**). ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-10.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=252e8e6c9b27e08f187fb283b454d983) * There, you can **view all scheduled posts, adjust posting times, reschedule or delete** any clip individually. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/bulk-scheduler-11.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=bdcbea18afc5e6e877f44ee6f5e8d09d) # FAQ ## Who can use the Bulk Scheduling feature? This feature is **available exclusively to Pro users**. If you're on a Free, Trial or Starter plan you'll need to upgrade to access bulk scheduling. ## Which platforms are supported? Currently, **Bulk Scheduling is only available for YouTube**. Support for additional platforms is coming soon! ## Does bulk scheduling to X use credits? Yes. Each clip you schedule to X uses 3 credits per X account. For example, scheduling 10 clips to one X account uses 30 credits. You'll see the total at the bottom of the scheduling window before you confirm. ## How does the posting frequency work? You set a **fixed interval** (e.g., 2 hours , 4 hours, or daily), and clips will be scheduled **one after the other** based on the order you defined. * The system follows your selected time interval **exactly**. * **It does not skip weekends, holidays, or “ideal” posting times**. * Example: If you schedule 5 clips and your first post starts at **Monday 9:00 AM** with a **2-hour interval**, the next clips will post at **10:00 AM (clip 2)**, **12:00 PM (clip 3)**, **2:00 PM (clip 4)**, **4:00 PM (clip 5)** — even across weekends or nights. ## Can I change the schedule after I’ve set it? Yes. After scheduling, go to the **Calendar page** (via the left-hand sidebar) to: * View your scheduled posts * **Edit posting times** * Reschedule or delete individual clips ## Can I schedule the same clip to post on multiple days? Yes. However, each clip can be scheduled **once per session**. If you’d like to repost the same clip, you need to schedule it again. ## Can I bulk schedule to multiple platforms at once? Not yet. At this time, **bulk scheduling supports YouTube only**. Posting to additional platforms is coming soon. ## Can I pause or cancel a scheduled post? Yes. Visit the **Calendar page** (via the left-hand sidebar), find the clip, and: * **Edit the time** * **Delete the scheduled post** * (Coming soon: pause/resume features) ## How many clips can I schedule at once? There's no hard limit for Pro users. ## Do scheduled clips auto-publish even if I close the app? Yes! Once scheduled, your clips will continue to be posted automatically — even if you close the browser, log out, or if your subscription expires. # Can I Buy Just Extra Minutes or Extra Seats? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/can-i-buy-extra-minutes-extra-seats At this time, you cannot buy only extra minutes or just extra seats for your team. You can purchase additional packs which will grant you additional processing minutes to use for the remaining billing period. You can purchase additional packs on your [Subscription page](https://clip.opus.pro/subscription). # Can I change my login email? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/can-i-change-my-email Yes! If you'd like to change your login email, please reach out to our Support Team by clicking **Get Support** in the bottom right of your Dashboard. Click "Send us a message" and follow the choices to submit a ticket to change your login email and one of our agents will assist you. # Can I customize the crop ratio? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/can-i-customize-crop-ratio To customize your video's crop ratio, click the "**Crop**" icon or double-click the video to open the **Manual Reframe** window in editor. From there, you can adjust the framing by dragging the four corners or edges as needed. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/customizecropratio.gif?s=510a4ef35b54cb8e03b5a0dddacb1b8f) # Rearrange Scenes in the Timeline Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/can-i-drag-rearrange-sections-timeline In the **timeline editor**, you can easily rearrange your clips by **dragging and dropping sections** to your desired order. <video type="video/mp4" /> # Can I Pause My Active Subscription? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/can-i-pause-my-active-subscription You may find yourself needing to take a break from OpusClip and would like to pause your subscription. Unfortunately, at this time we do not offer the choice to pause your subscription. However, you are able to cancel your subscription and resubscribe with a new subscription when you are ready to come back! If you need assistance cancelling your subscription, check out this article [here](/docs/article/plans-and-credits#how-do-i-cancel-or-downgrade-my-subscription)! # Refunding a Project Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/can-i-reprocess-a-project If you're a **Pro user** and haven't downloaded any clips yet, you can refund your project by clicking the **three-dot menu (⋯)** in the top right of the clip preview page. Just select **Refund this project**, provide feedback in the popup window, and you're set! Your credits will be refunded, allowing you to re-upload your video. However, once you've downloaded a clip, refunding is no longer available. > [!NOTE] > > You will be able to refund your project up to 14 days after the initial upload. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/DPP3TtZc0uGVhiHL/images/imgs/refund-this-project.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=DPP3TtZc0uGVhiHL\&q=85\&s=fb1d3f777154cb47c0ceb4b915cb6e6b) # Can I transfer my credits to others? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/can-transfer-credits Although, you can't transfer credits directly, you can get started with sharing your credits by simply adding your teammates to a workspace. Team Workspaces allow you to share credits, videos, and brand templates within your team. For more information about Team Workspaces, check out our FAQ [here](./6219255-team-management)! # Captions & Emojis Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/captions-and-emojis ## How to edit captions / add emojis? To edit captions, select a specific word/sentence and then click the "**Edit**" button. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/captions-emojis-1.gif?s=563f43f5bb2ecb32ca51fe14bdecce58) You can also double-click a word and add an emoji to it by clicking the "**Emoji**" button. Please ensure you turn on AI emoji on the AI enhance module. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/captions-emojis-2.gif?s=e4b4930d4716a5241dbf5a1bb52132c4) ## Can I adjust the timestamps of captions? Absolutely, you can. Simply review the time range of the word you wish to adjust, click on the word to select timing, and then modify the specified timestamp using the handle. > [!NOTE] > > The time range of each word and sentence has a maximum range, which cannot be exceeded. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/captions-emojis-3.gif?s=3c7cf517417dd854c2cb199222e326d7) ## Can I add missing captions? Of course! Click to edit the word preceding the missing content, then input the missing words. The system will automatically adjust the timestamps for each word. If further timestamp adjustments are needed, you can make those changes after adding the words. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/captions-emojis-4.gif?s=2e5ece47f6266c67dacb78eef9fcdab7) ## How can I change the position of the captions? You can change the position of the captions directly on the canvas. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/captions-emojis-5.gif?s=6fad827ace253fe5e50da7f0d41b0034) ## Can I change the caption fonts and color? Yes you can! To do so, go to the right sidebar, and then click the "Captions" tab where you can find the fonts section. You can change font style, size, color, stroke, shadow, and case. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/captions-emojis-6.gif?s=30c0c32d8bc392bf51b9997090d280cb) ## Can I remove filler words and pauses? Yes, for sure! We've upgraded Speech Cleanup to detect over 90% of filler words with full control over what gets removed. To get started, click **Speech Cleanup** in the top left of the editor and select **Remove filler words** or **Remove pauses**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/3PvGRyfxZITi1nlS/images/imgs/captions-emojis-cleanup.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=3PvGRyfxZITi1nlS\&q=85\&s=03a1b4daf833117f80902fcabc3af128) ## Can I select and edit more than just one word? Absolutely! You can select multiple words, phrases, and even entire sentences at once. Simply click into the editing box to correct and make changes to them. You have the option to correct, remove captions only, or delete both the captions and the video for the selected words. ## How to trim or remove unwanted sentences from clips? You can trim unwanted sentences/footage in two methods: * Method 1: Select the section you want to remove from the text and click "Delete." * Method 2: Drag the beginning and end of selected segment in the timeline editor to trim it. # Change or Remove Captions Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/change-captions ## How to edit captions? To edit captions, select a specific word/sentence and then click the **Edit** button. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/change-captions-1.gif?s=3c9ad3acfa682800646cc90a6d13e9bd) ## How can I change captions position? You can change the caption position as you like in Brand tab of editing page. ## Can I change the caption fonts and color? Yes you can! To do so, simply go to the editing page, and then click the “Captions” tab where you can find fonts section. You can change font style/size/color/stroke/shadow, and uppercase/lowercase all texts. ## Truncated words show in two lines in my captions Please use a smaller font if your captions get truncated. ## How can I fix it when some captions are not being added? You can manually add missing/fix incorrect captions by clicking on the word in the Captions Editor, and type your corrections into the script. ## Can I select and edit more than just one word? Absolutely! You can select multiple words, phrases, and even entire sentences at once. Simply enter the editing box to correct and make changes to them. You have the option to correct, remove captions only, or delete both the captions and the video for the selected words. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/change-captions-2.gif?s=4c73fe535120c3a7c44d64f019a379c5) ## How to trim or remove unwanted sentences from clips? You can trim unwanted sentences/footage in two methods: * Method 1: Select the section you want to remove from the text and click **Delete**. * Method 2: Drag the beginning and end of selected segment in the timeline editor to trim it. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/change-captions-3.gif?s=b20d8fc9a1a0c56ea91138e758011f96) ## Move Caption Position You can now **drag and reposition captions anywhere** on the main canvas in the editor! <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Add a new section to your clip To refine your hook, extend your clip, or add a section from another part of your video, click **Add a Section** at the start or end of the transcript. Then, select the desired section from the full transcript and click **Add**. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## How to remove captions completely? * **For new projects (prevent captions from generating)** The easiest way to avoid captions is to set up a no-caption **brand template** prior to submitting a project: 1. Go to **Brand Template** and create a new template 2. Turn off the captions toggle in the template settings 3. Select this template when submitting a new project This prevents captions from being generated entirely, so you won't need to click into each clip to remove caption manually afterward. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4ZRlq1HDQ_JdUDlE/images/imgs/no-caption-template.gif?s=0e5fe031640c6ae5d873fb46f1480e73) * **For existing projects** If your clips have already been generated with captions, you'll need to turn off caption for each clip individually in the editor. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/change-captions-6.gif?s=95490545cb29c42a267f54a8f7615440) > [!TIP] > > Please note that we currently do not have a **bulk caption edit** feature. Each clip must be edited individually. * **For hardcoded captions**: If the captions are already hardcoded (burned into the video itself), there unfortunately isn't a way for OpusClip to remove them. The only way to avoid those captions would be to use a version of the source video that doesn't have captions burned in. # ClipAnything Prompts Manual Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clip-anything-prompt-manual A prompt is a text phrase that the ClipAnything AI interprets to clip your videos. You can type your prompt to find a scene, action, character, event, emotional moment, social-worthy topic, and more. A well-crafted prompt can help our AI find the exact moments you want from your original video. # Use prompts to... ✅ **Find a moment/scene** * Examples * Find the moments most likely to go viral on social media * Show me moments with strong opinions or words * Give me the part where Patrick Mahomes throws a 3-yard touchdown * Find me the most hilarious part of Snoop Dogg narrating Animal Planet **✅ Find action** * Examples * Show me the host unboxing a new tech gadget and explaining its features * Show me the jaguar killing the snake * Find the moment of Will Smith smacking Chris Rock **✅ Find emotion** * Examples * Clip my exciting reactions to tasting shawarma * Find all the laughing scenes * Find the moments when the two actors argue and one of them cries **✅ Find a character** * Examples * Find Spiderman * Find Emma Stone walking down the red carpet **✅ Find several moments for a compilation** * Examples * Compile all Man City's scoring * Find all the scenes with laughter A prompt tells ClipAnything which moments to find, and each moment can come back as its own clip. To put several parts of the original video into one clip, open the clip in the editor, click **Add a Section** at the start or end of the transcript, and pick a time range from the original video. # Do not use prompts to... **❌ Edit the visual or audio aspects of the video** * Examples * Remove the flickering * Clean up the audio * Change aspect ratio to 9:16 * Add emojis * Add transition * Focus on the screenshare and what's on the screen Do it in the brand template, or in the editing page after the clip is generated. **❌ Control clip length** * Examples * Separate videos from 30 seconds to 1 minute with subtitles * Turn this into a ten minute video? Do it in submission box: select preferred "Clip Length" **❌ Apply a cinematic effect to the video** * Examples * Add the fade transition at the end of the clip * Add a lens flare effect at the beginning of the clip # Prompting guidelines ## **Use clear wording** Try to be clear about any context or details that are important to you. Think about: * **Subject**: *person, animal, character, location, object* * **Visual**: the women in yellow dress, * **Action**: *Patrick Mahomes throws a touchdown, the host reviews the product* * **Sentiment**: *happy, laugh, excited, cry, sad, surprise, angry* * **Sound**: Audience cheering, door open, dog bark, *vehicle horn* **❌ Do not use descriptions that are too vague** * Examples * Create videos * For Instagram stories * Do it **❌ Do not use random input** * Examples * jfgx * n/a **❌ Do not write prompt in non-English language** ## **Focus on what you want** It is better to focus on finding moments in the video that you want, instead of what you don’t want. # ClipAnything FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa * [What can I use ClipAnything for?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-1) * [What is the difference between ClipAnything vs. ClipBasic?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-2) * [What is the limitation during ClipAnything Beta testing period?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-3) * [How long does it take to process the clips with ClipAnything model?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-4) * [What is a narrative template? How will it affect clip results?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-7) * [How to use prompts to instruct ClipAnything to find what I want?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-8) * [Can I reprompt and regenerate clips from the same video?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-9) * [Why did the ClipAnything model fail to find what I was looking for?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-10) * [What does scene analysis mean?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-11) * [How can I easily navigate one clip through all generated clips?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-12) * [Can I view clip results in chronological order?](/docs/article/clipanything-qa-13) # What can I use ClipAnything for? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-1 You can use ClipAnything to **clip any type of video**, and create various content types. * **Find a specific moment** * Type your prompt to find a scene, action, character, event, emotional moment, social-worthy topic, and more. * **Create a teaser** * Create an engaging teaser to direct more traffic to your original video. * **Clip non-talking videos** * Our powerful visual, audio, and sentiment understanding makes it possible to clip videos with little to no dialogue. Here are more use cases based on different content types and professions. We hope you find them inspiring! * `Producer` [Create a teaser for the 2022 Oscar featuring Will Smith smacking Chris Rock](https://www.opus.pro/demo/producer) * `Social media manager` [Give me the moments most likely to go viral on social media](https://www.opus.pro/demo/social-media-manager) * `Red carpet` [Find the red carpet moments of Emma Stone](https://www.opus.pro/demo/red-carpet) * `Podcaster` [Find the most social-worthy Q\&A](https://www.opus.pro/demo/podcaster) * `News editor` [Give me Mark Zuckerberg's complete opening statement at the senate hearing](https://www.opus.pro/demo/news) * `Sports` [Give me a Lionel Messi goal](https://www.opus.pro/demo/sports) * `Food vlogger` [Clip my exciting reactions to tasting shawarma](https://www.opus.pro/demo/food-vlogger) * `Gamer` [Give me the scene where the player kills the enemy with a stone](https://www.opus.pro/demo/gamer) * `Vlogger` [Create a summarization of all the steps James Hobson takes to create and test the bionic arm](https://www.opus.pro/demo/vlogger) * `Animation` [Find moments that are most likely to attract kid viewers](https://www.opus.pro/demo/animation) * `Music` [Find me the hook and chorus](https://www.opus.pro/demo/music) # Why did the ClipAnything model fail to find what I was looking for? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-10 The ClipAnything model is currently in beta. We are working hard to improve its accuracy, and we greatly value your feedback. If you are not satisfied with a clip, please share your insights by clicking the **thumbs down button** next to the clip. Improving your prompt input can also help the ClipAnything AI model better understand and deliver what you're looking for. [Learn more to improve your prompt](./clip-anything-prompt-manual). Please note that the model may not return results for videos that lack audio or have minimal visual activity, such as static scenes. While the AI is optimized to detect key moments with sound or visual changes, support for silent and low-activity videos is planned for future releases. # What does scene analysis mean? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-11 Scene analysis breaks down a short video into individual scenes to understand and interpret their components and elements, using our advanced multimodal AI. This feature helps you easily understand and interpret key elements of a short video, similar to reading a film script. It includes a talking transcript, timestamps referencing the original video, visual summaries, emotional sentiment analysis, and more. This empowers creators to quickly gain deep insights into their video content and make more informed decisions. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-94.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=0de2d81432282c14117d1cb34182e696) # How can I easily navigate one clip through all generated clips? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-12 Our advanced AI automatically extracts relevant tags based on your video content, preset settings, and prompt input. These tags help you easily filter and navigate through your generated clips. Simply click **the filter icon** at the top of your results to refine and view clips according to the available tags. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-130.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=27539cc0ca928f6b8ba7e0f0a120237d) # Can I view clip results in chronological order? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-13 Yes! You can customize the order of your results by switching the sorting rule from **Virality Score** to **Chronological** at the top of the results page. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-131.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=49f62380338d295f88bf01752d4db1ba) # What is the difference between ClipAnything vs. ClipBasic? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-2 ClipAnything surpasses ClipBasic in all aspects, specifically: | | **ClipAnything** | **ClipBasic** | | - | - | - | | **Video type supported** | Extending beyond just talking-head videos, ClipAnything can clip any type of video, including but not limited to vlogs, sports, TV shows, behind-the-scenes, news, music, and videos with little to no dialogue. | Can only clip talking-head videos well. | | **User Prompt** | Users can use natural language prompts (whether sentences or keywords) to find any scene, action, character, event, emotional moment, viral topic, and more. To learn more about prompts, please visit the ClipAnything Prompts Manual. | Users can only write prompts using keywords mentioned in the original video. | | **Visual understanding** | Analyze and understand everything on screen, including but not limited to: <ul><li>**Objects**: Characters, animals, items</li><li>**Colors**: Yellow flowers, a girl in a purple dress</li><li>**Actions**: Patrick Mahomes throwing a touchdown, a host reviewing a product</li><li>**Text/Overlays**: Scoreboards, name cards, logo</li></ul> | Limited capability that only understands speaker positions. | | **Audio understanding** | Extending beyond understanding conversations, ClipAnything: <ul><li>Accurately identifies which speaker is talking.</li><li>Understands a wide range of sounds, including but not limited to:</li><ul><li>**Emotional Sounds**: Laughter, cheering, shouting, arguing</li><li>**Environmental Sounds**: Bird chirping</li><li>**Sound Effects**: Glass shattering, car honking</li><li>**Others**: Music and more</li></ul></ul> | Relies solely on the transcript to understand spoken words. | | **Sentiment analysis** | Powerful sentiment analysis that understands a range of emotions, such as happiness, joy, sorrow, surprise, sadness, couple arguing, and more. | No sentiment analysis. | | **Narratives** | Narratives refer to the storylines or the structured progression of events that are conveyed through the video. ClipAnything has a rich narrative library in collaboration with award-winning producers, applying the best narratives to your clips based on your video genre. | No narratives. | | **Reasoning** | ClipAnything excels in video scene analysis, seamlessly integrating text, voice, emotion, and visuals for comprehensive understanding. It performs deep, multimodal reasoning to infer meaning and intent from diverse data. ClipAnything not only understands in-scene content but also excels at cross-scene analysis, providing insights with remarkable depth and clarity. | No reasoning capabilities. | # How long does it take to process the clips with ClipAnything model? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-4 The processing time depends on the length of your raw video, typically taking around 20-40 minutes. However, it may be longer as many creators are using the service right now. We appreciate your patience. # What is a narrative template? How will it affect clip results? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-7 The narrative template specifies the storytelling structure you want the ClipAnything model to follow for generating a short clip. All suitable narrative templates are selected by default. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-129.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=13b398361e5242d92e3f886ea7f2deb7) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-93.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=83610c2bf9f94a5139cdf84d3e777d02) # How to use prompts to instruct ClipAnything to find what I want? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-8 You can prompt for specific moments in two ways: 1. During the project submission page. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/clipanything-qa8-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=0be82cb35ac3c85113c18174c842778f) 2. After your project has been completed on the project result page. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/clipanything-qa8-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=28662f82feee64816b49c56c687aa07e) In the prompt input box, you'd be able to find a scene, action, character, event, emotional moment, social-worthy topic, and more. A well-crafted prompt can help our AI find the exact moments you want from your original video. Example: 'Find the goal scored by the player in black shirt' or 'Compile all the hilarious moments'. To learn more about prompts and its best practices, please go to [ClipAnything Prompts Manual](https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clip-anything-prompt-manual). # Can I reprompt and regenerate clips from the same video? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/clipanything-qa-9 Yes! You can submit new prompts on the project result page if you have another idea or want to test out a new prompt to regenerate more clips. New prompts will be displayed on top of the original clips, and can be easily accessed by pressing the tab titled with your prompt. For now, you may only submit one prompt at a time. As we are working on supporting more prompts, we encourage you to provide feedback by clicking the **Thumbs Down** button next to the clips you are not satisfied with. > [!TIP] > > Reprompting is available across all your projects. Previously limited to ClipAnything, it now works in ClipBasic projects too. # Cloud Storage Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/cloud-storage # What is Cloud Storage used for? OpusClip provides flexible storage and upload options based on your subscription plan: * **Only Pro plan users** can save projects permanently to cloud storage. * **Free trial users** can upload assets to the cloud, but cannot save projects. * **Free and Starter plan users** must **upgrade to Pro** to upload assets or save projects. # How much cloud storage do I get? All Pro plan users have access to **100 GB of cloud storage**, shared between uploaded assets and saved projects. > [!NOTE] > > Need more storage? Contact our Sales Team to learn more about the Enterprise Plan and customized storage options. # What happens when I upgrade or downgrade my plan? ## Uploaded Assets * **Downgrading to Free or Starter plan**: uploaded assets will be immediately removed from your asset library. Any clips using these assets will display them as "missing media" in the editor. * **Upgrading to Pro plan**: previously uploaded assets will be automatically restored and reappear in your asset library. ## Saved Projects * **Downgrading to Free or Starter plan**: saved projects will be **immediately removed** from cloud storage. These projects will follow the expiration policy based on their original creation date and your new plan's limits. * **Upgrading to Pro plan**: Projects from previous plans will **not be automatically saved** to cloud storage. You'll need to **manually re-save** each project if you'd like to store them permanently. (learn more: [Saving your projects](/docs/article/saving-your-projects)) # Collections Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/collections ## What are Collections? Collections let you organize your favorite clips by campaign, client, series, or any theme that makes sense for your workflow. Instead of scrolling through all your clips, group the ones that matter together and find them in seconds. Collections are available on **Trial, Pro, Max, and Business** plans. ## How to Create a Collection There are two ways to create a new collection: 1. **From the My projects page** — create an empty collection from the Collections tab. 2. **From the project result page** — create a collection on the fly while adding a clip to it. > [!TIP] > > Collection names can be up to **40 characters**, and each workspace supports up to **200 collections**. ### Option 1: From My Projects page 1. Go to **My projects** → **Collections** tab. 2. Click the **Add new collection** cell. 3. Enter a name in the **"Create a new collection:"** dialog and click **Confirm**. <video type="video/mp4" /> ### Option 2: From project result page You can also create a collection while browsing your clips: 1. Open a clip from any project result page. 2. Click the **Add to collection** icon (folder icon, top-left of the clip). 3. Click **+ Create a collection** at the bottom of the dialog. 4. Enter a name and click **Confirm**. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## How to Add Clips to a Collection 1. Open a clip from your project result page. 2. Click the **Add to collection** icon. 3. Select one or more collections from the list and click **Add**. <video type="video/mp4" /> > [!NOTE] > > Every workspace comes with a **Favorites** collection by default — a quick way to bookmark clips you want to come back to. > [!NOTE] > > You can also search collections by name using **OmniSearch → Collections** tab. Learn more in [OpusSearch](/docs/article/opussearch). # Connecting Your Instagram Professional Account (Business or Creator accounts) Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/connecting-your-instagram-account Instagram offers three profile types: Personal, Business, and Creator. All Instagram accounts start off as Personal by default, but you can convert a Personal or Creator profile to a Business profile at any time. Due to limitations from Instagram, **you can only connect Business and Creator profiles to OpusClip**. ## How to Check Your Instagram Account Type 1. Open the Instagram app and go to your profile. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/connecting-your-instagram-account-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=974d0f0c490f1bbe4d03fdd2a4e2c9f4) 2. Tap the Edit profile in the top-right corner. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/connecting-your-instagram-account-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=87b307b3f0273b0f162129ca86252086) 3. At the bottom of the menu, look for one of the following: * **Business tools and controls** = Business account * **Account type and tools** = Personal account * **Creator tools and controls** = Creator account In the case below, it's a creator account. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/connecting-your-instagram-account-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=163f64ce8c429b961105d925b7f3163e) ## Convert to a Professional Account (Business or Creator) 1. Select **Switch to professional account**. 2. Note: If you see **business tools and controls** instead, your account is already professional. Try reconnecting or refreshing your Instagram channel in OpusClip. 3. Tap **Continue** and follow prompts until you reach **Category Selection**. Choose a category. 4. Select **Business** or **Creator** to complete the setup. ## Connect your Instagram accounts You can connect your Instagram accounts in two ways: 1. **Directly connect to Instagram** <video type="video/mp4" /> 2. **Connect Instagram through Facebook** > [!NOTE] > > **Before you start:** > > * Link your Instagram account to a Facebook Page. [Learn how to connect your Instagram account to a Facebook Page](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/connect-instagram-to-page) > * Sign in with the Facebook account managing that page. Go to **Add account** → **Instagram**, then click **Connect Instagram through Facebook**. * You can click **Continue** to finish the connection in one click. <video type="video/mp4" /> * You can also choose the **Pages**, **Businesses**, and **Instagram accounts** you want OpusClip to access. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## If You Have Multiple Instagram Accounts Linked to Facebook If you have multiple Instagram accounts linked to the same Facebook account, you may run into issues when connecting your Instagram account to OpusClip via Facebook login. This is a known limitation with how Facebook handles multi-account authentication. **Workaround:** Use your Instagram username and password directly 1. In OpusClip, go to **Add Social Accounts** and select **Instagram** 2. When Instagram's login screen appears, entering the credentials for the **specific Instagram business/creator account** you want to connect 3. Click the **Log in** button — the blue button **NOTE:** Please avoid clicking **"Log in with Facebook"** on this Instagram login screen Once logged in, complete the connection flow as normal. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/3cIuTb-OBpdvsogC/images/imgs/multi-ins-workaround.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=3cIuTb-OBpdvsogC\&q=85\&s=0db3b626c89ec3369cd9ad7b17fb024b) ## Need More Help? [Learn about what is a professional account from Instagram](https://help.instagram.com/138925576505882/?helpref=related_articles) [How to set up a creator account on Instagram](https://help.instagram.com/2358103564437429?helpref=faq_content) [Set up a business account on Instagram](https://help.instagram.com/502981923235522?helpref=faq_content) # Connecting Your YouTube Channel Account Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/connecting-youtube-channel-account With the largest global audience of any video platform, YouTube delivers unmatched reach across desktop and mobile. Maximize your impact on this powerhouse platform using OpusClip's **YouTube Shorts scheduling** and **content planning tools** to grow your audience efficiently. ## Getting Started 1. **Set Up a YouTube Channel** * A YouTube channel is separate from your Google Account. * Don’t have one yet? Check out [how to create a YouTube channel here](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/1646861?hl=en). 2. **Connect Your Channel to OpusClip** * **Pro users** can connect to **multiple YouTube channels**. * *Before connecting*: * Log into the **Google Account that owns your YouTube channel** in a separate browser tab. * This ensures OpusClip accesses the correct channel. > [!WARNING] > > **Important Notice**: > > Due to YouTube’s API restrictions: > > * **You must log in with the <ins>Google Account that owns the YouTube channel</ins>** to connect it to OpusClip. > * **Unfortunately, we are NOT able to connect to a YouTube channel if you are set as a manager of the brand account**. ## Troubleshooting Access Issues 1. Log out of all other Google Accounts in your browser. 2. **Only log into the Google Account that <ins>owns your YouTube channel</ins>** before connecting to OpusClip. 3. Confirm ownership in [YouTube Studio](https://studio.youtube.com/channel/) under **Permissions** (Settings > Permissions). ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/connecting-youtube-channel-account-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=1f0c2745982229e7487d4df44d2487de) Still stuck? Please contact Support if you believe you're the owner but are encountering errors. # Can I upload copyrighted content to OpusClip? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/copyright-content-policy According to the [Terms of Service](https://www.opus.pro/terms-of-service), you are fully responsible for using OpusClip in a lawful manner. You are only allowed to upload content that you have the right to use. This includes content owned and created by you, as well as content that you do not own but you have the license to use, for example: * You have purchased or otherwise obtained permission or license from the copyright owner to use the content * The content is distributed to you under an open source or creative commons license * You are using the content in a manner consistent with [Fair Use Doctrine](https://www.copyright.gov/fair-use/) Any content owned by the user remains under the ownership of the user after being uploaded to OpusClip. > [!WARNING] > > It is against our Terms of Service to violate someone else's copyright while using OpusClip. Your violating clips may be subject to a [DMCA takedown notice](https://www.opus.pro/terms-of-service#:~:text=and%20without%20notice.-,Notice%20and%20Takedown,-In%20accordance%20with) or other enforcement action. # Create and Save a Custom Recipe Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/create-and-save-a-custom-recipe Save the edits you use together as a custom Recipe, then apply the same setup to your next video. ## How do I create my own Recipe? 1. On **Dashboard**, click "See all Recipes" to open **Manage Recipes**. 2. Click **Create new Recipe**. 3. Give it a name you can recognize. 4. Configure your Recipe: 1. choose a **Brand kit,** or select **No brand kit.** 2. select the edits you want to apply 3. adjust the options for each edit 5. Save your Recipe. Your saved Recipe appears under **My custom Recipes**. You can save a Recipe without submitting a video. ## How do I save changes to a built-in Recipe? 1. Open any built-in Recipe, such as **Clip long video** or **Captions**. 2. Change the settings you want to customize. 3. Click **Save** next to **Save your Recipe updates?**. 4. Name and save as your custom Recipe. This creates your own Recipe. It doesn't replace the built-in one. ## How do I update an existing custom Recipe? 1. Open your custom Recipe and adjust its settings. 2. Click **Save** on the top right corner. 3. Choose whether to update the current Recipe or save the settings as a new custom Recipe. ## Do I have to save before I create a video? No. You can change settings for one video and click **Create** without saving them to a Recipe. For a custom Recipe, those changes apply to that run. Save them if you want the Recipe to use them next time. ## What does a custom Recipe save? Your Recipe saves: * The output aspect ratio * Which edits are on or off, including **Clipping, Captions, B-roll type, speech cleanup**, etc. * Options for the selected edits, such as **custom prompt**, caption styles, B-roll type, and hook type * Your Brand Kit selection, including **No brand kit** When a Brand Kit is selected, it controls the styles it defines, such as caption and headline styles. Edit those styles in the Brand Kit, or choose **No brand kit** to choose them on the Recipe page. ## Can I save a Recipe from the Editor? Not yet. Create and save Recipes from Dashboard or Recipe page. Changes made while editing a clip can't currently be saved as a Recipe. ## Related articles * [How to Use Recipes](/docs/article/how-to-use-recipes) * [Edit, Rename, Duplicate, or Delete a Recipe](/docs/article/edit-rename-duplicate-or-delete-a-recipe) * [How Do Recipes and Brand Kit Work Together?](/docs/article/how-do-recipes-and-brand-kit-work-together) # Create Zaps with Google Drive Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/create-zaps-google-drive On Zapier, by connecting OpusClip (V3.0.0 or above) with Google Drive, you can set up automated workflows (Zaps) that make your video editing process effortless: * **Auto Import**: Whenever you upload video files to a Google Drive folder, they can be automatically imported into OpusClip to create projects. * **Auto Export**: Once a project is completed, the results are automatically exported back to Google Drive. The outputs can be **clips, videos with captions**, or **transcripts**. # Auto Import files from Google Drive > [!TIP] > > Start with a Zap template: [Clip video for new file in Google Drive](https://zapier.com/shared/c200c01bd5a272e3cbf84001270a72e52155c96d) ## Notes * **File size limit on Zapier**: 953 MB. (If your video is larger than this , it cannot be processed through Zapier. You'll need to [upload the video directly to OpusClip](https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/local-file-uploads#local-file-uploads), where larger files are supported.) * **Supported formats via Zapier**: mp4, mkv, webm ## Steps 1. Choose **Google Drive** as the trigger app. 2. Select **“New File in Folder”** as the trigger event, which means every time you upload a new video to a specific Google Drive folder, the Zap will start. 3. Add **OpusClip** as the action app * Select **"Clip Your Video"** as the action * choose **"/File"from Google Drive** as the video source ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/pZO-VeWniPd9Es82/images/imgs/create-zaps-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=pZO-VeWniPd9Es82\&q=85\&s=e07480f3fba040e1e5feded43f2a27d0) With this setup, Zapier will automatically send the video file from Google Drive into OpusClip to start a new clipping project. # Auto Export to Google Drive ## Start with a Zap template: > [!TIP] > > [Save clips to Google Drive (recommended)](https://zapier.com/shared/51904467c2bcf64edbf540cc796707c65d38f694) > [!TIP] > > [Save clips to Google Drive in a zip file](https://zapier.com/shared/save-clips-to-google-drive-in-a-zip-file/d43fba7b6308343a4c20672f2c1a5144fb7fad6c) ## Notes * Exporting all clips in a single zip file may create very large files, which can cause Zapier to time out * To ensure smooth exports, we recommend exporting clips one by one ## Steps 1. Choose **OpusClip** as the trigger app, select **“New Project Completed”** as the trigger event, which means whenever a project in OpusClip finishes processing, the Zap will start. 2. Add a **Looping by Zapier** step after the trigger. In the **“Values to Loop”** field, select the **array of “/Clips files”** returned by OpusClip. 3. Inside the loop, add **Google Drive** as the action app * Select **“Upload File”** as the action. * Map the current **looping item** (the single clip file) as the file to upload. * Choose the destination folder where the clips should be saved. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/pZO-VeWniPd9Es82/images/imgs/create-zaps-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=pZO-VeWniPd9Es82\&q=85\&s=4f0a712a7599c6c185da0cd57823ffa9) With this setup, Zapier will automatically send the completed project results from OpusClip into your chosen Google Drive folder, making it easy to centralize and share your outputs. # How to Confirm My OpusClip Version? This feature is only available on OpusClip V3.0.0 or later. You can check your current version as shown in the image below. If your version is **lower than V3.0.0**, simply add OpusClip again in Zapier to update to the latest version. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/pZO-VeWniPd9Es82/images/imgs/create-zaps-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=pZO-VeWniPd9Es82\&q=85\&s=beccbf3e9cd2036b54229f6e0038d4e9) # Add Logo and Custom Fonts Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/custom-fonts ## Upload logo To upload your logo or a overlay, you can either click **Upload** and upload your asset, or click **Brand Template** and select a Template which contains your logo or overlay. ## How do I add a custom font? Pro plan users can add custom or brand fonts for captions. ### How to add custom fonts to a clip 1. Click **Captions** in the editor and go to **Font** tab, select **Custom fonts** from the dropdown list. You'll be taken to your Asset Library. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0408-08.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=6cd6873df9373ecda702ffe98dee8d38) 2. Here, Pro plan users can upload up to 2 fonts. Currently OTF and TTF font formats are supported. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-79.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=80d66f610c08443f9314509d919213de) 3. Once uploaded your font will be available in the editor. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0408-09.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=e03afc8f9ad33fc91918bd06ee1d51f8) ### How to add custom fonts to a brand template 1. Navigate to your **Brand Templates** and click the add custom font button in your brand template. You'll be taken to your **Asset Library**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-81.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=0f5f11bbf4948b6e4f115c06181638f9) 2. Pro plan users can upload up to 2 fonts. Currently OTF and TTF font formats are supported. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-82.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=33d602f19d469fb696cb2f37dcf76370) 3. Once uploaded your font will be available to add to your **Brand Template**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-83.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=b30b6d1055ab81a44e2d95c4d5eb445d) 4. Make sure to save your changes! ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-84.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=1351e1d7ec8671d858b377a72a00e70f) ### How do I manage uploaded fonts? You can manage your custom fonts in the **Asset Library**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/snapshot-85.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=e6aa65d8e99d836e033a81c42e1bb3e4) ### How many custom fonts can I upload? Pro plan users can upload 2 custom fonts. # How do you handle customer data from the European Union (EU) or United Kingdom (UK)? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/customer-data-eu-uk We have certified with the U.S. Department of Commerce that we comply with the [EU-US Data Privacy Framework (DPF)](https://www.dataprivacyframework.gov/) and adhere to the DPF Principles, which includes standards for transferring customer data from the EU to US, where our business is located. # If I delete a project, will my credits be refunded for that project? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/delete-project-refund Unfortunately, when you delete a project, any credits that were allocated or used on that project will not be refunded or added back to your OpusClip account. This policy ensures fair use of resources and encourages careful planning and management of projects. # Delete a Project Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/deleting-a-project ## How Can I Delete a Project? If you need to delete an unwanted project from your OpusClip account, you can do so by navigating to My projects page. You can click [here](https://clip.opus.pro/projects) to get to it faster! Once you're on My projects page. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN/images/imgs/delete-project-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN\&q=85\&s=8a322fea5c9ca26a6e8748e9a6179bb4) From there, hover and click onto to the 3 dot icon and a popup should open giving you the option to delete. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN/images/imgs/delete-project-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN\&q=85\&s=5354115c1f668419be053da9968749b1) # How can I delete my OpusClip account? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/deleting-your-opusclip-account If you are looking to delete your account: 1. Click on the profile button in the upper left corner of your dashboard. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/E5CHuP0nQqSWNXnX/images/imgs/deleting-your-opusclip-account-1.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=E5CHuP0nQqSWNXnX\&q=85\&s=4cbc2ed445865786a63535b31d98709f) 2. Select your account. Then you will see your profile page. You will see a **Delete account** button at the bottom of the page. 3. Click the **Delete account** button, and confirm each item on the checklist. Then you will be able to delete your account. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/E5CHuP0nQqSWNXnX/images/imgs/deleting-your-opusclip-account-3.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=E5CHuP0nQqSWNXnX\&q=85\&s=b70953e2dee5be104b32cc535df7cc9f) 4. After you delete your account, you will be asked to fill out a survey. We won't collect any personal information for this survey. > [!WARNING] > > Please ensure you do not have an active subscription currently tied to the account or else it will prevent the team from deleting the account. Need help finding out how to cancel your subscription? [Check out this article here on how to do so!](/docs/article/downgrading-and-cancelling) # Does OpusClip Have a Mobile Editor App? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/does-opusclip-have-a-mobile-app **Yes! OpusClip is now available on iOS.** You can download our mobile app directly from the App Store to easily clip and share videos anytime, anywhere. We're actively developing more features for the mobile experience. Stay tuned for upcoming updates! If there's anything you'd love to see in the app, please feel free to [share your suggestions](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests) with us. # Support for Hindi Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/does-opusclip-support-hindi OpusClip does not support Hindi at this time. Thank you for your understanding! # Does OpusClip support languages that read right to left? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/does-opusclip-support-languages-right-left Unfortunately, we do not support any languages that read right to left, including Hebrew, Kurdish, Arabic or Persian. If you are interested in OpusClip supporting these languages, please feel free to provide your feedback [here](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests). # Download and Post in 4K Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/download-and-post-in-4k If you upload a 4K video, OpusClip can export and post your clips in full 4K quality—preserving every detail from your original footage. 4K export is not upscaling—it only activates when your source video is genuinely 4K (3840 × 2160). ## Where to find it ### Downloading in 4K You can download in 4K from four places: hover over a clip on the results page, use bulk download to export multiple clips at once, open the clip detail view, or click **Export** in the editor. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/mwDcpcStVuxTqRQ-/images/imgs/download-post-4k-download-locations.gif?s=de94d47b6e592aac66c52ae5ad66a44f) ### Post or schedule in 4K When posting or scheduling, OpusClip automatically uses the 4K asset if available. No extra steps needed—your post goes out in 4K quality. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/mwDcpcStVuxTqRQ-/images/imgs/download-post-4k-schedule.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=mwDcpcStVuxTqRQ-\&q=85\&s=395ec9911ea5aae0447bfdd3f6af3fa2) ## Platform availability | Plan | 4K export | 4K schedule and post | | - | - | - | | Free | ❌ | ❌ | | Starter | ❌ | ❌ | | Pro | ✅ | ❌ | | Enterprise | ✅ | ✅ | ## FAQ ### Does 4K work for all social platforms? OpusClip sends the 4K asset, but the final quality displayed depends on each platform's own limits. # Download Transcripts & Subtitles of Your Original Video Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/download-transcripts-subtitles Pro plan users can download transcripts & subtitles of your original videos directly from the result page and My projects. ## How to Download? There are two ways to download your transcript or subtitle file. 1. **From the Result page** * Go to your project result page * Click the '**More**' menu, and you will see 2 options * **Download Transcript** * **Download Subtitles** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/transcripts-subtitles-1.gif?s=2ec66086a17fb9cb6522e593c5757720) 2. **From My projects** * Go to My projects and select a project. * You can click '**More**' to download your subtitles or transcript. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/oWEVw980xqYtwsEc/images/imgs/transcripts-subtitles-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=oWEVw980xqYtwsEc\&q=85\&s=d5170fd780ce56832d2dca67caa43df8) ## What Format Is Supported? * **Download Transcript** → .txt file * **Download Subtitles** → .srt file (subtitle format compatible with YouTube and other video platforms) # Duplicate Clips Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/duplicate-clips Duplicating a clip lets you create an independent copy to experiment with — test different edits, repurpose for different platforms, or try new styles without touching the original. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/Sv-l-6BS2_DCmlj_/images/imgs/duplicate-clips.gif?s=ebac785099421c264fc8dcd617840547) ## How to duplicate a clip 1. Open any project and click on any clip to open the preview. 2. Click **Duplicate** in the bottom right corner. 3. A copy will appear in your results with all settings carried over — aspect ratio, captions, effects, and more. ## FAQ ### Does editing the duplicate affect the original? No — the duplicate is fully independent. Any changes you make to it will never affect the original. ### Who can use this feature? Duplicate is available to all users on all plans. # Edit, Rename, Duplicate, or Delete a Recipe Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/edit-rename-duplicate-or-delete-a-recipe Manage your saved Recipes from **Home → See all Recipes → Manage Recipes → My custom Recipes**. ## How do I edit a Recipe? 1. Find your custom Recipe and open its **•••** menu. 2. Select **Edit**. 3. Adjust the Recipe settings. 4. Save the changes to the current Recipe, or save them as a new Recipe to keep both versions. ## How do I rename a Recipe? 1. Open the **•••** menu on your custom Recipe. 2. Select **Rename**. 3. Enter the new name and confirm the change. ## How do I duplicate a Recipe? Open the **•••** menu on your custom Recipe and select **Duplicate**. Use the copy to make another version of your setup. For example, keep one Recipe for captioned clips and another that also adds B-roll. ## How do I delete a Recipe? Open the **•••** menu on your custom Recipe and select **Delete**. Follow the on-screen prompt to finish. ## Can I change a built-in Recipe? You can adjust its settings for a video and save your version as a custom Recipe. You can't overwrite or delete the built-in Recipe itself. ## Related articles * [Create and Save a Custom Recipe](/docs/article/create-and-save-a-custom-recipe) * [How to Use Recipes](/docs/article/how-to-use-recipes) # Editor Browser Use FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/editor-browser-use-faq ## Is there a recommended browser for using the editor? Yes, we strongly recommend using Google Chrome for the best experience. ## Can I use Safari browser? While we don't fully endorse Safari, versions 18.2 and above may encounter data loss or crashes. We have not found a solution in the short term, so for your data safety, we strongly suggest switching to Google Chrome. # Editor Loading is Stuck Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/editor-loading-stuck Sorry for any inconvenience this may cause. Please follow these instructions to troubleshoot: 1. Click the **three dots** in the top right corner of your Google Chrome browser. 2. Go to **Settings**. 3. Search for **acceleration**. 4. Enable **Use graphics acceleration when available**, then click **Relaunch**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/editor-loading.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=bcc86218fab449ef7f20a727277b0596) # Email Login Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/email-login ## Can I login with an email account? Yes, we allow users to login with email accounts from any email provider, except spam email addresses. ## What if I want to login through email verification instead of SSO login? We provide login options via Google, Apple, Facebook, and email. If you created your account using Google, you can add an email login method to it, using the same email address associated with your Google account. Here's how: 1. Log out of your account created with Google. 2. Log back in using the same email address associated with your Google account. 3. You will receive a verification code via email; use this code to log in. Moving forward, your team members can log in to OpusClip directly using this email address and the verification code sent to it. # Email Notification Settings Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/email-notification-settings You may manage your email notifications or opt out of emails by clicking this [link](https://clip.opus.pro/email-preferences). # I am a customer from the European Union (EU). How should I handle Value-Added Tax (VAT)? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/eu-vat Opusclip does not directly bill European Union (EU) customers for Value-Added Tax (VAT) on the invoice. Instead, if the customer is subject to EU VAT, the customer should use the [reverse charge mechanism](https://vatdesk.eu/en/reverse-charge-mechanism/) to stay compliant with their local tax codes and regulations. # How to Use Eye Contact Correction Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/eye-contact-correction # Eye Contact Correction **Subtitle:** Eye Contact redirects your gaze to the camera, only on the shots where the correction looks natural. ## How to use Eye Contact Correction? **From the recipe page** Turn on **Eye contact correction** in your recipe to apply it once, or save it to a custom recipe to apply it automatically every time. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/AAknihRV5eBLLjoN/images/imgs/eye-contact-correction-recipe-page.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=AAknihRV5eBLLjoN\&q=85\&s=80f3b042bd9ac5bbfbe17a6ef1c6ffa3) **From the clips page** Click Eye contact correction next to any clip to correct the speaker’s gaze. You’ll land in the editor with Eye contact correction already applied. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/AAknihRV5eBLLjoN/images/imgs/eye-contact-correction-clips-grid-view.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=AAknihRV5eBLLjoN\&q=85\&s=248aa32e79d43e34a584c2087bfb4dd8) *In Grid view, hover over the scissor icon to find "Eye contact correction"* ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/AAknihRV5eBLLjoN/images/imgs/eye-contact-correction-clips-list-view.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=AAknihRV5eBLLjoN\&q=85\&s=0b31d42b055414a2b3abe096447d3ba5) *In List view, hover over the "AI tools" button to find "Eye contact correction"* ### From the editor 1. Go to the right sidebar and locate **AI enhance** 2. Toggle on **Eye contact Correction**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/AAknihRV5eBLLjoN/images/imgs/eye-contact-correction-editor-ai-enhance.gif?s=8fc8c4ef592ddb5a5d4a36fe7c460dd6) 3. Our AI analyzes your clip and corrects the shots that need it. Corrected parts appear as **Eye contact correction** segments on the timeline. ## Which shots does Eye Contact Correction correct? Eye Contact Correction only corrects shots where your face points toward the camera and your eyes drift slightly, like glancing down at a script. It skips shots where a correction would look unnatural, such as head turns or looking away on purpose. If there's nothing to correct, you'll see **No segments needed correction**. ## Can I edit the corrections? Yes. On the timeline, you can: * **Remove** a correction by selecting an **Eye contact** segment and deleting it * **Extend or trim** a correction by dragging either edge of the segment * **Add** a correction by clicking **Add more manually** in the **AI enhance** panel, then selecting the part of the timeline you want corrected ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/AAknihRV5eBLLjoN/images/imgs/eye-contact-correction-timeline-edit.gif?s=a5e96fad9e25c66ec23e552e4b14aaa1) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/AAknihRV5eBLLjoN/images/imgs/eye-contact-correction-add-manually.gif?s=c063c2191ed55ad4ade0e856065f04f6) To remove all corrections, toggle **Eye contact correction** off. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/AAknihRV5eBLLjoN/images/imgs/eye-contact-correction-remove-all.gif?s=985d339cdb04f0128cf492784409aa0c) ## Which layouts are supported? Eye Contact Correction works with the **Fill** and **Split** layouts. ## Can I use Eye Contact from the results page? Yes. Click **AI tools** next to any clip, then select **Eye contact**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/AAknihRV5eBLLjoN/images/imgs/eye-contact-correction-results-page.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=AAknihRV5eBLLjoN\&q=85\&s=93121431d19eb0eb8a55755474558dd4) ## Who can use Eye Contact? | Plan | Auto Zoom | | - | - | | Free | ❌ | | Starter | ❌ | | Pro | ✅ | | Max | ✅ | | Business | ✅ | ## FAQ **Why didn't Eye Contact Correction correct a shot where I'm looking away?** Eye Contact Correction only corrects small eye movements while your face points toward the camera. Head turns, looking far off-camera, and quick eye movements are skipped, so the result doesn't look unnatural. To correct a skipped shot, click **Add more manually**. **Why do I see "No segments needed correction"?** Eye Contact Correction didn't find any shots it could correct naturally. This is common when your face is small in the frame or turned away, or when speakers look at each other on purpose, like in an interview. **Does Eye Contact Correction work if there's more than one person in the frame?** Only in the Split layout, where each person has their own half. If two or more people share the same frame, Eye Contact can't correct it yet. **Will Eye Contact Correction change my original video?** No. Corrections apply only to the clip you're editing. Your original upload stays unchanged. **Does Eye Contact Correction work in any language?** Yes. Eye Contact looks at your face, not your speech, so it works in any language. **Are corrections kept when I export?** Yes. Every eye contact correction segment on your timeline is included when you download or publish your clip. **Can I use Eye Contact in the mobile app?** No, Eye Contact Correction is not available in the mobile app so far. **Can I use Eye Contact Correction in the the MCP plugin?** Yes. # FAQs Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/faqs ## How many languages does OpusClip support? Our product currently supports English, German, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Russian, Polish, Indonesian, Ukrainian, Swedish, Turkish, Norwegian, Croatian, Romanian, Slovak, Greek, Danish, Malay, and Finnish videos at the moment. We will be supporting more languages in the future! If you have any language requests, feel free to let us know. ## Why did my task fail or processing for a long time? Sometimes our service will face huge workload and projects may be delayed. To ensure your best experience, we will automatically return your credits for the project if the processing takes more than 90 minutes, but still produce clips for that project anyways. We also return credits for all failed projects. Possible reasons for failed projects include: * Not able to render enough clips. * Not able to render any clips. * Not enough words detected. You can check it in your credit history to make sure that the credits are not deducted for such projects. # Feature Requests & Feedback Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/feature-requests-feedback Regarding submitting feature requests/feedback. ## How do I submit a product feature request? Click [here](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests) to visit our Product Roadmap. We prioritize feature requests with the most upvotes onto our roadmap, and will notify you once the feature you requested or supported is under review/planned/completed! ## Will I be notified about my product feature request? Yes, you will be notified once your request has been reviewed, planned, and completed. # Features Not Included in the Free Trial Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/features-not-included-free-trial Free Trial is designed to give every new user a chance to experience all core Pro features. However, due to product stability, resource limitations, and security considerations, a few Pro features are currently not available to trial users. Here is a list of Pro-only features not included in the Free Trial: * Videos exported during the trial will include the OpusClip watermark * Trial users do not have access to the 100GB fixed cloud storage and cannot autosave projects * Trial users cannot download multiple video files in bulk * Trial users cannot have access to the auto censor feature * Trial users cannot post directly to social media or schedule video posts * Trial users cannot create team or access team relevant workspace features * Trial users cannot add Intro and outro cards for clips * Trial users cannot use speech/voice enhancement * Trial users cannot access video analytics * Trial users cannot use speaker-based caption colors to differentiate speakers in their clips * Trial users cannot add transition effects between scenes * Trial users cannot add music from the copyright-free music library or upload their own music * Trial users cannot set a custom thumbnail for their clips * Trial users cannot download or post videos in 4K * Trial users cannot access Seedance 2.0 * Trial users cannot access Custom Style V2 * Trial users cannot reprocess a video to get a credit refund if they are not satisfied with the results # Why aren't filler words like "Um" and "Uh" being recognized? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/filler-word-recognition OpusClip analyzes your captions to identify unnecessary filler words. Currently, it only supports English, but we're working on adding more languages. **Update (Jan 23, 2025):** We're updating our AI Transcription and Filler Word Detection models. During this process, you may notice some filler words being unrecognized. If you encounter any issues, please click the **'Get Support'** button at the bottom right of your dashboard to share your feedback. # My Account Shows as Free But I am Getting Billed Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/free-account-getting-billed Check out this article if you are being billed but you don't believe you have an active Pro or Starter Plan. You may find that you are being charged for a OpusClip Pro or Starter Plan yet your account shows as Free on your subscription dashboard. Before reaching out to the Support Team, please check any potential email addresses of yours that you may have used at the time of sign up. Although you may be billed under one email, your user email address can be a different one! For example, you may have initially signed in and created your OpusClip Account with `loginemail@email.com` and used `billingemail@email.com` for your billing email address. In this case, if you sign into OpusClip with `billingemail@email.com` (the Billing Email Address) you will see it is as a Free Account which can cause confusion. You will need to try and log into `loginemail@email.com` (User Email Address) to see that there is an active subscription you are being charged for. # Get Your Clips FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/get-clips-faq * [Result Page Walkthrough](/docs/article/get-clips-faq-1) * [Why is the Clip Resolution lower than expected?](/docs/article/get-clips-faq-2) * [What is the Virality Score on OpusClip?](/docs/article/virality-score) # Result Page Walkthrough Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/get-clips-faq-1 The result page is where you can refine and export your clips. Here are some tools available on this page: * **AI-Generated Titles and Descriptions:** Instantly get titles and descriptions for your clip that you can use on social platforms. * **Auto-Transcriptions:** Easily transcribe your clips and review the original transcript seamlessly. * **Virality Score:** Our AI generates a score to show you how likely your content is to go viral. * **Powerful Video Editor:** Make final changes to your clip without leaving the app. * **Export Options:** Export your clip in different formats or post directly to social media. * **Project and Clip Management:** Organize and manage your projects and clips for future use. # Export your clips You have the option to export the clips you want to use in various formats. Here are your choices: * Schedule them directly to your social media platforms. * Download the HD version of the clip. * Download as XML files for further editing in DaVinci Resolve or Premiere Pro. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/result-page-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=e1623d736fc4cd66915d9edee539d3ac) # Edit your clips You can edit the clips according to your preference. See more in the **"Edit Your Clips"** section. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/result-page-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=05bb1f7f2e75094a2a58168381ec0384) # Manage your project & clips ## Save your projects For **Pro plan** users, you have the ability to: * Save your projects to cloud storage, ensuring they won't expire and allowing you to edit them indefinitely. > [!WARNING] > > While users can save projects to our servers, as a best practice to prevent data loss, we still suggest saving important projects/clips locally to your computer. ## Like or Dislike clips You can express your preferences by liking or disliking the clips. Disliked clips will be hidden, while liked clips can be easily managed for scheduling and editing. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/result-page-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=3ce314ff179d98bbbd6f8949ad2219b4) ## Sort & Filter clips You can filter clips based on specific criteria. Additionally, you can sort them by score or display them in the chronological order they appear in the original video. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/result-page-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=c44b94366010373381ff94b850c65b69) # Why is my clip resolution low? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/get-clips-faq-2 ## Why is my resolution low? Before we proceed, please ensure the following: 1. Are you viewing preview videos on the results page? These previews are in low resolution. To see them in HD, you need to export the videos. 2. After uploading a video to YouTube, it may take some time before it becomes available in HD, as processing is required. How to check if your YouTube video is in HD: 1. Open **YouTube Studio**. 2. Click into the **Detail Page** of that video 3. You will be able to see the **HD icon** if it's in HD ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/clip-resolution.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=0180db9e0192aac8a9134e3dafbad94d) ## How does OpusClip crop my videos? We won't compress your videos to a lower resolution, but we will crop them. Here's how we determine the output video sizes based on different input sizes: * 4K original video (3840 x 2160) cropped to a 9:16 aspect ratio results in an output of 1215 x 2160. * 1080p original video (1920 x 1080) cropped to a 9:16 aspect ratio results in an output of 608 x 1080. > [!NOTE] > > If either the width or height is below 1080, we will upsample it to an output of 1080 x 1920, ensuring the minimum resolution remains 1080p. # Can I Use Google Pay to Purchase a Plan? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/google-pay No, Google Pay is **not available** as a payment option at this moment, because we do not collect shipping addresses, which is required for this payment method. We've opted out of this to simplify the checkout experience and minimize the personal data we collect. You can still complete your purchase easily using credit cards, Apple Pay or other methods. # How Do Credits Work? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-are-credits-consumed ## What are credits? Credits are used to process your video projects. Currently, processing clips will cost 1 credit per minute of the original video imported. > [!TIP] > > For example, processing a 30-minute video would use 30 credits. Posting to X also uses credits, at a rate of 3 credits per post. ## How is credit usage calculated? When you submit a video to OpusClip, your credit usage is based on how long your video is. > [!TIP] > > If you don't need the whole video processed, you can select just the part you > want by adjusting the "Processing timeframe" slider when submitting your > video. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/credits-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=7a7a05bd13baf487cf36787254afcba8) For all processing options, credits are calculated based on whole minutes: * **Videos shorter than 1 minute** are rounded up to the nearest minute (e.g., 0.5 minutes costs 1 credit). * **Videos with partial minutes** are rounded down to the nearest whole minute. (e.g., a 4.5-minute video would be calculated as 4 minutes). ## X Posts Each X post or schedule is charged at **3 credits per clip, per X account**. For example, posting one clip to two X accounts uses 6 credits. You can preview the total credit usage of your post at the bottom of the setup window. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/HV03sk03mDpEheyX/images/imgs/credits-x-post.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=HV03sk03mDpEheyX\&q=85\&s=6d9c6c253882957046b3d37319549bd8) If the **post fails** or if you **delete your scheduled post**, the credits it froze are **automatically refunded**. No action is required. ## How many credits are included with my plan? | **Plan** | **Credits** | | | - | - | - | | Max | 1500 credits per month per pack. Plan available only through [Agent Opus](https://agent.opus.pro/), but credits can be used on OpusClip. | | | Pro | 300 credits per month per pack. You can get more credits by buying multiple packs. | | | Starter | 150 credits per month. | | | Enterprise | Customized. Please [contact us](https://www.opus.pro/contact). | | ## Do credits expire? If you're on a monthly plan, your credits expire in 60 days, so they roll over for one additional month. If you're on a yearly plan, your credits are valid for 12 months. You'll receive the full year's worth of credits immediately upon purchase, and they will expire after 12 months. If you cancel your subscription, any remaining credits will expire at their original expiration date, even if that is after your billing cycle ends. ## How do I get more credits? There are several ways to get more credits: * **Refresh Your Plan**: Paid users can refresh their plan by clicking the **Add More Credits** button at the top right corner of the dashboard. This lets you repurchase your current plan and receive additional credits instantly. * **Add More Packs**: To get more recurring credits each billing cycle, you can increase the number of packs you purchase. Go to **Subscription -> Change Packs/Add More Packs** to adjust your packs and get credits immediately. * **Upgrade Your Plan**: Starter plan users can upgrade to a Pro plan for additional credits right away. Go to **Subscription -> Change Plan** to switch. * **Switch to a Yearly Plan**: If you're on a monthly plan, upgrading to a yearly plan will provide more credits immediately. Go to **Subscription -> Upgrade to Yearly**. Yearly plans offer credits at a 50% discount compared to monthly plans. ## How are credits consumed in my team workspace? Only the team owner can purchase a paid plan for the team. Once the plan is purchased, the credits will be shared among all team members. # How can I change my billing information? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-can-i-change-my-billing-information You can easily adjust your billing information such as your payment method, billing address, and billing email. To do so, you can head to the Billing & Invoice details in the Subscription dashboard. **Any changes will take effect at the start of the next billing cycle.** \[!WARNING] Unfortunately, we are unable to make any changes to paid invoices. # How Can I Delete a Project? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-can-i-delete-my-project Read more on how to find out how to delete a project from your OpusClip Account! If you need to delete an unwanted project from your OpusClip Account you can do so by navigating to My projects page. You can click [here](https://clip.opus.pro/projects) get to it faster! **1. Once you're on My projects page.** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN/images/imgs/delete-project-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN\&q=85\&s=8a322fea5c9ca26a6e8748e9a6179bb4) **2. From there, hover and click onto to the 3 dot icon and a popup should open giving you the option to delete.** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN/images/imgs/delete-project-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN\&q=85\&s=5354115c1f668419be053da9968749b1) # How Do Recipes and Brand Kit Work Together? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-do-recipes-and-brand-kit-work-together Your **Recipe** saves your editing setup: which edits to run, their settings, and **which Brand Kit to use**, including the option to use no Brand Kit. Your **Brand Kit** sets the look, including your logo, caption style, headline style, layout, intro, outro, and music. When you save a Brand Kit selection in a custom Recipe, that kit is automatically selected the next time you use the Recipe. ## What does each one control? | Setting | Where to change it | | - | - | | Turn Clipping, Captions, Auto hook, or other edits on or off | Recipe | | Choose the output aspect ratio | Recipe | | Choose options such as clip length, B-roll type, or Viral hook versus Headline | Recipe | | Set caption and headline styles when a Brand Kit is applied | Brand Kit | | Set layouts and element placement for each aspect ratio | Brand Kit | | Add your logo, intro, outro, and music | Brand Kit | ## How do I apply a Brand Kit to a Recipe? 1. Open a Recipe. 2. Use the **Brand kit** picker next to the Recipe picker to select a kit. 3. Review your Recipe settings, then click **Create** to run it. To keep that Brand Kit selection for a custom Recipe, save the Recipe after selecting the kit. You can choose a different kit, or **No brand kit**, before submitting a video. ## Does a Brand Kit turn captions or headlines on? No. Use **Captions** and **Auto hook** in the Recipe to turn them on or off. For example, if your Brand Kit has a caption style but **Captions** is off, the video won't have captions. Turn **Captions** on to use that style. For a headline, turn on **Auto hook** and select **Headline**. Auto hook adds either a Headline or a Viral Hook, so you can't apply both at once. ## Why can't I change a style on the Recipe page? When a Brand Kit is selected, it controls the styles it defines, such as caption and headline styles. To use a different style, you can: * Update the selected Brand Kit. * Switch to another Brand Kit. * Select **No brand kit** and choose a style on the Recipe page. ## What happens to the logo, intro, outro, and music? These are part of the Brand Kit. When you apply the kit, the assets configured in it are applied to your video. Manage them in the Brand Kit. ## Do I need a separate Brand Kit for every aspect ratio? No. One Brand Kit supports **9:16, 16:9, 1:1, and 4:5**. Choose the output ratio on the Recipe page. OpusClip uses the Brand Kit's layout and placement settings for that ratio, including any intro and outro configured for it. Each run creates one ratio. Run the Recipe again to create another version. ## Related articles * [How to Use Brand Kit](/docs/article/how-to-use-brand-kit) * [Create and Save a Custom Recipe](/docs/article/create-and-save-a-custom-recipe) * [How to Use Recipes](/docs/article/how-to-use-recipes) # How is Brand Kit different from Brand Template? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-is-brand-kit-different-from-brand-template Brand Kit is the upgraded version of Brand Template. Your existing settings, such as logos and caption styles, will carry over. The biggest changes are: * **Brand Kit controls style. Recipe controls features.** For example, Brand Kit controls how captions look, while Recipe controls whether captions are turned on. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh/images/imgs/brand-kit-vs-template-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh\&q=85\&s=db1a523711297cc13d285c00824dadf6) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh/images/imgs/brand-kit-vs-template-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh\&q=85\&s=0346c34a8a45f956732d8095732fea41) * **One Brand Kit supports multiple aspect ratios.** You no longer need a separate template for every ratio. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh/images/imgs/brand-kit-vs-template-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh\&q=85\&s=aa2cf50163d78d5bdbac7a105ab77c4d) # How Many Clips Can I Get? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-many-clips The number of clips that Opus creates is dependent on the video length that you process, and the model you use. ClipAnything usually yields slightly more clips than ClipBasic: * 0-3 min: 1-2 clips * 3-10 min: 3-14 clips * 10-30 min: 5-21 clips * 30-60 min: 23-32 clips * 60-120 min: 32-42 clips * Over 120 min: 42-55 clips We are working on improving our algorithm so that we will generate more clips for you. Stay tuned! # How To Avoid Low/0 View Count on Your Clips Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-avoid-low-views ## Why do I have low/0 view count on my clips made with OpusClip? There are **many reasons why you might be getting 0 or low views on your content**, and it's not always about the clip quality itself. Platform algorithms are complex and influenced by dozens of factors — from posting behavior to metadata and timing. If your views are primarily coming from **profile visits**, **search results**, or **shared links**, it likely means your video isn't being picked up by the main **Discovery Feed** — like **YouTube Shorts Feed**, **TikTok's For You Page (FYP)**, or **Instagram Reels Feed**. This is where the majority of organic reach happens. To confirm, check your platform's analytics: * [Youtube](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/12220281) * [TikTok](https://support.tiktok.com/en/using-tiktok/growing-your-audience/my-videos-arent-getting-views) * [Instagram](https://help.instagram.com/202865988324236/) If your video isn't appearing in these feeds, it's likely being suppressed or deprioritized — even if it's still visible on your profile. ## Best practices to avoid low/0 views If you believe your content is being suppressed or deprioritized, there are several steps you can take to increase your chances of reaching the feed. While platforms don't officially confirm most of the reasons below, these insights are based on real-world experience shared by creators and **consistent patterns we've observed in analytics**. Think of them as **best practices**, not official platform rules. ## 1. Your account looks suspicious or unverified Unverified accounts are treated as low-trust by platforms and may have limited reach or features. Platforms use verification (email, phone, 2FA) as a trust signal. Without it, your content may be deprioritized or flagged. **Fix**: * Add a **phone number** * Confirm your **email** * Enable **two-factor authentication** ## 2. Posting immediately on a new Account Brand-new accounts that post right away often trigger anti-spam filters. **Fix**: Warm up your account by watching videos, commenting, and subscribing for 7-14 days before uploading. ## 3. Reposting or using watermarked content Using content from other platforms—especially with visible watermarks or without meaningful edits—can lead to deprioritization or even takedown. **Fix**: Use original content, or re-edit videos with voiceovers, zooms, effects, or blur watermarks. ## 4. Overposting in a short time Uploading too many clips too fast (especially on a new channel) can appear spammy. **Fix**: Post 1 clip per day. If a video underperforms, wait 24/48h+ before posting again. ## 5. Content or captions contain flagged words Even mild offensive words or controversial topics (drugs, violence, etc.) in captions, audio, or text can limit distribution. **Fix**: Censor or bleep flagged words in audio. For titles and descriptions OpusClip automatically does that from the Scheduler / Autopost feature. ## 6. VPNs, proxies, or location hopping Switching locations frequently or using low-quality VPNs can make your behavior look suspicious. **Fix**: Upload from a consistent location/IP. If using VPNs, choose high-quality, stable ones. ## 7. Other behavioral red flags that can suppress your reach Even with great content, **bot-like or untrustworthy behavior** can quietly limit your visibility. Here's what to avoid: * **Scheduling posts to go live at the exact same time every day** — robotic patterns can be flagged by platforms, slightly varying your posting times. * **Buying followers, likes, or engagement** — this damages trust and reduces real reach * **Using unauthorized third-party tools** to automate posts or engagement * **Working with “growth services” that violate terms of service**, even if they promise organic reach * **Getting mass reported**, which can happen from spammy comments, polarizing content, or aggressive DMs ## How to fix it (Recovery Plan) If you suspect your channel is shadowbanned or suppressed: 1. **Stop posting** for 3-7 days. 2. **Engage with the platform normally** (watch, comment, subscribe, like and follow). 3. **Post one high-quality clip** 4. **Check analytics** Check where views are coming from: * **YouTube**: Shorts feed vs. search/channel * **TikTok**: FYP vs. profile views * **Instagram**: Reels vs. profile If you're not getting discovery feed exposure after a strong video, you may still be flagged. # Low/0 views FAQ ## Will using OpusClip cause my content to get lower views? **No**. OpusClip is a verified platform that uses official APIs provided by platforms like YouTube, TikTok, and Instagram. We do not spam, auto-post without user action, or manipulate engagement in any way. All content is processed and uploaded by **you**, through **your own account**. In rare cases, platforms may still limit reach for reasons outside of our control. If you suspect this has happened, we recommend contacting the platform's official support team directly. ## How to avoid low/0 views: * Your Account Looks Suspicious or Unverified * Posting Immediately on a New Account * Reposting or Using Watermarked Content * Overposting in a Short Time * Content or Captions Contain Flagged Words * VPNs, Proxies, or Location Hopping * Other potential flags: * Scheduling posts to go live at the same time every day * Buying followers, likes, or engagement * Using unauthorized third-party tools * Working with “growth services” that violate terms of service * Getting mass reported Check the section under ["Best practices to avoid low/0 views"](/docs/article/how-to-avoid-low-views#best-practices-to-avoid-low-0-views) for more details. # How to Censor Curse Words Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-censor-curse-words ## What is automatic censorship of curse words? Sensitive language in your content can pose risks when publishing to platforms. With one click, you can easily manage curse words in your video. This feature processes both captions and corresponding audio, ensuring your content is safer and more platform-friendly. ## How can I automatically censor curse words? This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise users. 1. **Navigate to the Editor**: Open the specific clip editor page you want to work on. 2. **Finding auto censor entrance**: 1. Go to the right panel and select '**AI enhance**' 2. Click '**Auto censor**' to enter the auto censorship settings 3. **Curse words review settings** 1. Select the curse words list you want to review 2. Choose the style of censor display, you can choose \*\* or -- as two different styles. 3. Select which way the audio corresponding to the curse word is processed, such as being beeped or muted, or choosing not to process the audio. 4. **Confirm auto censor** 1. Click '**Enable auto censor**' to confirm the action 5. **View censored content** 1. In the transcript area, you can see that the captions have been displayed in the selected style 2. Play the video, and you will see that the corresponding audio has been processed. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Can I revert the automatic censoring? Yes, you can. After completing the automatic censor operation, you can go to the '**AI enhance**' menu again and click '**Revert censorship**' to cancel censoring words. ## Can I select a word for manual censoring? Yes, you can. You can click on a word in the transcript area, select '**censor word**', and then select only censor this word, or select all of this word in the video. ## Can I reverse censoring a certain word? Yes, you can. You can select a censored word and select 'Undo censoring' to revert the censorship of that word. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/censor-curse-words-2.gif?s=711fa24275a65cadc4aa3993d416de0a) ## Can I create my own curse word list? Pro users can utilize the platform's default curse word list for automatic censoring. Enterprise users, however, have the added flexibility to create and manage up to five custom curse word lists. How to Create Your Custom Censor List: 1. Navigate to the left panel and select '**AI Enhance**'. 2. Click on '**Auto Censor**' to open the automatic censoring settings. 3. Select the '**Edit**' button to access the Asset Library. 4. Choose '**Add My List**' to create your own censored word list. ## Can I manage my censored words list? Yes, you can. On the Asset Library page, you can copy, delete, or rename your list, and you can also add or remove censored words from your list. # How to connect Facebook Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-connect-facebook ## **Before attempting to connect your Facebook Page to OpusClip, please verify that the following is true:** ## **You are attempting to connect a Facebook Page, not a Profile or a Group** [Differences between Profiles, Pages, and Groups on Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/help/337881706729661) [How to create a Facebook Page](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1199464373557428?id=418112142508425) > [!NOTE] > > Meta no longer allows users to convert Facebook Profiles to Facebook Pages. ## After verifying the above is true, follow the steps below to connect your Facebook Page to OpusClip: <video type="video/mp4" /> # How To Contact Support Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-contact-support To contact support, please click on the below link and follow the instructions: [Contact Support](https://www.opus.pro/contact-support) # How to Enable Face Tracking Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-enable-face-tracking OpusClip **Auto Reframe** automatically **tracks moving and active speakers** on screen to ensure your clips engage viewers! While manual enabling is not currently supported, you can enable our AI for improved tracking results. To do so, before submitting new projects, we highly recommend selecting the layout you want our AI to use for reframing in your **Brand Template** page. ([Learn more](./layout-and-reframing#how-to-change-brand-template-for-my-current-clip)) You can also manually refine the reframe based on the clip results. ([Learn more](./layout-and-reframing#can-i-manually-adjust-the-framing-to-make-it-more-precise)) # Manual Reframe Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-manually-reframe-content To manually adjust your video's framing, you can open the crop window to manually reframe your content. There are 3 ways to open the crop window: * Click the Crop button * Double click the scene * Press **X** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/manual-reframe-new-1.gif?s=b65c5f1d557bb40e1ab67a285dc20a6a) You can also select multiple scenes and update their layouts all at once. Hold Shift to select multiple scenes, then right-click to update their layouts all at once. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/manual-reframe-new-2.gif?s=1951f7752e8f15e20f49e3cfacfb81d8) # How to post to TikTok Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-post-to-tiktok OpusClip gives you two ways to post your clips to TikTok: 1. **TikTok Inbox** - Sends your clip to the TikTok mobile app via system notification, where you can preview, edit, and post to your **Feed or Story** 2. **TikTok Feed** - Automatically schedules and posts your clip directly to your **Feed** without using the TikTok app Each method is designed for a different type of workflow — choose the one that fits your content style and publishing needs. ## What is TikTok Inbox? TikTok Inbox lets you instantly transfer clips from Opus to your TikTok mobile app via a **system notification**. It's the fastest way to get your clip into TikTok for **manual editing and publishing** using TikTok's native tools. Unlike TikTok's **scheduled Feed posting**, which supports direct publishing, TikTok Inbox is a **manual publishing method**. Your clip is delivered to the app as a **draft notification**, where you can **open it, make edits, and post it yourself**. ## Why use TikTok Inbox? * **TikTok Inbox** is ideal when you want to **manually post or edit your clip inside the TikTok app** * It's useful for adding native effects, music, or editing before publishing * It's the **only TikTok workflow in Opus that supports draft delivery via mobile notification** * For automatic **Feed posts**, use the **TikTok Auto-Publish option** instead when available ## Which method to choose? | Feature | Inbox | Feed | | :-: | :-: | :-: | | Post to Feed | Yes | Yes | | Post to Story | Yes | No | | Edit With TikTok Tools | Yes | No | | Automatic Posting | No | Yes | | Scheduling | Yes | Yes | | AI Generated Captions and Descriptions | No | Yes | ## Post on TikTok Inbox and/or Feed 1. **Navigate to your project**: Open your projects' results page. 2. **Select Clips**: Click on the calendar icon to schedule your post ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/post-tiktok-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=012ea84ebbcf5d574991e6a22e401e0b) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/post-tiktok-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=5d5defc1d90f6dbc9a430652cd4f24ee) 3. **Publish to TikTok**: * Select the TikTok platform you want to post to ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/post-tiktok-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=30dd72dad90f22b89cfce21a6272a92d) * Select if you want to post to Feed or Inbox ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/post-tiktok-6.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=19ab36ae8cc8d9ce248894aa85d8126b) * Click on "Publish Now" or click on "Select Time" if you want to schedule it for a later time. ## Where can i find my clips? **TikTok Feed** 1. Your videos can be found in your profile. **TikTok Inbox** 1. **Open TikTok on your mobile device**: click on "Inbox" and then tap "System Notifications". There you will see a notification that your clip is ready. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/post-tiktok-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=a86f885775d12cc664547b67dc291351) 2. **Open your clip**: Tap on "View More" to see your clip. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/post-tiktok-5.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=b16905c5b956f1d6b6a6823e104491c5) # FAQ ## Why Can't I Schedule to TikTok Inbox? Unlike TikTok Feed, clips are handed off to the TikTok mobile app as **draft notifications on your selected date and time** — not published or pre-scheduled posts to your Feed. If you want to post automatically to TikTok in advance, consider using the **Feed** option. ## Can I edit the clip before posting? Yes. Once the clip appears in your TikTok Inbox (under **System Notifications**), you can trim, add music, captions, filters, or text using TikTok's native editing tools before publishing. ## Where does the clip go after I click "Publish Now”? For **TikTok Inbox** your clip is sent directly to the **TikTok mobile app** and appears under **Inbox → System Notifications**. It will not appear in your Drafts tab unless you manually save it there after opening. For **TikTok Feed**, your clip can be found in your **profile**. ## What if I don't see the notification in TikTok? * Make sure you're logged into the same TikTok account you connected in OpusClip * Check **System Notifications**, not regular messages or Drafts * If it still doesn't appear, try force-closing and reopening the TikTok app after 1-2 minutes ## Can I send the same clip again if I missed the notification? Yes. Simply return to the clip in Opus, click the calendar icon again, and choose **Publish Now** to TikTok Inbox a second time. # How to submit a video without clipping? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-submit-video-without-clipping We have one of the most powerful clipping tools in the world, but sometimes you might just want the whole video. To submit a full video without our AI making automatic clips, you can use our AI Copilot "Don't Clip" option. These options will be available after you submit your link or file. Once completed, this will generate a caption-only project with all of your specified content. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-110.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=19e2b15c822c25ee423425923fa891e8) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/how-to-submit-without-clipping.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=e052c0727dd4b9855402f1c68fe9fe07) > [!NOTE] > > We currently have a 30-minute restriction on this setting. # How to Use Brand Kit Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-use-brand-kit ## Overview ### What is Brand Kit? Brand Kit controls how your videos look. Set up your brand once, then reuse it across videos. You can save things like: * Logo * Caption style * Headline style * Layout * Intro and outro * Music You can also customize how your Brand Kit looks in different aspect ratios. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh/images/imgs/brand-kit-overview-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh\&q=85\&s=7129f0f0d90fbe94a6342c52069327ce) ### How do I apply a Brand Kit? You can apply a Brand Kit in two places: 1. When submitting a project with a Recipe 2. In the **Brand Kit** section inside the Editor ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh/images/imgs/brand-kit-apply-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh\&q=85\&s=300be3b649449bfb157fd36c4e906522) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh/images/imgs/brand-kit-apply-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=bMtIYtseWdjP3Knh\&q=85\&s=e59f9543d629f891ea61cca41bc58154) ### How do I manage my Brand Kits? You can manage all your Brand Kits from the **Brand Kit** page on the homepage sidebar. * **Create a new kit:** Open the Brand Kit dropdown at the top and select **New Brand Kit**. * **Save changes:** Click **Save changes** to update your current Brand Kit. * **Save as a new kit:** Click **Save as new kit** to create a separate Brand Kit with your current settings. * **Switch kits:** Use the Brand Kit dropdown at the top. * **Rename, delete, or set as default:** Select a Brand Kit, then open the **•••** menu. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Multi-ratio ### How does multi-ratio work? One Brand Kit supports four aspect ratios: 9:16, 16:9, 1:1, and 4:5. Your styles stay consistent across ratios, while the **size and position** of elements can be adjusted separately for each ratio. Switch between the ratio tabs to preview and customize each version. When you save, all four ratios are saved inside the same Brand Kit. <video type="video/mp4" /> ### How do I change the preview? Click **Show Settings** under the preview to choose what you want to see. You can show or hide: * Safe zones * Captions * Headlines * Emojis These settings only change what you see in the preview. <video type="video/mp4" /> ### What can I adjust in the preview? For each aspect ratio, you can adjust: * **Logo:** position and size * **Captions:** position and size * **Emojis:** position and size You can't manually move the headline. OpusClip automatically places it based on each video and tries to avoid covering faces. You also can't edit these directly from the preview: * Layout * Intro / Outro * Music <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Logo ### How do I add a logo? Under **Basic → Logos**, upload a logo from your computer or choose one from your Asset Library. Your logo will appear in the preview. Drag it to move it, or drag a corner to resize it. Supported formats: * JPG * PNG * SVG * GIF * WebP Animated GIFs will also animate in the preview. You can currently add **one logo per Brand Kit**. If you upload a logo from your computer, it will also be saved to your Asset Library. Removing a logo from Brand Kit does **not** delete the file. To permanently delete it, go to Asset Library. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Styles ### How do I customize captions? Go to **Styles → Caption**. 1. Choose a caption preset. 2. Customize the size, weight, alignment, highlight color, and other style settings. 3. Preview your changes live. 4. Save the style when you're done. Brand Kit controls **how your captions look**. To turn captions on or off for a video, use the **Caption toggle in Recipe**. <video type="video/mp4" /> ### How do I customize headlines? Go to **Styles → Auto Headline**. 1. Choose a headline style. 2. Customize the style. 3. Save your changes. > [!WARNING] > > Brand Kit controls how the headline looks. To add or remove headlines from a video, control **Auto Hook / Headline in Recipe**. > [!NOTE] > > Headline position is automatically decided by AI based on the video layout and face position, so it can't be saved as a fixed position in Brand Kit. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Layouts ### How do layouts work? **Layout** controls how your video frame is presented. You can select more than one layout. If you do, AI can choose the best layout for each scene. Available layouts include: 1. **9:16:** Fill, Fit, Split, Three, Four, ScreenShare, Gameplay 2. **16:9 / 1:1 / 4:5:** Fill, Fit <video type="video/mp4" /> ### How does crop work? **Crop** only applies to the **Fit** layout. When AI uses Fit for a scene, Crop sets the shape of the framed footage, and the rest of the canvas is filled with a blurred background. Unlike Layout, Crop is single-select. **Original** lets AI pick the best framing; **4:3** and **1:1** (9:16 only) lock the shape. ## Intro / Outro ### How do I add an intro or outro? Each aspect ratio can have its own intro and outro. Go to **Intro & Outro**, choose a ratio, then: 1. Click **Intro** or **Outro**. 2. Upload a file or choose one from Asset Library. 3. Use **More** to access 1:1 and 4:5. When the Brand Kit is applied, the intro and outro will be used in your videos. Intro and outro are available in **Pro and above**. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Music ### How do I add music? Go to **Media → Music** and choose a track. The selected music will be used on videos created with that Brand Kit. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Pricing ### How many Brand Kits can I have? | Plan | Brand Kit access | | - | - | | **Pro** | Up to 4 Brand Kits. Add a pack if you need more. | | **Starter** | 1 Brand Kit | | **Trial** | Up to 2 Brand Kits | | **Free** | You can apply the default Brand Kit in the Editor, but you need to upgrade to create or edit Brand Kits. | On Starter, custom uploads such as logos, fonts, intros, and outros require Pro. Trial users can upload logos and fonts. Intros and outros require Pro. When your trial ends, uploaded assets are paused rather than deleted. Upgrade to Pro to use them again. ### Why can't I edit or create a Brand Kit? There are a few common reasons. 1. **You have more Brand Kits than your plan allows.** Your default Brand Kit and your most recently edited kits stay editable. Other kits may become locked. You can still use or delete a locked kit. Delete unused kits or add more Brand Kit capacity to unlock more. 2. **You downgraded from Pro.** Your uploaded logos, fonts, intros, and outros are hidden, not deleted. Upgrade to Pro and they will become available again. 3. **You're out of storage.** Pro includes 100 GB of storage. Your Asset Library, saved projects, and Brand Kit uploads share the same storage. Free up space before uploading more assets. ## How do Brand Kit and Asset Library work together? Asset Library stores your files. Brand Kit decides which files to use. When you upload an asset through Brand Kit, it is also saved to Asset Library. This includes: * Logos * Custom fonts * Intros * Outros Removing an asset from Brand Kit does not delete the original file. To permanently delete an uploaded asset, manage it in Asset Library. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Can I use Brand Kit in the Editor? Yes. In the Editor, open **Brand → Brand Kit** in the right sidebar. From there, you can: * Apply an existing Brand Kit * Update some Brand Kit styles * Save supported changes back to Brand Kit Some settings still have limitations in the Editor. For example, you currently can't: * Create a new Brand Kit * Save feature on/off settings such as captions * Save some layout settings <video type="video/mp4" /> ## What are the current limitations? Brand Kit is still being expanded across OpusClip. Currently: * **iOS and Android:** The new Brand Kit experience is desktop-only. Mobile apps still use the classic Brand Template experience. * **Mobile browser:** The new Brand Kit experience is not supported yet. * **MCP / API:** Existing Brand Kits can't currently be used through MCP or API workflows. These still use classic Brand Templates. * **Editor:** You can apply and edit some Brand Kit settings, but not every setting can be saved back to the kit. ## What's coming next? We're continuing to expand Brand Kit with: * Brand colors * Custom background styles * Custom music uploads * More headline / viral hook styles * ... # How to use ClipAnything? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-use-clipanything ClipAnything is the *first-ever multimodal AI clipping that lets you clip any moment from ANY video* using visual, audio, and sentiment cues, including videos with little to no dialogue. You can use *natural language prompts to find any scene, action, character, event, emotional moment, viral topic, and more*. When processing videos with minimal talking or less talking, we **highly recommend that you use ClipAnything** to improve the quality of your clips. 1. **Drop your video link / Upload a video** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/clipanything-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=61e31e624b2925781dc7ea7d6c318e7e) 2. **Select "ClipAnything" under Clip model** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/clipanything-2.gif?s=9860c4bcdb94ed6548d45eb89fe49c7b) 3. **Select your video genre** (optional) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/clipanything-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=03181d4b4b5b9c326424b9b5dc860f83) 4. **Type your prompt to find a specific moment** (optional). For instance, "Find all the touchdowns", or "Find the moments most likely to go viral on social media." ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/clipanything-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=402dc38ba7da35ee9bf1a98df4a80435) > [!TIP] > > You can save your favourite clip settings (model, genre, and presets) as default to simplify your workflow and never miss a setting again. 5. **Choose a caption style from Quick Presets**, or select **No Caption** if your video already has captions baked in or you prefer a clean look. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/GsH3gXLY0N7C1KSM/images/imgs/clipanything-no-caption.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=GsH3gXLY0N7C1KSM\&q=85\&s=adc2cac0deba6bc43bb6ff208f74077f) As we continue to iterate on our clipping models, your feedback is always greatly appreciated. Please let us know about your experience using OpusClip, by clicking the “heart” or “thumbs down” button located on the left side of each clip, or by completing our quick feedback survey when you see it on the results page. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4/images/imgs/clipanything-6.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=4oBcsSmINxEJFGA4\&q=85\&s=f78d6e1d3adf224e0c8b11e4681e2afb) # How to Use Recipes Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-use-recipes ## What can I do with a Recipe? A Recipe lets you save your editing setup and reuse it on new videos. Use it to turn a long video into short clips or edit a single video. Choose which editing features to run, such as captions, speech cleanup, B-roll, and hooks, then pick their settings and styles. You can also select a Brand Kit to apply your branding. Save your Recipe once, then use the same setup whenever you need it. ## Which Recipes are available? OpusClip includes **some built-in Recipes** under **OpusClip Recipes** in **Manage Recipes**. | Recipe | Use it to | | - | - | | **Clip long video** | Find highlights and turn them into clips with captions and a headline. | | **Clean up recording** | Clean up speech, enhance audio, correct color, and improve eye contact. | | **Auto-edit talking videos** | Apply captions, a Viral Hook, Motion Graphics, B-roll, speech cleanup, and other automatic edits. | | **Captions** | Add animated captions. | | **Reframe** | Adapt your video to another aspect ratio. | | **Social edits** | Add captions, a Viral Hook, Motion Graphics, and sound effects. | | **AI B-roll** | Add relevant AI image B-roll. | | **Translate & dub** | Dub your video into another language and add captions. | Each Recipe starts with a different set of edits, but you have the same options to choose from. You can customize any Recipe by turning edits on or off and adjusting their settings, then save your changes as a custom Recipe to reuse on your next video. ## What is a custom Recipe? A custom Recipe is your own saved auto-edit setup. You can start with a built-in Recipe, change the settings, and save your version under **My custom Recipes**. You can update, rename, duplicate, or delete your custom Recipes. Built-in Recipes stay unchanged when you save your own version. ## How do I run a Recipe? On the **Dashboard**, choose a Recipe to get started, or click **See all Recipes** to browse the full list. * Upload a video or paste a supported video link. * Review your **Recipe settings** and make any changes for this video if needed. * Check the selected edits and credit usage in **Summary**, then click **Create**. ## How do I switch Recipes? On any Recipe page, open the **Recipe** picker and select another Recipe. Review its settings and your Brand Kit selection before clicking **Create**. ## Can I use a Recipe without a Brand Kit? Yes. Choose **No brand kit** to use the settings you select on the Recipe page without applying a kit. To reuse the same logo, caption style, intro, outro, and music across videos, select a Brand Kit. ## Related articles * [Create and Save a Custom Recipe](/docs/article/create-and-save-a-custom-recipe) * [Edit, Rename, Duplicate, or Delete a Recipe](/docs/article/edit-rename-duplicate-or-delete-a-recipe) * [How Do Recipes and Brand Kit Work Together?](/docs/article/how-do-recipes-and-brand-kit-work-together) # How To View Your Invoices Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/how-to-view-your-invoices While signed into your account, click [here](https://clip.opus.pro/subscription) to access your **Subscription Page** or select the **Subscription button** on the left hand side of your screen. Select **"Billing & Invoice Details"** to view your subscription's invoices. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/view-invoices.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=f6250091edee7ec7c830b518d0905078) # Import to Adobe Premiere FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/import-to-adobe-premiere ## Can I export clips to Adobe Premiere Pro? Yes, you can click on **Export to XML** in the result page for specific short videos. \[!NOTE] This feature is exclusively for Pro Plan users. 1. Once you have the results from OpusClip, navigate to the clip you want to export 2. Click 'Export to XML' to download the video 3. Locate and unzip the downloaded file 4. Import the '.xml' and '.srt' files into Adobe ## What's included in the exported files? The exported file will include three components: 1. The original raw video 2. A '.xml' file containing the generated clip content with auto captions, auto reframe and B-Rolls(if has) 3. A '.srt' file providing captions with timestamps **Please note:** Auto captions generated by OpusClip will be exported as overlays and cannot be edited in Premiere Pro. Kindly make sure that you have completed the caption adjustment within the OpusClip editor and saved it before exporting the XML file. If you want to add captions using Premiere, you can import the '.srt' files into Premiere and edit style and effects in Premiere. ## Which elements or settings from my project will be exported to Adobe Premiere? 1. **All Videos**: the original videos, videos you uploaded. 2. **All Audio**: the original video's audio, music added from the music library, music you uploaded, and voice-overs. 3. **All Images**: the B-roll footage, uploaded images, logos, etc. 4. **Captions and Emojis**: OpusClip's caption styles and animations will be exported as overlays. Additionally, you will receive a '.srt' file, allowing for more advanced customization in Premiere. ## Can I extend my video before and after the original video? Yes, you can. When you want to add context to a specific segment, we currently support extending each video segment by 30 seconds before and after. ## What can I do when I export a clip file to Adobe Premiere? When exporting a clip file to Adobe Premiere, you gain versatile editing capabilities: 1. **Precise Editing**: Perform detailed tasks such as removing frames or adjusting caption timestamps. 2. **Trim & Extend**: Easily adjust video duration by utilizing added seconds on either side of each clip * Extend middle clips by up to 10 seconds. * Extend the start and end of the video by up to 30 seconds. 3. **Reframing**: Achieve varied visual perspectives by adjusting framing and composition. 4. **Further Enhancements**: Customize your video with sound effects, music, transitions, and more. Add more fancy effects to auto captions, like resize, rotate, replace. ## How can I reframe videos in Adobe Premiere Pro? 1. Import the ".xml" file. 2. Select a specific clip in the timeline or double click on the frame you want to edit. 3. Adjust the Crop ratio in the **Effect Controls** panel. 4. Drag and reposition the framing as desired. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/adobe-1.gif?s=d152b1586b5f77ab89d28fd816c5f627) ## Can I export animated captions to Adobe Premiere? Yes, animated captions generated by OpusClip will be **exported as overlays and cannot be edited in Premiere Pro**. Kindly make sure that you have completed the caption adjustment within the OpusClip editor and saved it before exporting the XML file. If you want to add captions using Premiere, you can import the '.srt' files into Premiere and edit style and effects in Premiere. ## Can I export multiple short videos to Adobe Premiere at once? Unfortunately we do not support exporting multiple shorts. You need export each short video one at a time. After downloading the corresponding .xml files, you can import multiple files into Adobe Premiere at once for efficient management. ## Can I export my history projects to Adobe Premier Pro? Yes, once you upgrade to the Pro Plan, you'll be able to render and download XML files directly from the result page. Just a friendly reminder, please make sure to export your files before your project expires. 😊 ## Can I export b-rolls with clips? Yes, we support exporting b-rolls with raw clip video. To do this, enable the 'Auto B-rolls' option in the OpusClip web editor, save and compile the short videos, and then export and import the XML file into Premiere. You will then be able to see the exported b-roll in the Premiere Pro timeline. ## Can I export the short videos to Final Cut Pro? .xml files can be imported into major video editors, although there may be slight variations in how these editors interpret the xml format. For a smoother experience, we recommend exporting short videos to Adobe Premiere Pro for further editing. ## What video lengths are supported by XML export? XML export supports videos up to **1.5 hours in length**, which is the recommended maximum for stable performance. # Import to DaVinci Resolve FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/import-to-davinci-resolve ## What's included in the exported files? The exported file will include three components: 1. The original raw video 2. A '.xml' file containing the generated clip content with auto captions, auto reframe and B-Rolls(if has) 3. A '.srt' file providing captions with timestamps Please note: Auto captions generated by OpusClip will be **exported as overlays and cannot be edited in Premiere Pro**. Kindly make sure that you have completed the caption adjustment within the OpusClip editor and saved it before exporting the XML file. If you want to add captions using Premiere, you can import the '.srt' files into Premiere and edit style and effects in Premiere. ## Which elements or settings from my project will be exported to DaVinci Resolve? 1. **All Videos**: the original videos, videos you uploaded. 2. **All Audios**: the original video's audio, music added from the music library, music you uploaded, and voice-overs. 3. **All Images**: the B-roll footage, uploaded images, logos, etc. 4. **Captions and Emojis**: OpusClip's caption styles and animations will be exported as overlays. Additionally, you will receive a '.srt' file, allowing for more advanced customization in DaVinci. ## Can I extend my video before and after the original video? Yes, you can. When you want to add context to a specific clip, we currently support extending each video clip by 30 seconds before and after. ## What can I do when I export a clip file to DaVinci Resolve? When exporting a clip file to Adobe Premiere, you gain versatile editing capabilities: 1. **Precise Editing**: Perform detailed tasks such as removing frames or adjusting caption timestamps. 2. **Reframing**: Achieve varied visual perspectives by adjusting framing and composition. 3. **Further Enhancements**: Customize your video with sound effects, music, transitions, and more. Add more fancy effects to auto captions, like resize, rotate, replace. ## Can I export the short videos to DaVinci Resolve? Yes, .xml files can be imported into Davinci Resolve. Here's how to import them: 1. Create a new project in DaVinci ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/davinci-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=f5fa819ce06992168df9361194da9d0b) 2. Navigate to the Edit tab, at the bottom row of icons in the main interface. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/davinci-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=e132f826ded857ba8dc62ed57c8191cb) 3. Double click on the Media Pool area and select "Import AAF, EDL, XML..." ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/davinci-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=23c402a4a366454dcc6a318c98c63859) 4. Navigate to your XML file and click Open. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/davinci-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=d8e5f90da9e8557b0fab607231c246b0) 5. If you encounter a "media file not found" issue, don't worry! You can manually import the media files by simply dragging and dropping them into the media pool. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/davinci-5.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=fe539df8188e8fd3dff8d7653fe6172a) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/davinci-6.gif?s=e7a59b05cc684649e3ef12f5046cc730) ## Why are the audio tracks muted in DaVinci Resolve? 1. Select all the clips on the timeline. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/davinci-7.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=a3769d17a7f14a2b0f5c3a3d3d0955a9) 2. Right-click on any selected clip and choose Clip Attributes. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/davinci-8.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=e249883e42ebccb4380a7dec8cb602fa) 3. In the Clip Attributes window, go to the Audio tab. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/davinci-9.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=2788e9c4c5a238e1fda236a9c8d33d0f) 4. Fix the Source Channels by correcting any duplicate listings or incorrect labels. ## How can I reframe videos in DaVinci Resolve? 1. Import the ".xml" file. 2. Select a specific clip in the timeline or double click on the frame you want to edit. 3. Go over to the **Video** tab on the top right side of the screen. This will give you a whole slew of resizing options for your footage. In this menu is a drop-down menu labeled **cropping**. 4. Here, you'll have options to **Crop Left, Crop Right, Crop Top, and Crop Bottom**. Changing these values will crop the bottom and the sides of the video. ## Can I export the short videos to Final Cut Pro? .xml files can be imported into major video editors, although there may be slight variations in how these editors interpret the xml format. For a smoother experience, we recommend exporting short videos to Adobe Premiere Pro for further editing. # How to Resolve Instagram Connection Issues (Error 400) Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/instagram-connection-issues If you're encountering a “**400 Session Invalid**” error when trying to connect your Instagram account to OpusClip, you're likely dealing with a known session issue originating from Instagram. This commonly occurs when the login session has expired, been cached incorrectly, or was never fully initialized, especially with **new or recently changed accounts**. While the error is generated by Instagram itself (not OpusClip), we’ve compiled several reliable fixes that have worked for users facing this exact issue. ## Troubleshooting Steps 1. Refresh Your Instagram Session * Log out of Instagram across all browsers and mobile devices * Close the browser or app entirely * Log back into your Instagram account * Then return to OpusClip and try connecting again 2. Clear Cookies and Cache * Open your browser settings * Clear browsing data (cookies and cache) * Restart the browser and retry the connection in OpusClip 3. Try Another Device or Browser * Use a different browser (e.g., Chrome, Firefox, Safari) * Or switch between desktop and mobile to eliminate device-specific issues 4. Switch Networks * Change from Wi-Fi to mobile data, or vice versa * Network-related session conflicts sometimes resolve with a new IP address ## If Nothing Works Immediately... This issue sometimes resolves itself after a short delay. If none of the fixes above work: * Wait **about 1 hour** (it should be a temporary issue) * Open OpusClip in **incognito/private mode** # Instagram Login Errors Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/instagram-login-errors If you see a **"wrong password" error** when connecting your Instagram account—or the connection works but then disconnects immediately—this is usually caused by **account session or login conflicts.** Follow the steps below to resolve the issue. 1. **Clear your browser data**\ Clear your **cookies and cache** (especially for Facebook and Instagram), then try again. 2. **Use a private browsing window**\ Open an **Incognito / Private window** and reconnect your account. 3. **Make sure you're logged into the correct account** * Log out of all Facebook and Instagram accounts. * Log back in using **only the account you want to connect**. 4. **Disable browser extensions**\ Temporarily disable extensions such as: * Ad blockers * Privacy/security plugins Then try reconnecting. 5. **Try a different browser or device**\ If the issue persists, switch to: * Another browser (Chrome, Safari, Edge) * A different device 6. **Reset your Instagram password**\ If you're still seeing login errors, reset your password and try again. # Insufficient Operating Permissions Acquired Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/insufficient-operating-permissions-acquired ## "Insufficient operating permissions acquired. Please confirm that you have selected all permissions on the authentication page." | Cause | Solution 1 | Solution 2 | | :-: | :-: | :-: | | Facebook is communicating that you do not have sufficient privileges within your Facebook account to share with a trusted third-party platform, like OpusClip. | Reauthorize Facebook's permissions from Facebook Settings. | Ask the owner of the Facebook account for permission. | **Resources**: 1. **Reauthorize Facebook's Permissions** <video type="video/mp4" /> 2. **[Give, edit, or remove Facebook Page access](https://www.facebook.com/help/187316341316631)** # Add Intro/Outro Cards Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/intro-outro-cards Want to add a **call to action (CTA)** or **provide more context** for your clip? With the **Pro plan**, you can enhance your clips by uploading videos or images to use as intro or outro cards. Here's how to do it: 1. **Navigate to the Editor**: Open the specific clip editor page you want to work on. 2. **Upload Media**: * Go to the right panel and select "**Media**". * Click the "**+ Upload**" area to import the media you wish to use. 3. **Add Media to Intro/Outro**: You can apply the uploaded media in two ways: * Click "**Add as Intro**" or "**Add as Outro**" * Drag the specific media and drop it into the intro or outro placeholder at the start or end of the clip on the timeline. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0409-05.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=d666bf25d8be58f159964598774355b1) # Introduction to OpusClip Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/introduction-to-opusclip OpusClip is the #1 video clipping tool that turns long videos into shorts, and publishes them on all social platforms with one click. [YouTube video player](https://www.youtube.com/embed/dvO5NsYovM4) ## Getting Started Before creating your first clips, log in to your account, set up your brand template, and connect your social accounts. > [card] [Add Your Brand Template](/docs/article/things-you-should-set-up-first#brand-templates) > [card] [Add Your Social Accounts](/docs/article/things-you-should-set-up-first#social-accounts) > [card] [Set Up Your Team Workspace](/docs/article/6219255-team-management) ## ClipAnything ClipAnything is the first-ever multimodal AI clipping that lets you clip any moment from ANY video using visual, audio, and sentiment cues, including videos with little to no dialogue. > [card] [What is ClipAnything?](/docs/article/9947095-clip-anything) > [card] [How to use ClipAnything?](/docs/article/how-to-use-clipanything) > [card] [ClipAnything Prompt Manual](/docs/article/clip-anything-prompt-manual) ## Submit Your Video Start your first project by importing your original long video from various online platforms or local files. > [card] [Video Sources Supported](/docs/article/video-sources-supported) > [card] [Video Length Supported](/docs/article/video-length) > [card] [Video Languages Supported](/docs/article/video-languages-supported) ## Create with Recipe Save your editing setup as a Recipe, then reuse it on every new video. > [card] [How to Use Recipes](/docs/article/how-to-use-recipes) > [card] [Create and Save a Custom Recipe](/docs/article/create-and-save-a-custom-recipe) > [card] [Edit, Rename, Duplicate, or Delete a Recipe](/docs/article/edit-rename-duplicate-or-delete-a-recipe) > [card] [How Do Recipes and Brand Kit Work Together?](/docs/article/how-do-recipes-and-brand-kit-work-together) ## Customize Your Clips After uploading your video, you can give our AI the specific instructions to tailor the content to your needs. > [card] [Add Logo and Fonts](/docs/article/custom-fonts) > [card] [Adjust Aspect Ratio](/docs/article/adjust-the-aspect-ratio) > [card] [Choose Clip Length](/docs/article/select-clip-length) > [card] [Clip a Specific Timeframe](/docs/article/select-timeframe) > [card] [Use Prompts to Clip Specific Moments](/docs/article/select-keywords) ## Get Your Clips Once you get everything set up and click the "Get clips with one click!", you will see all of the clips on the results page. For videos of different lengths, you may get different amounts of clips. > [card] [Number of Clips Generated?](/docs/article/how-many-clips) > [card] [Result Page Walkthrough](/docs/article/get-clips-faq-1) ## Edit Your Clips If you like the clips but want to make some minor tweaks, our in-app video editor has you covered! With our powerful Editor, you can do both text-based and timeline-based editing. > [card] [Change Layout](/docs/article/apply-the-layouts) > [card] [Manual Reframe](/docs/article/how-to-manually-reframe-content) > [card] [Change Captions](/docs/article/change-captions) > [card] [AI Emojis or Keywords](/docs/article/ai-emojis-keywords) > [card] [Trim and Extend](/docs/article/trim-extend-the-video) > [card] [Add Text-Overlay](/docs/article/add-text-overlays) > [card] [Add Transition Effects](/docs/article/add-transition-effects) > [card] [Remove Fillers and Pauses](/docs/article/speech-cleanup) > [card] [AI B-Roll](/docs/article/ai-broll) > [card] [AI Voiceover](/docs/article/ai-voiceover) ## Manage Your Clips You can save and manage your clips. > [card] [Save Your Projects](/docs/article/saving-your-projects) ## Publish Your Projects After selecting your favorite clips, you can easily publish your projects across multiple social platforms. > [card] [Add Social Accounts](/docs/article/add-social-accounts) > [card] [Schedule Your Clips](/docs/article/schedule-clips) > [card] [Customize Your Post](/docs/article/9747769-customize-my-posts) ## Export to XML If you want to make further edits, you can also export your clips as an XML file and edit them in professional editing tools like Adobe Premiere or Davinci Resolve. > [card] [Import to Adobe Premiere Pro](/docs/article/import-to-adobe-premiere) > [card] [Import to DaVinci Resolve](/docs/article/import-to-davinci-resolve) ## Others You can find more information in the sections below. > [card] [Email Notification](/docs/article/email-notification-settings) > [card] [Email Log In](/docs/article/email-login) > [card] [Billing and Payment](/docs/article/plans-and-credits) > [card] [API](/docs/article/api-requests) > [card] [FAQs](/docs/article/apply-to-become-an-affiliate) # iOS App Feature Limitations Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/ios-app-feature-limitations ## Which features are currently unavailable on the iOS App? To help you get the best experience with OpusClip, we'd like to clarify the current differences between the iOS app and the web version. While we continue improving the mobile experience, some features are currently only available on the web version. ## Import The following import-related features are not available in the iOS app: * **Google Drive Import:** Importing videos directly from Google Drive is not supported yet on the mobile app. * **Auto import:** The auto-import setup and management is not supported yet on the mobile app. * **Custom clip length:** There are current clip length presets available but you cannot set custom clip length during the upload process on the mobile app. ## Export The following export-related features are not available in the iOS app: * **Bulk Export / Bulk Download:** Exporting or downloading multiple clips at once is not available yet. * **XML Export:** You cannot export files compatible with Adobe Premiere Pro or DaVinci Resolve. ## Storage & Auto Save Currently, the iOS app doesn't support saving to cloud or toggling auto-save on/off. You can still manage these settings from the web version. We're working on bringing this to the app as well. ## Editing & Customization The iOS app currently offers a streamlined set of editing features. You can: * Enable or disable captions * Edit caption style and customize fonts * Edit individual words in your captions * Enable or disable AI Emoji and AI Highlights * Generate clips without captions — the No Caption option is now available as the first tile in the caption selector * Add image overlays to your videos by choosing the **overlay** option at the bottom of the editor. **AI enhancements** and **B-roll** are currently not supported. If you need detailed editing or full caption controls, please log in to OpusClip via a desktop browser. ## Brand Templates You can apply existing Brand Templates to your clips, but you cannot create new templates or modify existing ones within the app yet. If you want to create or edit templates, please log in to OpusClip via a desktop browser. ## Language Support The iOS app is currently available in English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Polish and Portuguese. You can easily switch languages anytime in **Settings > Language** and it is available on iOS 1.3.3 and above. > [!NOTE] > > We're working on adding more languages — if there's a language you'd love to see, tell us and we'll prioritize accordingly. ## Billing & Subscription Management If you subscribed through Stripe on the web, you'll need to manage your billing, invoices, and subscription details from the web version. This isn't available in the iOS app yet. If you subscribed through In-App Purchase (IAP), check out our article on managing your subscription. ## Social Media Scheduling You can connect your social accounts and post clips directly from the app to YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, LinkedIn, Facebook, and X. AI-generated titles, descriptions, and hashtags are included for each platform, and you can edit them before posting. Bulk scheduling and time-based scheduled posting are not available on mobile yet — use the web version for those. ## We're Improving > [!TIP] > > 🥳 Android is launching in June — and it's almost here. Stay tuned for the launch announcement 🚀 We're actively working to enhance the iOS app and expand feature availability. Want to see what's coming next? Check out our roadmap and submit your feature requests at our iOS App Feature Request board. Your feedback helps us decide what to build next. # Keyboard Editing Shortcuts Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/keyboard-precise-editing ## What is the Keyboard Precise Editing feature? Keyboard Precise Editing allows users to edit their clips faster and with greater precision through keyboard shortcuts. Whether you’re splitting clips, zooming in and out of the timeline, or adjusting the playhead position, these shortcuts will streamline your editing process and improve efficiency. ## What value can I get from the Keyboard Precise Editing feature? Keyboard Precise Editing opens up a world of possibilities for a quicker, smoother editing experience. It’s perfect for users looking to save time on repetitive tasks, such as splitting or deleting clips, and for those who want precise control over timeline navigation and playback. ## What are the keyboard shortcuts available? Here are the primary shortcuts you can use with the new Keyboard Precise Editing feature: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/keyboard-shortcuts.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=f209919720aefa836dc5aa2368b0bc0f) ### Moving Between Frames: * Press the **Right Arrow (->)** to move forward to the next frame of a clip. * Each arrow button will move the playhead by 1/30th of a second * Press the **Left Arrow (\<-)** to move backward to the previous frame of a clip. * Each arrow button will move the playhead by 1/30th of a second ### Splitting Clips: * Press **"D"** or **"CMD + B"** to split a selected clip on the timeline. ### Deleting Clips: * Press **"Backspace"** to delete a selected clip. ### Changing Playhead Placement: * Press **"1"** or **"Home"** to send the playhead back to the start of the timeline. * For Mac: Press **"Fn + Left Arrow"** (Home). * Press **"End"** to send the playhead to the end of the timeline. * For Mac: Press **"Fn + Right Arrow"** (End). ### Zooming In and Out: * Press **"-"** to zoom out of the timeline incrementally. * Press **"+"** to zoom into the timeline incrementally. * Press **""** to automatically resize the timeline to fit the screen. * Example: If you are zoomed way in, hit this button to view the entire timeline quickly. ### Copy and Paste (Coming Soon): * Press **"Ctrl + C"** to copy a section of the timeline. * Press **"Ctrl + V"** to paste a section of the timeline. ### Playback Speed (Coming Soon): * Press **"J"** to rewind in 2x speed. * Press **"K"** to play or pause. * Press **"L"** to fast-forward in 2x speed. ## Where can I enable or use these keyboard shortcuts? These shortcuts are active within the editor's timeline. As soon as you start working on your clips, you can begin using these shortcuts for quicker and more precise editing. ## Can I customize these keyboard shortcuts? At the moment, these are the default shortcuts available. However, more customization options may be added in the future. ## Which OpusClip plans are able to use the Keyboard Precise Editing feature? This feature is currently available to all users, regardless of the plan. There is no restriction based on your subscription plan. # Layout and Reframing Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/layout-and-reframing ### How can I change the layout? To change the clip layout, navigate to the brand template page by clicking the icon on the left side of your dashboard. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/layout-and-reframing-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=9d8eeb7a388d951ea53ba237a2e3df78) Then, go to 'Clip layout settings' where you can select the layouts you want to include. We will apply them as applicable. Currently, we support seven layouts: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/layout-and-reframing-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=35e4818af2c48b38e87fba26fc207ef7) * **Fill**: We will focus on the speaker and crop them to fill the 9:16 screen. * **Fit**: We will crop your original video to a 4:3 aspect ratio and add opaque paddings at the top and bottom to fit the 9:16 screen. * **Split**: We will show both speakers on the screen. Note that split mode will only work when both speakers appear together in the original video frame. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=f4a2694f8f78832743867ec216990edc) * **Three**: We will show three speakers on the screen if there are three or more speakers appearing together in the original video frame. It's suitable for interview videos and panel discussions with multiple speakers. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-5.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=234e90ae6f91e857ca9dba1956a4ecd1) * **Four**: Same as three, we will show four speakers on the screen if there are three or more speakers appearing together in the original video frame. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-6.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=04ab9fa7cd36af7d9a001cb6cb6740a1) > [!NOTE] > > To keep the first speaker in the top slot of a **Split**, **Three**, or **Four** layout, turn on **Pin first speaker** in your Brand Template. Learn more in [Pin first speaker](/docs/article/how-to-add-a-brand-template#pin-first-speaker). * **Screenshare**: Screenshare mode requires screenshare content and one speaker. We will automatically place the screen at the top half of screen and speaker at the bottom half. If no screenshare is identified, we will automatically apply alternative layouts. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-7.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz\&q=85\&s=64ff179da8b6c886d5d41fb3cc1ef7ef) * **Gameplay**: The **Gameplay layout** is designed for creators aiming to enhance their streams. With a layout of **30% speaker view on top and 70% gameplay below**, it provides the ideal balance between you and the action, boosting engagement and creating a polished, professional look. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/layout-and-reframing-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=4c990c1e914c3934c4536a975422eb52) Once you have selected your preferred layout, click "**Save Template**" to view the layout updates. ### How to change layout for the entire clip? To change the layout of a clip, click "**Clip layout settings**" on the right-side panel, and select a layout in the "Applicable auto layout" section. Your layout will be changed when applicable. <video type="video/mp4" /> ### How to change the layout for a specific segment? To change the layout of a specific segment, first select the segment on the timeline, then click the "**Layout**" dropdown on the canvas to change the layout for this segment. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-63.png?s=cf022ae8b44009c01dcb0517912cd43e) ### My video has screensharing and it's not framed correctly. We now support "Screenshare" layout. With this new layout, screenshares will be automatically detected and included in your clips, providing additional information and enhancing your content. > [!NOTE] > > Only Select "Screenshare" layout when you want to use it. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/layout-and-reframing-5.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=b9ab1dc133a15e5701496964086654df) ### Can I manually adjust the framing to make it more precise? To manually adjust your video's framing, click the "Crop" icon or double-click the video to open the Manual Reframe window. Then, you can adjust the framing as needed. <video type="video/mp4" /> ### Why is the framing/cropping not precise? You can try to select the layouts you want the AI to use (if applicable) and click "save and compile" after making changes. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/layout-and-reframing-7.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=ec92ad103086894835da6c02a6224d9c) ### How to change brand template for my current clip? To change your brand templates, click the dropdown on the top right side of the editing panel, and select a brand template you want to apply to this clip. You can also go to the "**Brand template settings**" page to update your brand templates. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-59.png?s=4fd9338fba133c6804d3f97397665aa8) ### How to adjust my clip's framing? To have more control on the appearance of your video, simply click the "**Crop**" icon or double-click the video to open the Manual Reframe window. Then, you can easily adjust the framing to get the perfect view. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/VHEffbsgbIX8L5Jz/images/imgs/snapshot-68.png?s=59827723a95dfd2d3f453c1c2a7658e3) # Can I Link a Short to the Original Long Video? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/link-shorts-to-original-video Currently, YouTube does allow creators to **manually link a Short to a longer video using the YouTube Studio** interface. When you set a related video, viewers will see a clickable link below your Short, making it easy for them to watch the full version. However, **YouTube does not yet allow this to be done through their public API**. This means platforms like OpusClip cannot automatically set the original video link for you at the time of publishing. If you want to link a Short to its full-length video: * You will need to manually add a related video inside **YouTube Studio** after the Short is uploaded. * Alternatively, you can include a direct link to the full video in the **Short's description** or as a **pinned comment** to guide your viewers. YouTube Official Tutorial can be found [here](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/14075157?hl=en#:~:text=Add%20a%20related%20video). We're closely monitoring updates from YouTube and will integrate this feature automatically if API support becomes available! # Local File Uploads Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/local-file-uploads ### Can I upload local files? You can upload a local file that's **no more than 10GB and up to 10 hours long**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/local-file-uploads.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=9048a326d7bb9e9d8f38c1132fb07808) **NOTE:** Videos with non-integer frame rates are not currently supported. If your video has a non-integer frame rate, please upload it to **YouTube** first and drop the YouTube link as a workaround. YouTube will automatically convert it to a supported format. # Manage subscription through IAP (In-App Purchase) Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/manage-subscription-iap If you subscribed to OpusClip through the iOS App Store, all subscription management (downgrades, cancellations, renewals, refunds, etc.) is handled directly by Apple. Below are the steps for managing your subscription. ## Accessing Your Subscription 1. Open your iPhone Settings 2. Tap your **Apple ID / Apple Account** (your name at the top) 3. Select **Subscriptions** 4. Find **OpusClip** in the list \[!NOTE] Apple only allows one subscription per app per Apple ID. If you've already purchased a subscription with a specific Apple ID, you won’t be able to use that same Apple ID to subscribe again for a different OpusClip account. However, you can still purchase for that account via [OpusClip Web App](https://clip.opus.pro/subscription). ## Downgrade to a Lower Plan 1. Follow the steps of **Accessing Your Subscription** 2. Tap **See All Plans** 3. Select a lower-tier plan \[!NOTE] The change only takes effect at the end of the current billing cycle (not immediately). Before the current cycle ends, you can cancel the downgrade anytime by re-selecting your original plan. ## Re-subscribe or Renew If your subscription has expired or you canceled it: 1. Follow the steps of **Accessing Your Subscription** 2. Tap “**Renew**” ## Cancel Your Subscription 1. Follow the steps of **Accessing Your Subscription** 2. Tap **Cancel Subscription**. \[!NOTE] Your subscription will remain active until the end of the current billing cycle. ## Upgrade to a Higher Plan 1. Open the **OpusClip** app. 2. Go to the **Subscription** in your account menu 3. Tap **Upgrade** and select your desired plan. \[!NOTE] The change takes effect immediately. Apple will issue a prorated refund for the original subscription. ## Add More Packs Currently, the iOS app only supports purchasing **one pack**. If you need additional packs, you need to: 1. Cancel your IAP subscription via the above steps 2. Go to the [OpusClip Web App](https://clip.opus.pro/subscription) and subscribe there to [purchase more packs](https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/7285187-credit-related-questions#adding-more-packs). ## Request a Refund Refunds are processed by Apple, not OpusClip. Visit [Apple's refund request page](https://reportaproblem.apple.com/) and follow the instructions. # My account shows as free, but I am still getting billed Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/my-account-shows-as-free-still-getting-billed You may find that you are being charged for an OpusClip Pro or Starter Plan yet your account shows as Free on your subscription dashboard. Before reaching out to the Support Team, please check any potential email addresses of yours that you may have used at the time of sign up. Although you may be billed under one email, your user email address can be a different one! For example, you may have initially signed in and created your OpusClip Account with [EmailExample1@email.com](mailto:EmailExample1@email.com) and used [EmailExample2@email.com](mailto:EmailExample2@email.com) for your billing email address. In this case, if you sign into OpusClip with [EmailExample2@email.com](mailto:EmailExample2@email.com) (the Billing Email Address) you will see it is as a Free Account which can cause confusion. You will need to try and log into [EmailExample1@email.com](mailto:EmailExample1@email.com) (User Email Address) to see that there is an active subscription you are being charged for. # What are OpusClip's data security standards? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/opusclip-data-security-standards OpusClip is compliant with SOC 2 Type II cybersecurity standards established by the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA). We undertake a SOC 2 Type II audit by an independent third-party auditor every year, and the latest certifications and reports are shared in our [Trust Center](https://trust.opus.pro/). # Does OpusClip use my data to train AI models? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/opusclip-data-training For individual (non-enterprise) users, we **may** use your data to improve our AI models and enhance the quality of our services. We take privacy seriously — any data used for training is carefully selected and stripped of personally identifiable information. For enterprise customers, we **do not** use your data to train AI models. Data usage terms for enterprise clients are governed by contract. If you’re interested in enterprise solutions or would like more control over your data, please contact our sales team." # OpusSearch Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/opussearch ## What is OpusSearch? OpusSearch turns your video library into a searchable, reusable content engine — so you can grow faster without recording anything new. Most creators and teams spend hours re-watching old videos to find the right moments. OpusSearch removes that friction. It indexes your content, understands what's in it, and lets you search by topic, speaker, vibe, or phrase — so you can surface, repurpose, and publish clips in seconds. ### What you can do with OpusSearch * Search your entire video library for any topic, phrase, person, or mood * Find relevant clips from old videos and turn them into new posts * Discover what's trending in your content and act on it quickly * Organize your best clips into collections and find them in seconds * Auto-import new videos from YouTube so your library always stays fresh * Share access with your team and collaborate on content discovery ### When does OpusSearch become available? After your content is connected (via YouTube auto import or manual upload), OpusSearch indexes each video — analyzing transcripts, topics, speakers, mood, and key moments. You'll see an "Indexing in progress" screen while this runs. When indexing is complete, Search becomes available automatically. **Tip:** The more videos you have, the longer indexing may take. Grab a coffee and check back soon! ## How to use OpusSearch ### Set up your library When you first open Search, you'll see a setup flow. Owners and admins complete this to get the team up and running. * **Connect your YouTube account** — Click Connect Account, sign in, and select which playlists or channels to index. New videos published to those playlists will be imported and indexed automatically. * **Configure Video index settings** — Control which channels and playlists feed into OpusSearch. Access it anytime from Profile menu → Video index settings. * **Invite your team** — Click "Invite members" on the top right. You can name your team, set a logo for the team, and invite team members for collaboration. **Note on access:** Owners and admins have full access to setup and team management. Team members will see a waiting screen until the setup is complete. ### Search for any moment Go to Search in the app (desktop only) and type what you're looking for in your own words. Examples: * "best moments about building habits" * "funny reaction moments" * "the part where they explain the pricing model" * "inspiring story about failure" **Tip:** For exact phrase matches, wrap your query in quotes: `"we need to talk"` or `"credit card"` ### Preview results Click any clip card to preview the moment and confirm it's what you need. ### Refine with filters Use the filter panel on the right to narrow results by **People**, **Topics**, **Mood**, or **Duration**. Sort by Relevancy, Recently added, or Oldest added. ### Export in bulk Switch to Select mode to choose multiple clips and download or export them together — useful for building a batch of clips for a channel or a themed content drop. Your recent searches are saved on the Search landing page, so you can quickly return to previous queries. ## OmniSearch OmniSearch is a global search modal that lives across the entire app. It's the fastest way to find anything — a clip, a project, a collection, a setting, or to kick off AI generation — without navigating away from where you are. ### How to open it * **Mac:** `Command + K` * **Windows / Linux:** `Ctrl + K` * Press `Escape` to close or clear your search ### Tabs | Tab | What it does | | - | - | | **All** | Combined view of clips, projects, and collections (up to 5 of each) | | **Clips** | Search your indexed clip library | | **Projects** | Find any project by title | | **Collections** | Find any collection by name | | **Navigation** | Jump anywhere in the app: Dashboard, Editor, Analytics, Settings, Help Center, and more | | **Generate** | Trigger Clip Copilot and AI generation tools (My projects or inside a project only) | ### Keyboard shortcuts * **Alt + 1–5** (Windows) / **Option + 1–5** (Mac) — Switch between tabs in OmniSearch * **↑ / ↓** — Move through results * **Enter** — Open selected result * **Escape** — Close or clear ### OmniSearch vs. Search page — when to use which * Find a clip from your library → Clips tab (OmniSearch) or Search page * Find a project by title → Projects tab (OmniSearch) * Navigate to a page quickly → Navigation tab (OmniSearch) * Start AI generation → Generate tab * Browse, filter, and bulk export clips → Search page ## My projects & Collections **My projects** is your library home base — all your projects, organized in one place. From here you can browse projects, create a new collection, or submit a new video for indexing. To get there: click **My projects** in the app navigation, or open OmniSearch → Navigation → My projects. ### Collections Collections let you group related clips together by campaign, client, series, or any theme. You can search collections by name directly in OmniSearch → Collections tab. For the full guide on creating and managing collections, see [Collections](/docs/article/collections). > [!NOTE] > > Collections are available on **Trial, Pro, Max, and Business** plans. ## Trends Trends shows you which topics are gaining traction in your library right now — so you can surface the right clips and publish at the right moment. On the Search landing page (before you type anything), scroll down to **Trending in your content**. Click any trending topic to see the related clips immediately. ### Using Trends in your workflow 1. Open Search and browse Trending in your content 2. Spot a topic that's gaining traction 3. Click the topic to see related clips 4. Export the best moments and publish You can also refresh trends for an updated view, or give feedback (thumbs up / thumbs down) to improve suggestions over time. ## Tips & Filters ### Search tips * **Use natural language.** Describe the moment the way you'd explain it: "the part where they talk about fear of failure," not just "fear." * **Use quotes for exact phrases.** Wrap a specific phrase in quotes to match it literally: `"that's the secret"` * **Start broad, then filter.** Search something general and narrow down using filters. * **Try synonyms.** If results are thin, try a different word for the same concept. * **Check Most Recent Clips** if search feels empty — this confirms whether your content has been indexed yet. ### Filters * **People** — Filter by speaker or person who appears in the clip * **Topics** — Filter by detected topic or category (e.g. marketing, health, money) * **Mood** — Filter by emotional tone (upbeat, serious, funny, inspiring, etc.) * **Duration** — Filter by clip length (under 15 sec, 15–60 sec, etc.) **Tip:** Filters only appear when OpusSearch has that data for your clips. Videos with clear audio and focused content tend to get richer filter options. ### Sorting * **Relevancy** — Best match first * **Recently added** — Most recently indexed clips first * **Oldest added** — Oldest indexed clips first ## FAQ ### General **Is OpusSearch available to everyone?** Access depends on your plan and organization. If you see "no permission to access search," contact your org admin or reach out to support. **Is OpusSearch available on mobile?** OpusSearch is currently desktop-only. **Can my team use OpusSearch together?** Yes. As an owner or admin, invite team members from Team settings. Once indexed, everyone on the team can search the same library. ### Setup & Indexing **Why am I seeing "Indexing in progress"?** Your content is being prepared for search. Indexing runs in the background and can take some time depending on how many videos you have. Search becomes available automatically when it's done. **I connected YouTube but don't see my videos. What's wrong?** Make sure you selected at least one playlist or channel in Video index settings. If you did, check back in a few minutes — indexing takes time. ### Search Results **Why am I getting no results for my search?** Try these in order: remove quotes and simplify the query → use fewer or broader words → try a synonym → apply fewer filters → check Most Recent Clips to confirm content is indexed. **Why do some clips have fewer details (no topics, no mood)?** Details like topics, speakers, and mood depend on what OpusSearch detected during indexing. Videos with clear audio and focused content tend to get richer metadata. **Can I search for a specific person in my videos?** Yes, use the People filter if your content has been indexed with speaker detection. ### Access & Permissions **I'm a team member and Search isn't available yet. What do I do?** Your owner or admin needs to finish setup. Let them know, or check via OmniSearch → Navigation → Manage your team. **I don't see the Generate tab in OmniSearch.** The Generate tab is only available when you're on the My projects page or inside a project. Navigate there first, then open OmniSearch. ### Still stuck? Open OmniSearch → Navigation → Help Center, or contact support from your profile menu. # Pause or Cancel a Free Trial Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/pause-or-cancel-a-free-trial At this moment, we do not support pausing a Free Trial Pro Account. A Free Trial Pro Account will automatically convert to a Free Forever Account after 7 days. If you'd like to delete your account during your free trial, follow [this article on how to delete your OpusClip account](/docs/article/deleting-your-opusclip-account). # Payments & Billing info Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/payments-and-billing-info ## How are subscription payments processed? Opus Clip processes subscription payments automatically via Stripe, using the credit card information you provide and in accordance with your chosen billing cycle. Please note that we currently only accept payment methods supported by Stripe. If any suspicious payment activity is detected by either us or Stripe, due to potential fraud, we reserve the right to suspend your account and forfeit any existing credits. ## Do I need to enter a credit card to try Opus Clip? If you are in one of the countries we serve at full capacity, no. There's no need to provide credit card details to begin your free trial with Opus Clip. You can start creating clips right away. If you wish to continue using Opus Clip beyond the trial period, you can upgrade to a paid plan or join the free plan, which provides additional video upload hours each month or year. ## I want to update my billing information You can update your billing and invoice in the Billing & Invoice details at the Subscription dashboard. Any changes will take effect at the start of the next billing cycle. And we are working on the feature to have the option to add VAT numbers. It should be here soon! ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/J3KaXxvTpe6yxUJ5/images/imgs/payments-and-billing-info-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=J3KaXxvTpe6yxUJ5\&q=85\&s=17f7fdd31c685860e67d6db944bf53bd) ## How can I change my bank card info on your website? 1. Click ”Billing & Invoice details” on ”Subscription” page: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/J3KaXxvTpe6yxUJ5/images/imgs/payments-and-billing-info-2.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=J3KaXxvTpe6yxUJ5\&q=85\&s=7c51220a59d183a24b088e276e2d4224) 2. Click ”Add payment method“: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/payments-and-billing-info-3-f.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=a0decf67878ce27e48116938f46be289) 3. After adding the new card, you can choose the new card as ”make default” and ”Delete” the old one. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/payments-and-billing-info-4-f.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=50dafc827ee581422e005b1d9f96cf46) ## Can I pay with UPI? (India only) Yes. If you're in India, you can pay for any paid plan using UPI via Stripe. 1. Go to checkout and select UPI as your payment method. 2. Enter your name and billing address (India is pre-filled). 3. Click **Subscribe** — a QR code will appear. Scan it with any UPI app (Google Pay, PhonePe, Paytm, etc.) to complete payment. ## ACH and Wire transfer ACH and wire transfer are only available for OpusClip Business Plan. If you need such payment options, please fill out this form: [https://www.opus.pro/contact](https://www.opus.pro/contact) # Plans Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/plans-and-credits # What Kind of Plans Do You Offer? ## Free Forever Our Free Plan is our basic plan but is free forever! You can take advantage of the following benefits without needing to pay such as: 1. 60 processing minutes per month 2. AI Captions with emojis and keyword highlighter 3. Importing video sources from YouTube and local files 4. 1 Brand Template ## Starter Our Starter Plan is our mid level plan just above the Free Forever Plan but below the Pro Plan. With the Starter Plan you can enjoy benefits such as: 1. 150 processing minutes per month 2. Faster processing time compared to Free and Trial users 3. Additional importing video sources from Google Drive, Vimeo, Zoom, Rumble, StreamYard 4. Editing capability 5. Social media posting to YouTube, TikTok, and Instagram 6. And much more! ## Pro Our Pro Plan is our top tier plan that offers great value compared to our Starter Plan! With the Pro Plan you can enjoy the following benefits, such as: 1. 300 processing minutes per month or 3,600 per year (depending on if you opt for a monthly Pro Plan or an annual Pro Plan) 2. Even more importing video sources such as Twitch, Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter/X, Dropbox, Loom, Riverside, Frame.io, StreamYard, Apple Podcast, Zoom Link, [Medal.tv](https://medal.tv/). See the full list of [supported video sources](/docs/article/video-sources-supported). 3. Access to 16:9, 1:1, and 9:16 aspect ratios for your clips 4. The ability to export to Adobe Premiere Pro & DaVinci Resolve 5. Even more social media posting to X, Facebook, Linkedin, Pinterest, Threads, and Bluesky 6. Social media scheduling to YouTube, Instagram, TikTok, Linkedin, Facebook, X, Pinterest, Threads, and Bluesky 7. Access to Team Workspaces to collaborate! * Each pack includes 2 users. Adding additional packs will allot you 2 more users. Up to 4 users max per Team Workspace. 8. The ability to save your projects to your 100GB cloud storage * Custom assets and overlays will share the same storage 9. AI B-Roll generation 10. And much more! > [!NOTE] > > The Pro Plan is our only plan that is offered on a monthly or yearly cycle. It is also the only plan that allows you to add more packs to gain more credits and seats (up to a maximum of 4 seats at 2 packs). For more information, check out our pricing plans [here](https://www.opus.pro/pricing). ## Business For organizations that need over 10 seats, large volume usage, custom solutions, or API, please fill out this form: [https://www.opus.pro/contact](https://www.opus.pro/contact) All video sources available in the Pro plan are also included in Business. See the full list of [supported video sources](/docs/article/video-sources-supported). # How do I cancel or downgrade my subscription? ## Cancel your plan **A quick heads-up! By canceling, you'll lose some awesome features like:** * **More credits** — Create and publish more engaging clips with ease of mind. * **Virality score** — Know your content's viral potential. * **Watermark-free videos** — Export clean, professional-quality content **Are you absolutely sure you want to cancel?** After **3 days**, your projects won't be accessible anymore. 😢 🔗 **Take another look at your projects, your creativity deserves it!** You can easily cancel or downgrade your subscription from your Opus Clip subscription page. To access your subscription page, navigate to your profile and click on **Subscription** in the drop-down menu. Any changes will take effect at the start of the next billing cycle. Click [here](https://clip.opus.pro/subscription?utm_source=intercom-subscription-page-link) to easily enter your subscription page! 1. Click **Manage plan**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY/images/imgs/plans-credits-manage-plan.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY\&q=85\&s=110f73416c7cd46db35a832b94c7f6df) 2. Click **Cancel subscription** at the bottom. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY/images/imgs/plans-credits-cancel-subscription.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY\&q=85\&s=ca80f395a07b4c2d833aaa7bfd899d3b) 3. Click **Continue to cancel**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY/images/imgs/plans-credits-continue-to-cancel.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY\&q=85\&s=0e7584a2a0e8c920db0e94276a234a44) ## Downgrade your plan If you find that your usage is lower than anticipated, or basic features suffice for your needs, you have the flexibility to downgrade your plan from Pro to Starter, or remove packs to reduce costs. ## Downgrade to Starter plan You can change from Pro plan to Starter plan by clicking **Manage plan** on the subscription page. The change takes effect at the end of the current billing cycle, so you can continue to enjoy the benefits of your current plan until then. > [!WARNING] > > **Important Note**: You can only downgrade a **Pro Monthly** account to a Starter plan, as they are both Monthly plan types. If you'd like to downgrade a Pro Yearly to a Starter plan, please first cancel your plan, and then resubscribe under a Starter plan. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY/images/imgs/plans-credits-manage-plan.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY\&q=85\&s=110f73416c7cd46db35a832b94c7f6df) 1. Open the **Select a plan** menu. 2. Choose the plan you want to downgrade to and click **Downgrade**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY/images/imgs/plans-credits-downgrade-plan.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uGMdP3-U2HbMy3CY\&q=85\&s=9af627e0d75b3c5c308ccc57d2497d18) ## Reduce pack number If you have more than one pack, you can also reduce the number of packs you purchase each month by clicking on the “Add or remove packs/seats” button. The change takes effect at the end of the current billing cycle, so you can continue to enjoy the benefits of your current plan until then. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/plans-credits-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=758c9392569174b2ac580ae72712df04) ## Downgrade to Free Plan If you don't want to continue your subscription, we also have a Free plan provided for you, and you will get 60 minutes of credits immediately when you do so. However, since your videos will be watermarked if you change to the Free plan, we won't allow you to change to Free plan unless you have less than 30 minutes of credits left. If you have more than 30 minutes of credits and you want to discontinue your subscription, you should cancel instead. The change takes place immediately, which means that you will lose all your paid features when you downgrade to the Free plan. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/plans-credits-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=4f0633854a57ea3c6c33cd3496b032b1) ## Can I just buy extra credits or extra seats? You can buy top-up credits from your subscription page. Click **Add more credits**. You still can't buy extra seats on their own. You will need to purchase an additional pack, which grants you additional processing credits and seats. * Each additional pack provides 300 more credits per month for video processing * Each additional pack provides 2 additional team seats, up to a maximum of 4 seats (reached at 2 packs) # Post to X (formerly Twitter) Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/post-to-x OpusClip gives **Pro and Enterprise** users two ways to post to **X**: * **Post Now** - Instantly sends your clip to your connected **X** account and publishes it to your public feed. * **Schedule** - Lets you select a future date and time for the post to go live, directly from within the OpusClip platform. This feature allows for fast, flexible distribution to **X** without needing to leave your workflow. Each **X** post uses **3 credits**, and you can post up to **150 posts per day**. ## Post on X (formerly Twitter) 1. **Navigate to your project**: Open your project's results page. 2. **Select Clips**: Click on the calendar icon to post or schedule your chosen clip ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/post-to-x-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=4ae2156af639dca91c90b1ac94fbd48a) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/post-to-x-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=7b5892d873c17f8043603c6580673b6b) 3. **Publish to X**: * **Select account**: Select the **X** platform you want to post to * **Credit Usage**: Credit usage for each post will be indicated beside your account name, and total credit usage is shown at the bottom of the page. * **Post/Schedule**: Click on "Post Now" to post immediately or click on "Select time" to schedule your clip. Your credits will be automatically deducted. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qU6MNGtJ54KAXLFI/images/imgs/post-to-x-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qU6MNGtJ54KAXLFI\&q=85\&s=f7877535a6c5cb9545ddfad9803ed2c9) # FAQ – X Posts (formerly Twitter) ## How many credits does an X post consume? Each **X** post uses **3 credits** per X account. For example, posting one clip to two X accounts uses 6 credits. You'll see the total credit usage at the bottom of the posting window, next to the "Select time" and "Publish now" buttons. ## Did the cost of posting to X change? Yes. Starting Sept 24, 2026, each X post uses 3 credits instead of 1. Posts you scheduled before Sept 24, 2026 keep their original cost of 1 credit, and if one of them fails or you delete it, we refund 1 credit. ## Can I schedule posts to X? Yes. You can schedule a clip to be published at any future date and time using the "**Select Time**" button. ## How do I edit or delete a scheduled X Post? Go to the Calendar page in the left-hand thumbnail toolbar. From there, you can click on the desired clip and edit the caption or scheduled time, or delete the post entirely. If you delete your post, the credits it froze are automatically refunded. ## If I delete a scheduled X Post, will I get my credits back? Yes. If you delete a scheduled post, the credits it froze are automatically refunded to your account. ## What happens if my post fails to publish? Will I get my credits back? If the post fails due to connection issues or platform errors, the credits it froze are automatically refunded. No action is required. ## How many times can I post to X per day? You can post or schedule up to 150 times per day. ## Can I edit the caption before posting? Yes. You'll have the option to customize the caption and hashtags before clicking “**Post Now**” or "**Select Time**". After posting, any edits must be made manually on **X**. ## Where does the post appear after publishing? It will appear immediately on your connected **X** profile in your public feed. ## What if I don't see my post on X? Make sure your **X** account is still connected. Check your Post History in OpusClip and refresh your profile. If the post fails, your credits will have already been refunded. # Posting Rate Limits Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/posting-rate-limits Social media platforms have different rate limits for posts being scheduled based on their Developer API that we must use for our Scheduler features. * **X (Twitter)**: 150 per day > [!WARNING] > > There's also a daily cap on the total number of posts allowed from OpusClip, across all users—not just an individual limit. If you are blocked by the daily cap, please try again tomorrow. * **TikTok**: 4 per minute, 15 per day * **Instagram**: 40 per day * **YouTube**: soft limit of 15 per day. Any posts after the first 15 on any given 24 hour period might fail to publish. # What is your Privacy Policy? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/privacy-policy All users who sign up for an online account with OpusClip must agree to our Privacy Policy, which can be found here: [https://www.opus.pro/privacy-policy](https://www.opus.pro/privacy-policy) # Reactivate a Deleted Account Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/reactivate-a-deleted-account ### How do I reactivate my deleted OpusClip account? If you'd like to reactivate your deleted account, just sign back in to OpusClip with the same account you used before, using the same email or sign-in method (like Google). Your account will be active again right away. # Requesting a feature? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/request-a-feature Submit your request via this [link](https://opusclip.canny.io/feature-requests), and post your feature request up there. We prioritize feature requests with the most upvotes onto our roadmap, and will notify you once the feature you requested or supported is under review/planned/completed! # Resolving Recent YouTube Video Upload Issues Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/resolving-youtube-upload-issues Recently, users have faced challenges uploading videos from YouTube links due to YouTube's download policy updates. These changes have temporarily increased failure rates for YouTube link uploads. ## Alternative Upload Methods If you're experiencing issues with YouTube links, consider using these alternative methods to upload your videos to OpusClip: 1. **Local Uploads:** Download the video to your device and upload it directly. You can download your videos from YouTube Studio. We support local uploads with a maximum file size of 10GB. 2. **Other Supported Sources:** You can also upload videos from the following platforms: * Apple Podcast * Google Drive * Vimeo * Zoom * Zoom Clips * Rumble * Twitch * Facebook * LinkedIn * X * Dropbox * Riverside * Loom * Frame.io * StreamYard * [Medal.tv](https://medal.tv/) ## Our Commitment Our team is diligently working to accommodate to the latest YouTube changes. We are dedicated to restoring seamless functionality as quickly as possible. We appreciate your patience and understanding during this time. Thank you for choosing OpusClip. # Saving Your Projects Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/saving-your-projects ## How long will OpusClip save my projects? To ensure a cost-effective service for our large user base, OpusClip cannot store all projects indefinitely. The storage duration depends on your current plan: * **Trial users**: Projects expire **7 days** after creation * **Free plan**: Projects expire **3 days** after creation * **Starter plan**: Projects expire **30 days** after creation * **Pro plan**: Projects expire **30 days** after creation ## Can I keep my projects for more than 30 days? Yes! **Pro plan users** have the option to save projects permanently by storing them in the cloud. Every Pro user receives **100GB of cloud storage** in total for their saved projects and uploaded assets. (learn more in [Cloud Storage](/docs/article/cloud-storage)) > [!WARNING] > > To ensure you don't lose important work, we strongly recommend saving critical projects and clips locally to your computer, even if you're using cloud storage. * **Pro plan users** can manually save individual projects to cloud storage. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN/images/imgs/saving-your-projects-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN\&q=85\&s=3abfc8a4eb19fab9342b9dcb9d1f7f31) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN/images/imgs/saving-your-projects-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN\&q=85\&s=ca9c15af71ce7f35a995f5606d4b1e8d) * **Pro plan users** can enable **auto-save** to automatically store all future projects in the cloud. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN/images/imgs/saving-your-projects-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN\&q=85\&s=1fb427d91a5d43d40f8a6cc923b04273) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN/images/imgs/saving-your-projects-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7xj-n-AD5Xks8MnN\&q=85\&s=671d605028327d3329d0fc0ad5ad4643) ## What happens when a project expires? Once a project expires, it will be automatically removed from My projects page and can no longer be recovered. To avoid losing access, please do one of the following before your project expires: * Save it to cloud storage * Make your edits and export the clip before expiration # Schedule Your Clips Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/schedule-clips ## Schedule your post from the project page You can schedule and post your clips to your social platforms directly from the results page: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/nfs8k7joMOwNh3iE/images/imgs/screenshot0413-03.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=nfs8k7joMOwNh3iE\&q=85\&s=cfbd7454e51294a6a3270dd107b15569) ## Schedule your posts using the social media calendar To schedule your posts from the calendar page, please: 1. Click “Calendar” in the middle left navigation bar 2. Choose your desired date on the calendar 3. From there, choose the clips and platforms for your posts. Our AI will auto-generate descriptions and hashtags You can upload your local videos and schedule them from the calendar. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/schedule-clips-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=c5190d41dc1beb8dd9f0a563b5f8cefa) ## Cancel scheduled posts 1. Click the **Calendar** tab on the side bar. 2. Find your scheduled post in the calendar and click on it. 3. Click the **Delete** button on the popup and delete the scheduled post. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/schedule-clips-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=3302881bdcee649ee603abf115d74a4f) > [!TIP] > > You can also post clips directly from the **OpusClip iOS app**. Tap the scheduler icon on any clip to open the post page, edit your title and description, select platforms, and publish. # Scheduler FAQ Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/scheduler-faq * [Instagram Connection](/docs/article/connecting-your-instagram-account) * [Troubleshooting: Posting to Social Accounts](/docs/article/scheduler-faq-troubleshoot) * [Other Scheduler Related Questions](/docs/article/scheduler-faq-other) # Other Scheduler Related Questions Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/scheduler-faq-other ## Can I upload my local video to schedule on OpusClip? Yes, you can! Here is how you can do this: 1. Go to the Social Media Calendar ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/scheduler-faq-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=4625ffc7c01319547edac816729b0b5b) 2. Select a date to post ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/scheduler-faq-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=c1870cdd9db7073e95c2567f45432547) 3. Upload your local video ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/scheduler-faq-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=47bd1a52f3992ed294c8464c646d339a) ### Limitations We only support mp4 files and files under 200MB for now. If you are uploading a TikTok video, please make sure that the FPS is above 23 to comply with platform rules. ## What happens when I edit and save a clip in a scheduled post? When you schedule a post, we will save the version of the clip at the time when the post is created. Therefore, if you edit and save the clip again after scheduling it, the changes will not be reflected in the scheduled post. You can schedule the clip again after editing it. ## Can I schedule posts beyond my project expiration date? Yes, you can schedule posts to a date even after your projects expire. We will save the clip when you create the posting schedule, so it won't be influenced by your project expiration. Even if you lose access to your project, your scheduled post will still be sent out. ## Why are my posts delayed for 1 minute when I schedule them? We will delay your posting schedule for 1 minute if there is already an existing one at the same time for the same account. Many platforms will detect if you are using automated posting tools, and will cause your posts to fail if you post too frequently. Due to this, we will add a slight delay between posts when posting. ### Post immediately For Pro plan users, you can post real time posts to YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, LinkedIn, Facebook Pages and X (Beta version). For Starter plan users, you can post real time posts to YouTube, TikTok and Instagram. ### Schedule future posts For Pro plan users, we support multiple Social Media Scheduler: YouTube, TikTok Feed, Instagram Reels, Facebook Page, LinkedIn, X (Beta version) and more is coming! For Starter plan users, you can only post real time posts. You can schedule posts simply by clicking on “Schedule” and post your content anytime you want! ## Facebook Account Limitations Note that we currently only support connections to Facebook Page due to limitations with Meta's API. Connections to Facebook Profiles and Facebook Groups are not supported for now. ## How many accounts can I add to each social media platform? Our Pro plan users can connect multiple accounts to each social media platform, up to a max of 6 total social media accounts. To add multiple accounts for one platform, simply choose “Add Accounts” and select that platform again. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/scheduler-faq-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=ae6bf1e31f897c53b60535ab0d831a05) ## How can I manage my social account connections? You can remove or add social account connections by selecting “Social accounts” in the dropdown menu. Note that your future posting schedules will be canceled once you remove your social connection. We will delete all your account information from our systems when you remove your account. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/scheduler-faq-5.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=8f4152fb8697c8a728ca4cd6fe3a4556) ## Reauthorize my account Your social accounts might sometimes get disconnected from OpusClip. This happens because we use APIs from social platforms like YouTube, Instagram, and TikTok to post clips to your accounts. As a security measure, these platforms periodically require you to reconnect your account to OpusClip. If you don't reauthorize your social accounts, you won't be able to post your clips through OpusClip. * This issue is most common with Instagram and Facebook. # Troubleshooting: Posting to Social Accounts Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/scheduler-faq-troubleshoot ## Why Did My Clip Post to YouTube as a Normal Video and Not a Short? In order for your clip to be posted as a YouTube Short, it must meet the following requirements: * Must be in Vertical Layout (9:16) * The video length must be under 180 Seconds If your clip meets these requirements and still isn't being posted as a short, please reach out to our support team! ## Why Are My Facebook Clips Not Posting As Reels when Using the Scheduler? Currently, we cannot autopost to Facebook Reels using the Scheduler. This is due to a limitation by Meta. Any video submitted to Facebook using the scheduler will be submitted as a normal video on your Facebook Feed. To post this clip as a reel, you will have to manually post it directly to Facebook and make sure it meets the following requirements: * Must be in Vertical Layout (9:16) * The video length must be under 180 Seconds # Select your Clip Length Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/select-clip-length You can select your clip length before processing a project by using the **CoPilot feature**. By default, the **Clip Length** is set to **Auto (0m-3m)**. Click on it to choose your preferred length from the dropdown menu. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/select-clip-length.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=7d92273775ac1b43198c80712825426d) # Use Prompts to Clip Specific Moments Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/select-keywords You can prompt specific moments using ClipBasic or ClipAnything: **ClipBasic**: Input keywords to help AI identify relevant moments in the video. Ensure the keywords are present in the speech or transcript for accurate results. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/keywords-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=745b837c4056f82e5f5f2f8339e04dab) **ClipAnything**: Use natural language prompts, sentences or keywords to locate scenes, actions, characters, events, emotional moments, viral topics, and more. To learn more about prompts, please visit [ClipAnything Prompts Manual](/docs/article/clip-anything-prompt-manual). You can use prompts to get clips in two ways in ClipAnything: 1. Before project submission in the clips settings section: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/keywords-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=15f65346b02bc8e4e21bb571f7cbb859) 2. In the result page near the top of the screen: > [!TIP] > > Tip: You can reprompt as many times as you like to get more clips, if you are not satisfied with the results. You will also find suggested prompts that you can try in the input box, and clicking on it will start the process. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI/images/imgs/keywords-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=2FSMdgPPp0xAqQFI\&q=85\&s=94a42823102c5919f825b57b497e35fc) # Translate Subtitles to Another Language Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/select-subtitle-language You can translate captions to another language before clipping your video. After adding your video file or link, click **Get Clips in 1 Click > Speech Language**. Select **Translate To** to choose the language for translation (currently, only English is supported). ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/subtitle-language.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=717a66a252d29dee572debddc8d4f2fc) # Clip a Specific Timeframe Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/select-timeframe If you only need to process a specific portion of a 2-hour video, OpusClip makes it easy! Use our **Co-Pilot** feature to select and clip a specific timeframe from your video. After submitting your video, simply choose the desired start and end times to focus on just the part you need. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/timeframe.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=85be1f31e62bdbd945bc7a3ca12f875d) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/timeframe-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=98e5b4d587f2cebf400734202b9635d5) # Set a Custom Thumbnail Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/set-a-custom-thumbnail Your cover image is the first thing people see—make it count. Instead of relying on an auto-selected frame, you can now pick the perfect moment from your video or upload your own image before posting. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/cMoZMVR3clibFqv1/images/imgs/set-custom-thumbnail-01.gif?s=5e7cad9e51a2d5b0d6f8c7fbadb6ea57) ## How to set a thumbnail 1. Open a clip and click **Publish to Social Media** 2. Click **Edit cover** on the video preview 3. Choose how you want to set your thumbnail: * **Reselect** — scrub through your video and pick any moment as the cover * **Upload file** — upload your own photo as the thumbnail ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/cMoZMVR3clibFqv1/images/imgs/set-custom-thumbnail-02.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=cMoZMVR3clibFqv1\&q=85\&s=a6501f94d6523560bbef9f62c668bbab) ## Other ways to enter thumbnail selection You can also set your thumbnail from: * **Calendar** — schedule a video directly from the calendar view to access thumbnail selection * **Bulk Schedule** — when scheduling multiple posts at once, you can set thumbnails from the bulk schedule flow ## Apply cover to all posts at once If your clip is being posted across multiple platforms, you don't have to set the thumbnail one by one. After selecting your cover, click **Apply cover to all posts** to use the same thumbnail everywhere. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/cMoZMVR3clibFqv1/images/imgs/set-custom-thumbnail-03.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=cMoZMVR3clibFqv1\&q=85\&s=bc8f4209fe65fd8a93fbdc80dcbb6d1c) ## Edit a thumbnail after scheduling Already scheduled a post? You can still update the cover. Click on a scheduled post then click on OpusClip's Scheduler, click **Reschedule** and click **Edit cover** to make your changes. ## Platform availability Thumbnail selection is available on: | **Platform** | **Supported** | | - | - | | TikTok | ✅ | | Instagram | ✅ | | Facebook | ✅ | | LinkedIn | ✅ | | YouTube (videos over 3 min) | ✅ | | YouTube Shorts | ❌ | | X | ❌ | > [!TIP] > > For platforms that don't support custom thumbnails, we will default to your first frame. ## FAQ ### Can I upload any image as a thumbnail? Yes—JPEG and PNG files are supported. If the aspect ratio doesn't match your clip, you'll be able to reframe it before confirming. ### Can I change the thumbnail after I've already posted? Thumbnail changes after posting depend on each platform's own settings. We recommend setting it before you publish. ### I don't see the Edit cover button. Why? Thumbnail selection is available on Pro and Enterprise plans. # Share Projects with Collaborators Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/share-project > [!WARNING] > > **Are you sure your content is safe to share publicly?** > If you set your projects as **Public**, your content will be accessible to anyone with the link. Please ensure it is safe to share. If you want to share your projects with someone outside your OpusClip team workspace, you can change the private setting of your projects and share the project 1. Go to the project page or My projects page and find the share button as shown below: ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/rxZEEu_lf9es6hlu/images/imgs/share-project-my-projects.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=rxZEEu_lf9es6hlu\&q=85\&s=65fc15ffe0135ded1233b4762a3f4d3a) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/rxZEEu_lf9es6hlu/images/imgs/share-project-clip-page.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=rxZEEu_lf9es6hlu\&q=85\&s=066b4c657c181ed97e8517fc8c92573b) 2. Change the **Privacy settings** of your project from **Default** to **Public**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/share-project-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=cb9c4c0a1d70d9a044bc15fca342cfdc) 3. Copy the link and share it with your teammate or your customer. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1/images/imgs/share-project-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=qs18v3VqmSqKrXX1\&q=85\&s=461c79ce597737438f2ae53cea53bac2) # Snap Editing Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/snap-editing Snap Editing makes clips and overlays magnetic in the timeline — when you drag or trim near a key point, they lock into place automatically. No more nudging frame by frame. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/DYFc88ZZOZwi_GAD/images/imgs/snap-editing-overview.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=DYFc88ZZOZwi_GAD\&q=85\&s=f553425e796e62d8125083e332ceec2f) ## What it snaps to When snapping is on, clips and overlays will snap to: * Start and end of main video segments * Start and end of layout blocks * Current playhead position * Start and end of other timeline layers ## How to turn it on or off Click the **Snap Editing** icon in the timeline toolbar, or press **S** on your keyboard to toggle it on or off anytime. ## How it works Drag any clip or overlay and it locks into alignment when it gets close enough to a snap point. The same applies when trimming — drag the left or right edge of any clip and it snaps to nearby alignment points. A vertical guideline appears across the timeline to confirm the snap. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/DYFc88ZZOZwi_GAD/images/imgs/snap-editing-timeline.gif?s=526e77324bc9035786a42ac129d50ae9) ## FAQ ### Is Snap Editing on by default? Yes — it's on by default. You can toggle it off anytime from the toolbar or by pressing **S** on your keyboard. # Is OpusClip SOC 2 compliant? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/soc2-compliance OpusClip is in the process of getting certified for SOC 2 compliance by an independent third-party auditor, and we are scheduled to share our results in our [Trust Center](https://trust.opus.pro/) in November 2024. # Something went wrong with Facebook Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/something-went-wrong-with-facebook ## "Something went wrong with Facebook. Cannot find any Facebook page related to this account. Please create a page first or use another account." | Cause | Solution | Resources | | :-: | :-: | :-: | | Our platform was unable to locate a Facebook Page linked to the Facebook Account that you're currently logged into. | Create a Facebook Page while signed into your Facebook Account. | [How to create a Facebook Page](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1199464373557428?id=418112142508425) | # Speech Cleanup Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/speech-cleanup ## Remove Filler Words and Pauses Speech Cleanup detects 90%+ of fillers and pauses — you see exactly what gets removed before anything is deleted. You're in control, not the AI. Click **Speech Cleanup** in the top left of the editor. * **Remove Fillers** — all detected fillers are highlighted in your transcript instantly. Check or uncheck which types to keep, then remove in one click. Includes "um", "uh", phrases like "you know", and stutter repeats. * **Remove Pauses** — by default 0.5 sec, but you can set your silence threshold with the slider and cut all detected pauses in one click. No more choppy cuts from over-aggressive defaults. * **Remove Bad Takes** — detects full sentence-level problems that fillers and pauses can't catch: retakes, restarts, self-corrections, and phrase repetitions. Click **Detect now** to scan your transcript. Every flagged segment is highlighted inline with a count, so you can review before cutting anything. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wnpDZLtxROMcXaql/images/imgs/speech-cleanup-1.gif?s=371f39bfd314a277e6959916d8f7911f) ## You're in Control Use the filler word checklist to select exactly which types to remove — or uncheck anything you want to keep. Nothing gets cut without your approval. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/hTz48HcgtulyiUv0/images/imgs/speech-cleanup-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=hTz48HcgtulyiUv0\&q=85\&s=390bc4b1a4175669c5f87119a4c8d165) ## Set Your Own Pause Duration Drag the slider to set how long a silence needs to be before it counts as a pause. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/hTz48HcgtulyiUv0/images/imgs/speech-cleanup-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=hTz48HcgtulyiUv0\&q=85\&s=7619242e6870b0c55b640927e82d7a0c) ## Remove Bad Takes Click **Detect now** to scan your transcript — every retake, restart, and self-correction is flagged inline. From there you can go through them one by one and remove them individually, or click **Remove all**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wnpDZLtxROMcXaql/images/imgs/speech-cleanup-bad-takes-panel.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wnpDZLtxROMcXaql\&q=85\&s=a6f19f806af15723c38070b31460808d) You can also track the detected bad takes from the transcript (highlighted in orange) and decide whether you want to keep or remove them. This ensures you are the one in control. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wnpDZLtxROMcXaql/images/imgs/speech-cleanup-bad-takes-transcript.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wnpDZLtxROMcXaql\&q=85\&s=ec84600b8cae04103b178db65546d366) ## Clean Up Your Transcript View After removing, use the **Filter out** menu at top of the transcript to hide deleted parts for a cleaner view. Any remaining filler words in the transcript will appear in gray so they're easy to spot. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/hTz48HcgtulyiUv0/images/imgs/speech-cleanup-4.gif?s=0037cb7a97fb1f1e353b136ba288a0c2) # Speech Enhancement Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/speech-enhancement ## What is the Voice Enhancement feature? With Speech Enhancement, you can easily improve your video audio quality by reducing noise and isolating voices, resulting in clearer, more professional-sounding audio. It ensures your video content sounds polished and clear, making it perfect for professionals, creators, or anyone who values high-quality audio. By removing background noise, isolating voices, and boosting your voice volume and clarity, you can enhance your content effortlessly without extra steps or tools. ## What Speech Enhancement Does Speech Enhancement does the following at once: 1. **Noise Reduction**: Reduces background noise, helping to clarify voices. 2. **Background Noise Removal**: Filters out environmental sounds, leaving a cleaner voice track. 3. **Voice Isolation**: Separates the primary voice from other audio elements, focusing on clarity. * **Please keep in mind this will create a separate audio track in the editor.** 4. **Voice Volume Boost**: Lifts low or uneven speech to a clear, professional level, so quiet recordings are no longer too soft to hear. ## How do I use the Speech Enhancement feature? <video type="video/mp4" /> * **Location**: The feature is accessible directly within the editor on the left-hand side, under the "AI Enhance" tab. You can apply it to any audio clip on the timeline. * **Toggle Option**: You can toggle Speech Enhancement on or off at any time, allowing you to compare enhanced audio with the original. * **Fine-tune the Result**: After turning it on, use the Noise reduction and Voice enhancement sliders to control how much noise is removed and how much your voice is boosted. * **Share Feedback**: Use the thumbs up / thumbs down below the sliders to tell us how the result sounds. ### Fine-tune your result Speech Enhancement applies recommended defaults automatically, but you're in control. Drag the **Noise reduction** slider to set how much background noise is removed, and the **Voice enhancement** slider to set how loud and clear your voice sounds — your adjustments are applied automatically. ## Compatibility and Plans Speech Enhancement is **currently offered as a Pro plan feature**. All Pro users have access to Speech Enhancement, which is optimized for frequent use and high-quality audio results. ## FAQ **If I toggle on Speech Enhancement, will any newly added sections also have their voice enhanced automatically?** Yes, this is correct. If you have toggled Speech Enhancement and added a section to an existing clip, the newly added section should automatically have the voice of the feature enhanced. **What do the two sliders do?** Noise reduction controls how much background noise is removed. Voice enhancement controls how much your voice volume and clarity are boosted. Both start at a recommended default, and you can adjust them anytime. # How Can I Split My Clip into 2 Clips and Download Them? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/split-my-clip At this time, we do not have a feature that can automatically split your clips into two separate clips for you to download them. However, we do have a workaround found below. 1. Open up the clip in the editor. 2. Move the playhead to the point where you want to split the clip. 3. Press the **D** key or use the keyboard shortcut **CMD + B** (on Mac) to split the clip at that point. 4. Delete either half of your split clip. 5. Navigate to the top right hand corner and click **Export** and choose **Download HD**. 6. Revert the deletion you made by clicking the **Undo** arrow. 7. Repeat steps 4-5 with the other half of your split clip. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/split-my-clip-1.gif?s=2207c80129434742d0740d4a19500761) # Upgrading from Starter Plan to Pro Plan: Troubleshooting Payment Issues Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/starter-to-pro-plan If your attempt to upgrade from the Starter plan to the Pro plan has failed, it may be due to strict Strong Customer Authentication (SCA) compliance requirements set by your card issuing bank. We are working on implementing SCA requirements to streamline this process in the future. ## What You Can Do: In the meantime, if you're facing issues upgrading due to these requirements, please contact our support team directly for assistance at our [contact page](https://www.opus.pro/contact-support), and we will work with you to complete your upgrade. We appreciate your patience and are here to help you every step of the way. > [!NOTE] > > Keep an eye on future updates as we roll out SCA compliance to enhance your > user experience. # Subject Tracking Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/subject-tracking # What is Subject Tracking? Subject Tracking intelligently follows a person or object in your video, adjusting the frame to keep it centered and in focus. This eliminates shaky, awkward cropping and delivers smooth, cinematic reframing — perfect for vertical shorts, social media clips, or polished edits. # 1. Moving Speaker Tracking (Automatic) **Ideal for:** Videos with **one primary speaker** who moves naturally (e.g., pacing during a presentation, gesturing in a vlog). ## How It Works: * **Automatic Detection:** OpusClip identifies the active speaker using voice and motion cues. * **Smooth Camera Shifting:** The frame adjusts gradually to follow the speaker’s movements, avoiding jarring jumps. * **Hands-Free Editing:** No setup required—just upload your video, and let the AI handle the rest. **Pro Tip:** Use this for interviews, monologues, or solo content where the speaker is the clear focal point. # 2. Manual Subject Tracking (Customizable) **Ideal for:** Creative control in complex scenes — track **any subject** (human or non-human) or switch focus between multiple subjects. ## How It Works: 1. Select a scene that you want to reframe from the timeline 2. Click **Tracker** to enable manual subject tracking. 3. Click to select the subject you want to track. Once selected, the AI will automatically identify and track the subject for you. 4. You can click again to expand the selection box. 5. You can also select different subjects to track in different scenes. Your selected subject is only identified and tracked in the underlined scenes. To track another subject, click on a highlighted scene to choose another subject. 6. After the subject is selected, you can start tracking it. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Works for Any Content * Track **non-human subjects:** Products, animals, vehicles, or text (e.g., following a chef's hands in a cooking demo or a drone in action). * Human tracking: Faces, full-body movement, or specific gestures. # FAQ ## Q: Can I track non-human subjects automatically? **A:** Automatic tracking prioritizes speakers. For objects/animals, use **Manual Subject Tracking**. ## Q: Can I combine automatic and manual tracking? **A:** Absolutely! The AI will automatically apply moving speaker tracking by default. If it doesn't perfectly follow your intended subject, you can always use manual tracking to fix it. # How to submit a video without clipping Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/submit-a-video-without-clipping To submit a full video without our AI making automatic clips, you can use our AI Copilot "Don't Clip" option. These options will be available after you submit your link or file. Once completed, this will generate a caption-only project with all of your specified content. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/video-sources-supported.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=978521531b7556bdb972d9f89c8f4135) We currently have a 15-minute restriction on this setting. # Supported Countries, Regions & Territories Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/supported-countries-regions-territories Our mission is to democratize video content creation and make it accessible to anyone with a story to tell or a passion to share. Geographic diversity is very important to us and we are actively working on enhancing our infrastructure to expand our reach in the near future. Although OpusClip can be accessed from anywhere in the world, here are the countries, regions and territories we officially support access from: 1. Albania 2. Andorra 3. Antigua and Barbuda 4. Argentina 5. Armenia 6. Australia 7. Austria 8. Azerbaijan 9. Bahamas 10. Bahrain 11. Barbados 12. Belarus 13. Belgium 14. Belize 15. Bolivia 16. Bosnia and Herzegovina 17. Botswana 18. Brazil 19. Bulgaria 20. Canada 21. Chile 22. Colombia 23. Costa Rica 24. Croatia 25. Cyprus 26. Czech Republic 27. Denmark 28. Dominica 29. Dominican Republic 30. Estonia 31. Fiji 32. Finland 33. France 34. Georgia 35. Germany 36. Greece 37. Grenada 38. Guyana 39. Hungary 40. Iceland 41. Ireland 42. India 43. Israel 44. Italy 45. Jamaica 46. Japan 47. Kiribati 48. Kosovo 49. Kuwait 50. Latvia 51. Liechtenstein 52. Lithuania 53. Luxembourg 54. Malaysia 55. Malta 56. Marshall Islands 57. Mexico 58. Micronesia 59. Moldova 60. Monaco 61. Montenegro 62. Netherlands 63. New Zealand 64. North Macedonia 65. Norway 66. Papua New Guinea 67. Paraguay 68. Peru 69. Philippines 70. Poland 71. Portugal 72. Puerto Rico 73. Qatar 74. Romania 75. Saint Kitts and Nevis 76. Saint Lucia 77. Saint Vincent and the Grenadines 78. Samoa 79. San Marino 80. Serbia 81. Singapore 82. Slovakia 83. Slovenia 84. Solomon Islands 85. South Africa 86. South Korea 87. Spain 88. Suriname 89. Sweden 90. Switzerland 91. Tonga 92. Trinidad and Tobago 93. Turkey 94. United Arab Emirates 95. United Kingdom 96. United States 97. Uruguay 98. Vatican City 99. Venezuela # What are your Terms of Service? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/terms-of-service All users who sign up for an online account with OpusClip must agree to our Terms of Service, which can be found here: [https://www.opus.pro/terms-of-service](https://www.opus.pro/terms-of-service) # Things You Should Set Up First Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/things-you-should-set-up-first Welcome to OpusClip! Below you will find the top things to set up to get you started with OpusClip. ## Create Your Brand Templates **Brand template** is a place where you can set up your branding preferences and apply them to all of your clips. To set up your brand template, click the icon below the house icon or visit [here](https://clip.opus.pro/brand-templates). On the **Brand Template** page, you can set up your preferences. Free and Starter users can set up 1 brand template, and Pro users are able to set up 2 brand templates. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/5TopqQ1f1asfSLn4/images/imgs/snapshot-112.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=5TopqQ1f1asfSLn4\&q=85\&s=41b46ce325607568f26e651fdc4185d0) On the left hand side are the settings that will change your **Brand Template**. You can click onto the areas to expand out the settings. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0408-01.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=d2952e9acff26a454454ce5b2fa26ae4) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0408-02.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=3a392269aa3d28a468c376fac916446a) Click **Save template** at the top right hand corner or from template name dropdown as shown in the screenshot below. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-115.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=21c229c303702e36758764cc33882a14) ## Add Your Social Accounts for 1-Click Posting You can connect your social media accounts to make it easier to post directly from OpusClip. Go to the left tool bar and click **Social Accounts**. When hovering over it, it will display Social Accounts. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-116.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=b2be4a08ce74a7a8a88e907a65e9af9b) Once you've done so, a popup menu will open showing your currently connected accounts and it will also allow you to add new accounts by clicking on the **Add Account button**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-117.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=f7f718d0c7ab7db7cb9bc0ecb3f16d8c) Click the **Add Account button**, select your desired social media platform, and follow the steps in the pop-up to complete the connection. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC/images/imgs/snapshot-118.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=wWf8oL-5UZ9lZUDC\&q=85\&s=c859a2db860eaefd214bc12e26151a45) ## Setup Your Team Workplace You can create a **Team Workplace** and invite your teammates to join. Here is how you can do this: 1. Click your **Profile image** on the left sidebar and go to **Create a team** ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0408-03.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=a0e349137d80d3b824150e4d423ddbe8) 2. Name your **Team Workspace**, add a logo and create the team ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/add-team-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=42da578d10670081b00aac0061dd26e0) 3. Copy the **invitation link** and send it to your teammates. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/add-team-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=100376947ea20c4750a1e75fbb84baed) 4. Then your teammates can join the team by clicking into the **invitation link**. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/add-team-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=d26f0fce080267a263e35eda2d649249) 5. As the **team owner**, you can also manage the team members on the **Team settings** page ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6/images/imgs/add-team-5.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=CsfV__T0-LAmxfr6\&q=85\&s=a99ce15d4414b8205f65931872dd84ec) # Understanding TikTok's Policy Changes Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/tiktok-policy-changes ## Have TikTok policies changed? We acknowledge concerns regarding possible changes to TikTok's video censorship policies upon its recent service restoration. While these changes have not been officially confirmed by TikTok, we want to assure you that OpusClip is dedicated to staying informed and compliant. ## Our Commitment: 1. **Active Communication**: We are in ongoing discussions with our TikTok contacts to verify any policy adjustments. 2. **Timely Updates**: As soon as we receive confirmed information, we will promptly update our practices in line with the new policies. 3. **Support**: Please reach out to our customer support at our [contact page](https://www.opus.pro/contact-support) with any questions or concerns. Our team is here to assist you. We appreciate your patience and understanding during this time. Stay tuned for the latest updates. Thank you for your continued trust in OpusClip. # Trim and Extend the Video Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/trim-extend-the-video ## Add a new section to your clip If you want to find a better hook, extend your clip, or add a new section from other parts of your video to the clip, you can simply click the **Add a section** button located at the beginning or at the end of the caption area, and choose which section you'd like to add from the whole transcript. <video type="video/mp4" /> ## Trim unwanted footage To make your clip concise and engaging, you can trim unwanted sentences using two methods: Method 1: Select the section you want to remove from the text and click **Delete**. Method 2: Drag the beginning and end of selected segment in the timeline editor to trim it. <video type="video/mp4" /> # Troubleshooting Account Connection Errors Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/troubleshooting-account-errors We've recently updated how connection errors are displayed in OpusClip to make them more consistent. While all error toasts now share the same title —"Looks like we failed to connect to your account" — the message beneath it helps indicate the type of issue. ## Here's what each message means and how to troubleshoot it: | Message | Meaning | How to fix it | | - | - | - | | "Required permissions may not have been granted when connecting your account." | This usually means: ● You may have deselect some necessary permissions during the connection process. ● OpusClip doesn't have access to post on your behalf or read basic profile information. | Reconnect and ensure all permissions are granted during the authorization flow. | | "Your social media account might not be set up correctly." | This typically applies to: ● Instagram Personal accounts (we only support Business or Creator accounts). ● Incomplete or restricted social profiles. | ● For Youtube: Make sure you must log in with the Google Account that owns the YouTube channel to connect it to OpusClip. Unfortunately, we are NOT able to connect to a YouTube channel if you are set as a manager of the brand account. ● For Instagram: Make sure it's a Business or Creator account Learn how to switch your Instagram account type → | | "We're having trouble connecting to the social platform right now." | This could be due to: ● Temporary issues with the social platform. ● Network disruptions or expired sessions. | ● Wait a few minutes and try again. ● If the issue persists, try reconnecting your account or reach out to our support team. | | "Your account has been suspended by platform. Please check it first." | This typically applies to the following scenarios: ● Your account has been suspended, banned, or frozen by platform in accordance with their risk control measures. | Log in to your platform account to check if it’s working. | ## Facebook specific messages: | Message | Meaning | How to fix it | | - | - | - | | "The connection has been invalidated because the user changed their password or Facebook has changed the session for security reasons. Please reconnect and try again." | This typically applies to the following scenarios: ● Your password has been changed, which invalidates the previous connection due to Facebook’s security policies. ● Your account has been suspended, banned, or frozen by Facebook in accordance with their risk control measures. | Log in to your Facebook account to check if it’s working. If everything looks fine, go to OpusClip and reconnect your account. | | "Cannot find any Facebook page related to this account. Please create a page first or use another account." | This error can come up for one of two reasons: ● The Facebook account you're trying to connect to is set as a profile and not a page. OR ● If the Facebook account is a page, you may have insufficient permissions to connect the page. | Create a Facebook Page and retry. | We're working on making these messages clearer. In the meantime, if you're unsure which issue you're experiencing, feel free to contact our support team. # Upload Custom Media Assets Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/upload-media # Media Upload and Management in OpusClip The Custom Media feature in OpusClip allows users to upload, manage, and customize both personal and AI-generated assets directly within the editor. This functionality provides comprehensive control, enabling users to enrich their videos with relevant imagery and clips, all while maintaining a seamless and intuitive experience. ## Key Features of Media Uploads and Management 1. **Uploading Custom Media Assets** * **Direct Uploads**: Users can add personal images and videos to the media timeline by uploading files from their computer. Supported formats include: * **Videos**: .mp4, .mov, .mkv * **Images**: .png, .jpg * **Drag-and-Drop Functionality**: Click the "Drag and drop files" button or drag images/videos from your device directly to the upload button or timeline, making it simple to add custom assets. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0409-06.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=e9fb528e67a7baad151026451f01059d) 2. **Media Placement and Editing** * **Automatic Placement**: Uploaded media assets are added to the timeline exactly where the playhead is located, ensuring precise placement. * **Adjustable Duration for Images**: Uploaded images default to 2 seconds on the timeline but can be resized for custom duration. * **Trimming and Extending Video Clips**: Uploaded videos can be trimmed or extended up to their full length. Images can be extended extended past the maximum duration of the clip. * **Editing Media Assets**: Uploaded assets can be resize and repositioned for greater visual flexibility. 3. **Organizing and Reusing Media in the Library** * **Media Library**: Uploaded assets appear in the library, marked with icons to differentiate between images and videos. * To better understand cloud storage and how it works in OpusClip, please refer to the cloud storage article [here](/docs/article/cloud-storage). * **Loading Indicators**: Uploading files shows a loading animation with a progress percentage, keeping users informed of processing time. * **(Coming Soon) Asset Management**: A search bar enables users to quickly find and reuse media assets, searchable by original filenames. Users can also rename assets for easier organization. ## Error Handling and Limitations * **File Size Limits**: Files over 200MB prompt an error message, “Maximum file size exceeded, please try uploading a smaller file.” * **Video Duration Limits**: Videos longer than 15 minutes cannot be uploaded and prompt an error message, “Maximum length exceeded, please try uploading a shorter file.” ## Export and Compatibility * **XML Export**: Media clips, including uploaded assets, can be exported to XML, allowing further edits in external editors. Uploaded assets appear will appear as separate layers within the media track of the respective external editors (e.g. Adobe Premiere Pro). ## Media Library Navigation * **(Coming soon) Scrolling and Searching**: Users can scroll through all stored assets within the media library and search for specific assets by name, with plans for advanced, image-based search capabilities in future updates. * **(Coming soon) Re-labeling and Custom Names**: Users can rename assets by double-clicking or right-clicking on the asset's label, making it easier to organize and identify assets for future projects. # Upload Your Own SRT Along With The Video Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/upload-own-srt If you want more control on captions, you can upload your own SRT subtitle files during the submission process. This gives you more control over transcript accuracy—especially if you already have working files related to it. ## How to Upload Your Own SRT 1. After dropping your video link or uploading your video, click Upload.SRT to add an SRT file in the clip settings section. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/upload-own-srt-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=51cf4f04795a7f3efb03f3d46f2c5640) 2. Wait for the upload to complete, it should only take a few seconds. 3. Click "Get clips in 1 click"! 4. Once uploaded, your SRT file will be used for us to generate captions instead of the transcript we normally create. ## Supported SRT Format Your SRT file must follow the standard SRT format: ``` 1 00:00:01,000 --> 00:00:04,000 Welcome to my channel! 2 00:00:04,500 --> 00:00:07,000 Today we're diving into... ``` ## Why was my SRT not accepted? If your SRT was rejected by OpusClip, below are some tips on what to watch out for in your file and your clip settings: * Incomplete subtitle blocks * Each block needs: * A number * A timestamp line * At least one line of subtitle text * Invalid time format * Make sure your timestamps follow the format: HH:MM:SS,MS * Example: 00:00:01,000 * Missing start or end time * Every block must have a start and end timestamp. * Example: ✅ 00:00:04,500 --> 00:00:07,000 * Start time is after end time * The subtitles should start before it ends. * Example: * ❌ 00:00:07,000 --> 00:00:04,500 * ✅ 00:00:04,500 --> 00:00:07,000 * Out-of-order numbering between subtitles * Subtitle blocks must be numbered in sequence: * ❌ Example: 1, 2, 4, 3... * ✅ Example: 1, 2, 3... * Number mismatch * The system expected a specific block number, but got something else. This can break parsing—check your numbering. # Uploading Live Streams Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/uploading-live-streams When uploading a previously live stream, there may be a delay when uploading to our platform to process a project. 1. Short streams (under 1 hour, 720p or 1080p): YouTube can take 10-30 minutes to process the live and make it available on their download servers for trusted third-party platforms such as OpusClip to access. 2. Long streams (several hours, high resolution): YouTube can take 2-12 hours to process the live and make it available on their download servers for trusted third-party platforms such as OpusClip to access. If an import fails right after a livestream ends, YouTube is still processing the video. Wait for the time above, then try the link again. > [!NOTE] > > Currently, uploading live videos while they are still streaming is not supported on our platform. # Upscale a Video Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/upscale-a-video If your footage is blurry or low-resolution, Upscale uses AI to make it sharper, clearer, and more high-definition — no editing experience required. ## How to upscale a video 1. From the Quick Start menu, click **Upscale** (the 💎 diamond icon marked **New**). ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uT8mA6RCmb_Ns9tU/images/imgs/upscale-video-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uT8mA6RCmb_Ns9tU\&q=85\&s=f70f38d2c3c5b0d93fcfe9b7834eaeae) 2. Add your video: paste a YouTube link, click **Upload** to select a file from your device, or click **Google Drive** to import. Videos up to 5 minutes long are supported. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uT8mA6RCmb_Ns9tU/images/imgs/upscale-video-2.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uT8mA6RCmb_Ns9tU\&q=85\&s=71fed6806729ca2e58517c0b799df4a9) 3. Once your video is loaded, review the preview and click **Upscale** to begin processing. The button shows the base upscale cost (e.g. **23 credits**). Your total charge may be higher if 4K upscaling applies — see [Credit cost](#credit-cost) below. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uT8mA6RCmb_Ns9tU/images/imgs/upscale-video-3.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uT8mA6RCmb_Ns9tU\&q=85\&s=f7944987d8d677ef00b8fa2439e0d010) 4. When upscaling is complete, open the **History** tab and click **Download** to save your enhanced video. Upscaled videos are available for 7 days. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/uT8mA6RCmb_Ns9tU/images/imgs/upscale-video-4.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=uT8mA6RCmb_Ns9tU\&q=85\&s=b67fcaeb8391a77e66ccebc6aa178823) ## Credit cost > [!NOTE] > > The credit amount shown on the **Upscale** button (e.g. 23 credits) is the **base upscale charge**. For **4K upscaling** on **Pro, Max, and Business**, an **additional incremental charge** is calculated from your video length and added on top of the base cost. For 4K upscaling on Pro, Max, and Business: * **11 additional credits** per 10-second block * Duration is **rounded up** to the next 10-second block * The 4K charge is **added to** the base video generation / upscale cost — it is not a flat per-minute or per-clip fee ### Example calculations | Video length | Blocks (rounded up) | Additional 4K credits | | - | - | - | | 30 seconds | 3 | 33 (3 × 11) | | 45 seconds | 5 | 55 (5 × 11) | ## Plan availability | Plan | Upscale | | - | - | | Free | — | | Starter | — | | Pro | ✅ | | Max | ✅ | | Business | ✅ | ## FAQ **How long does upscaling take?** Processing time varies by video length. You can monitor progress in the History tab — it shows a live percentage as your video upscales. **How long are my upscaled videos saved?** Upscaled videos are available to download from the History tab for 7 days. **What is the maximum video length?** Videos up to 5 minutes long are supported. **What counts as blurry or low-res footage?** Upscale is designed to improve footage that lacks sharpness or clarity — for example, old recordings, compressed video, or anything that looks grainy or pixelated. **How is 4K upscaling charged?** On Pro, Max, and Business, 4K upscaling adds 11 credits per 10-second block (rounded up), on top of the base upscale cost shown on the button. # Video Clone & Dubbing Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/video-dubbing Video Dubbing lets you translate and dub your videos into 25 languages using a clone of your own voice — no re-recording or external dubbing studio required. The dubbed output sounds like you, not a generic AI voice. ## How to dub a video 1. Click **Video dubbing** in the Quick Start menu on the OpusClip dashboard. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq/images/imgs/video-dubbing-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq\&q=85\&s=c8d93cc10d814ba91d4ab744e420aa59) 2. Paste a YouTube link, upload a file, or connect Google Drive. Select your target language and click **Dub Video**. OpusClip clones your voice from the source video and generates the dubbed audio automatically. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq/images/imgs/video-dubbing-2.gif?s=73f8cdebe05b947365205d6cd2a5ec33) 3. When processing is complete, the dubbed video appears as a new asset in your project, ready to preview and export. ## Other ways to access Video Dubbing 1. **From the editor** — Open a clip in the editor and click **AI enhance** in the right sidebar. Click **Video dubbing**, then use the **Select dubbing language** dropdown to choose your target language and confirm. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq/images/imgs/video-dubbing-editor.gif?s=7c2e3d28134b1cfde512d7e54bb29208) 2. **From the results page** — Click **AI tools**, then select **Video dubbing** from the dropdown. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq/images/imgs/video-dubbing-results.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq\&q=85\&s=1395293e7cf19aa449e009953a6904d0) 3. **From the Grid View** — Hover over any clip in your library and click the **Edit** (scissors icon) menu. Select **Video dubbing** from the dropdown. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq/images/imgs/video-dubbing-grid-view.gif?s=9a68bcd7acfd5939a4528c3878f06c91) 4. **Bulk dubbing** — Select multiple clips using the checkboxes, then click **Bulk dub** in the action bar at the top right. Choose a language, confirm, and each clip is processed individually. When the full batch is complete, you'll receive a notification. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq/images/imgs/video-dubbing-bulk.gif?s=6e4d7f4bcd3f03635d7b6ac8ca95812f) ## Editing the dubbed transcript After dubbing is complete, open the dubbed clip in the editor. The translated transcript appears in the left panel — click **Edit clip** from your library to open it. Click any word or segment in the transcript to edit it inline. A text field appears with **Apply**, **Apply to all**, and **Cancel** options. Changes reflect immediately in both the transcript and the subtitles on the video preview. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq/images/imgs/video-dubbing-transcript.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=xhU9qeay6AjxH0Hq\&q=85\&s=b3f96301297d9612e6c3dff44cfaac6f) > [!NOTE] > > Editing the transcript updates the text only. The dubbed audio is not regenerated — your edits are saved automatically and reflected in the exported video. ## Plan availability | Plan | Video Dubbing | | - | - | | Free | — | | Starter | — | | Pro | ✅ (10 credits/min) | | Business | ✅ (10 credits/min) | ## FAQ **Does voice cloning happen automatically?** Yes, OpusClip clones the voice from your source video automatically during dubbing. No separate setup or voice training is required. **What happens if my video has multiple speakers?** Multi-speaker detection is supported on all plans. All speakers are dubbed using the cloned voice of the primary speaker. **Can I edit the translation after dubbing?** Yes, the translated transcript in the left panel is editable inline. Text changes are reflected in subtitles immediately, but the dubbed audio track is not regenerated. **How many languages are supported?** Video Dubbing currently supports 25 languages, including English, German, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Russian, Polish, Indonesian, Ukrainian, Swedish, Turkish, Norwegian, Croatian, Romanian, Slovak, Greek, Danish, Finnish, Hungarian, Czech, Japanese, Korean, and Vietnamese. # Video Languages Supported Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/video-languages-supported We support over 25 languages, including: | Language | ISO 639 Code | | - | - | | English | en | | German | de | | Spanish | es | | French | fr | | Portuguese | pt | | Italian\* | it | | Dutch\* | nl | | Russian\* | ru | | Polish\* | pl | | Indonesian\* | id | | Ukrainian\* | uk | | Swedish\* | sv | | Turkish\* | tr | | Norwegian\* | no | | Croatian\* | hr | | Romanian\* | ro | | Slovak\* | sk | | Greek\* | el | | Danish\* | da | | Finnish\* | fi | | Hungarian\* | hu | | Czech\* | cs | | Japanese\* | ja | | Korean\* | kr | | Vietnamese\* | vi | +More to come We are committed to enhancing our service and appreciate your feedback on additional language support you might need. > [!NOTE] > > P.S. \* means the language is still in BETA version. You may encounter some inaccurate emojis or highlighted keywords. Don't worry! We're fine-tuning these features and aim to complete improvements very soon! # Video Length Supported Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/video-length ## What maximum length of video do we support? Our system supports videos up to **10 hours** long. Videos exceeding this may encounter processing issues. For longer content, use Copilot settings to select a specific portion for processing. # Video Sources Supported Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/video-sources-supported ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0408-05.PNG?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=9c52b5ee33a632bc4cc9c4ec400686f3) Uploading your videos to be clipped by OpusClip is as easy as ever! We currently support links from: * **Apple Podcast** * **YouTube** * **Google Drive** * **Vimeo** * **Zoom** * **Zoom Clips** * **Rumble** * **Twitch** * **Facebook** * **LinkedIn** * **X** * **Dropbox** * **Riverside** * **Loom** * **Frame.io** * **StreamYard** * **Kick** * **[Medal.tv](https://medal.tv/)** * **Public .mp4 urls** * **Local video uploads(max size: 30GB for Pro Users)** > [!TIP] > > Please make sure the links you submit are public or unlisted. Private videos can not be accessed. # What is the Virality Score on OpusClip? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/virality-score ## What is the Virality Score on OpusClip? For users on **Pro** and **Starter** plans, our advanced AI analyzes your clips and assigns Virality Scores based on how likely each clip is to go viral. You can find the Virality Score next to your clips, depending on the layout you use to view your clips. ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr/images/imgs/virality-score-1.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=XStAq9UXRcMPMTAr\&q=85\&s=19a5ccbbb0c3719209dc0e6e02d89136) ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0408-10.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=98fa311184015f0dbf88abeb0ad80750) You can easily switch between **Grid View** and **List View** by clicking the top left corner ![](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P/images/imgs/screenshot0408-11.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7i57AL9_SzMSJI7P\&q=85\&s=bb62f43206ac211f2a0f8293d458b488) The Virality score ranges from **0** to **99**, with higher scores suggesting a greater chance of engagement and shares on social media. Each clip will have its own Virality Score, allowing you to compare its performance relative to others. By default, your clips will be sorted by Virality Score, from highest to lowest on the results page. ## How the Virality Score is Calculated OpusClip’s AI evaluates **multiple aspects** of your video to determine its Virality Score: * **Hook**: Does the introduction grab attention and directly relate to the main topic of the video? * **Flow**: Does the video flow logically from one part to the next, with a satisfying conclusion? * **Value**: Does the video offer value, resonate emotionally, and create a personal connection with the audience? * **Trend**: Is the video aligned with current trends and audience interests? In addition to these factors, our AI performs extra checks to ensure it finds the best clips for your **specific needs**. For example, it will also evaluate whether the clip is relevant to your prompt, when you are using the [ClipAnything](https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/9947095-clip-anything) model. ## Why the Virality Score Matters The Virality Score provides insight into your clips' potential to go viral. **Higher scores** indicate a greater likelihood of attracting attention, engagement, and shares. It will guide you in understanding your clips and optimizing your content strategy for better results. ## Who Can Access the Virality Score? The Virality Score feature is available exclusively to **Pro** and **Starter** plan users. Free plan users will not be able to see the Virality Score for their clips. # How can I remove the OpusClip watermark? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/watermark If you are on the Free Trial or Free Plan, you will see an OpusClip brand logo watermark on your clips. If you upgrade to a paid plan, the watermarks will be automatically removed from your Free Plan/Free Trial projects. # What import sources does OpusClip support? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/what-import-sources-does-opusclip-support We currently support links from **Apple Podcast, YouTube, Google Drive, Vimeo, Zoom, Zoom Clips, Rumble, Twitch, Facebook, LinkedIn, X, Dropbox, Riverside, Loom, Frame.io, StreamYard, Kick, [Medal.tv](https://medal.tv/)**, public mp4 url and local video uploads (up to 10GB per video). > [!NOTE] > > Please ensure the links you submit are public or unlisted. Private videos cannot be accessed. # Where did my minutes go? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/where-did-my-minutes-go Wondering why you saw more minutes in your account yesterday and you didn't process any projects? This might be why. If you are on a **monthly** plan, your paid credits will last for 60 days, which means that you get one month of rollover credits. After these 60 days the credits will expire from your account. If you are on a **yearly** plan, all your credits will be valid for 12 months. Furthermore, if you cancel your subscription, the remaining credits will expire at the end of your current billing cycle. # Why Can't I Connect My Facebook Account? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/why-cant-i-connect-facebook-account If you're having trouble connecting to your Facebook account, or your Facebook Pages are not appearing in OpusClip, this is almost always caused by **permission settings** on the Facebook side. Follow the steps below to diagnose and fix the issue. ## 1. Reconnect Facebook and grant full Page access The most common cause is that **Page Access** was not fully granted during the original authorization. 1. Go to **Facebook → Settings → Business Integrations**. 2. Find **OpusClip** and click **Remove**. 3. Return to OpusClip and reconnect your Facebook account. During the authorization flow: * Select **all Pages** you want to use. * Enable all requested permissions (do not use default or limited selection). ## 2. Check your Page role permissions You must have sufficient permission on the Facebook Page for it to appear in OpusClip. **Roles that are required:** * **Admin** (classic Pages) * **Full control** (new Pages experience) **Roles that may cause Pages not to appear:** Editor, Moderator, Advertiser, Analyst **To check your role:** Go to **Facebook Page → Settings → Page Access**. ## 3. Check Business Manager access (if applicable) If your Page is managed through a Business Manager, or if the Page is owned by a different Business Manager (for example, a partner organization), Meta's API may not return it even if you have Full Control in your own Business Manager. This applies to Pages that are: * Owned by a different Business Manager * Shared as partner assets * Restricted for third-party integrations **To check your Business Manager access:** 1. Go to [business.facebook.com/settings](https://business.facebook.com/settings). 2. Navigate to **Accounts → Pages**. 3. Confirm that: * The Page is listed. * Your account has access to it. **If the Page is owned by a different Business Manager:** 1. Ask the owning Business Manager to assign you directly at the Page level with Full Control. 2. Remove OpusClip from Facebook Business Integrations. 3. Reconnect and ensure **All Pages** is selected during the permission approval step. > [!NOTE] > > If the owning Business Manager restricts third-party apps, they may also need to approve the OpusClip integration. ## 4. Make sure you're on the right Facebook account Ensure the Facebook account you are connecting is the same account that has Admin or Full Control access to the Page you want to use. If you are logged into a personal account but the Page is managed by a business account, the Page will not appear. **Still not working?** Please [contact our support team](https://www.opus.pro/contact-support) and share a screenshot of your Page Access settings, the name of the Page you're trying to connect to, and a description of what you see when the connection fails. # Why Did My Clip Post to YouTube as a Normal Video and Not a Short? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/why-did-my-clip-post-youtube In order for your clip to be posted as a YouTube Short, it must meet the following requirements: **- Must be in Vertical Layout (9:16)** **- The video length must be under 180 Seconds** If your clip meets these requirements and still isn't being posted as a short, please reach out to our support team! # Why Did my Project Fail or Take a Long Time? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/why-did-my-project-fail For projects failing projects processing for longer than expected. ## What are some common reasons why projects may fail? * A heavy workload on OpusClip servers. * Uploading content that is not supported, such as language or subject matter. * Not able to render enough clips. * Not able to render any clips. * Not enough words detected. ## What are some common reasons why projects may process longer than expected? OpusClip may be experiencing high loads or there may be lots of projects processing, please bear with us until our servers catch up - thanks! ## What are some common errors when projects fail? * “Language not supported. Please check our list of over 20 supported languages.” * “Unfortunately, we were unable to generate enough clips from your submitted video. Your credits have been promptly refunded to your account. Please try again with the same or different video.” * “We cannot deliver the result because our servers hit an uncommon issue. Credits have been returned to your account. Please wait for our servers to recover in an hour or so to try again. If you contact support, please send them a screenshot of this error: \[specific error message here] * “Project not found” * “Videos need at least 30 spoken words to be processed. Bring on the words! * “We were not able to render any clips so all credits have been returned to your account. You can try again or use a different video.” ## What sort of messages will I see if my project is taking a long time to process? * "Your video is processing" * "You will receive a notification once your video is done processing, check back soon!" ## What happens if my projects take more than 90 minutes to complete processing, or fails? Credits will be automatically reimbursed to your account. ## How do I know if my credits have been reimbursed? Check your credit usage history by clicking your profile dropdown in the top left sidebar, and then selecting "Credit usage history". If you've had credits reimbursed, the numbers will be green, or just show a (-) instead of a number. ## How can I get more help? Users can click the "Get Support" widget at the bottom right of My projects or the project page to get more help or open up a ticket. # Why did my task fail or processing for a long time? Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/why-did-my-task-fail-or-processing ## Why Did My Project Submission Fail? Occasionally, your project submission may fail due to technical issues or specific conditions. When this happens, **we will automatically return your credits for the failed project**. Below are the common reasons for project failures: * **Insufficient Clips Rendered**: We were unable to produce enough clips for your project. * **No Clips Rendered**: We could not generate any clips from your submission. * **Not Enough Words Detected**: This occurs if you're using the ClipBasic model and the input video contains fewer than 30 words. **Switching to the ClipAnything model will resolve this issue.** * **System Error**: This includes service outages on our end. When a project fails, please try re-submitting a new project or reach out to our **Support Team** for further assistance if the problem persists. ## What Happens if Processing Takes Too Long? In rare instances, your project may take longer than 90 minutes to process. To make it right, we will **automatically refund the credits used for the project**. You will still be able to access the project and its corresponding clips once it completes. ## Checking Your Credit Refund You can check your [Credit History](https://clip.opus.pro/activity) to confirm that the credits have been refunded for failed or delayed projects. # Your YouTube account has no channels Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/your-youtube-has-no-channels ## "Your YouTube account has no channels. Please create a channel first or use another account." | Cause | Solution | Resources | | :-: | :-: | :-: | | Our platform was unable to locate a YouTube channel linked to the YouTube account that you're currently logged into. | Create a YouTube channel | [Create a YouTube channel](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/1646861?hl=en) | # How to Verify YouTube Video Ownership on OpusClip Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/youtube-ownership-verification ## Overview To ensure compliance with YouTube's community guidelines and protect the original creators' rights, OpusClip requires users to verify their YouTube video ownership before submission. ## Verification Process When uploading a video via a YouTube link, you will be asked to confirm your ownership of the channel. Please follow the prompts to complete this process. ## Unable to Verify? If you're unable to verify ownership, such as when working on a client's channel, there are two alternatives: 1. **Alternative Submission Methods**: You can opt for different submission methods. Learn more about alternative submission methods [here](https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/video-sources-supported). 2. **Invite the Channel Owner**: Add the channel owner to your team workspace in OpusClip. Once added, they can verify the account directly. You can find out how to add them to your team workspace [here](https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/6219255-team-management). Thank you for respecting creator rights and contributing positively to the community. # Zapier Integration Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/zapier-integration You can now create automated workflows (Zaps) that include **OpusClip** directly in Zapier, to make your video workflow faster and more efficient. # Get Started ## 1. Find OpusClip on Zapier * Go to [Zapier](https://zapier.com/) * Click **Explore apps**, search for **OpusClip**, and start building right away, or * Begin creating Zaps, and when adding an **Action** or **Trigger**, simply search for **OpusClip** in the app directory. ## 2. Connect Your OpusClip Account Sign in with your OpusClip account to authorize Zapier access. ## 3. Configure Your Zap You can set up OpusClip as either an **Action** or a **Trigger**: * **Create projects from a video URL to**: * Add captions to your video * Clip your video into highlights * Transcribe your video * **Get results immediately after completion**: * Get video clips * Get video or clip transcripts * Get your video with captions * **Start a Zap automatically when an OpusClip project is completed** This flexibility allows you to design workflows that perfectly match your needs, helping you save time and work smarter. # FAQ ## Which OpusClip plans can use Zapier? Zapier integrations are available on **Pro** and **Enterprise** plans. ## Do Zaps consume credits the same way as in OpusClip? Yes. Creating projects through Zapier uses credits the same as if you created them directly in OpusClip. ## How many projects can I create through Zapier? It depends on your remaining credits, with a cap for Pro plans: * **Pro plan**: You can use up to 300 credits (5 hours of video) per month, refreshed monthly. [Contact Sales](https://www.opus.pro/contact?utm_campaign=Zapier\&utm_medium=website\&utm_source=helpcenter) to upgrade if you’d like unlimited scalability. * **Enterprise plan**: No monthly cap. ## What happens if my Pro plan expires? If your plan expires, your Zaps will stop working until your subscription is renewed. Manage your subscription [here](https://clip.opus.pro/subscription). ## Is there an API option for more flexibility? Yes. For a fully customizable integration, please refer to our [API documentation](https://help.opus.pro/docs/article/api-requests). # Help center runbook Source: https://help.opus.pro/docs/practices/help-center-runbook # Help Center article runbook Use this for every create, update, and sunset of a Help Center article. Follow the **Help Center** section of the source doc. Leave Canny, Discord, in-app, and other launch-prep copy out of the article. ## Before editing 1. Fetch the latest `main` and branch from it. 2. Name the branch `MMDD-short-topic` (Lillian's style). Lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens only. Example: `1026-mcp-tool-catalog`. 3. Change only the articles named in the request. Do not add steps, screenshots, or tools the spec says to leave out. ## Where articles live | Section | Folder | Public path | | - | - | - | | Help Center | `docs/article/` | `/docs/article/<slug>` | | Agent Opus | `agent-opus/` | `/agent-opus/...` | | API Reference | `api-reference/` | `/api-reference/...` | | Opus Labs | `opus-labs/` | `/opus-labs/...` | The filename is the URL slug. `docs/article/auto-headline.mdx` is `/docs/article/auto-headline`. ## Create an article 1. Add an MDX file with a `title` in the frontmatter. ```mdx theme={"dark"} --- title: "Article title" --- ``` 2. Put screenshots in `images/imgs/`. Reference them from the article: ```mdx theme={"dark"} <div className="img-frame"> <img src="/images/imgs/article-name-1.png" noZoom /> </div> ``` 3. Add the page path, without `.mdx`, to the right nav group in **both** `mint.json` and `docs.json`. Keep the two files in the same order. 4. Link to other articles with site paths, such as `/docs/article/auto-headline`. ## Update an article 1. Edit the existing MDX. Keep wording the spec says is already fine. 2. When replacing a screenshot, use a new filename so browsers do not keep the old image. Delete the old file if nothing else references it. 3. If a URL is going away, add a redirect. Do not leave the old page live. ## Sunset an article 1. Delete the MDX file. 2. Add the same redirect to `mint.json` and `docs.json`: ```json theme={"dark"} { "source": "/docs/old-path", "destination": "/docs/article/current-article" } ``` 3. Delete images that only the retired page used. 4. Leave the replacement article in place. ## Writing rules * The `style` prop is a JSX object with camelCase keys: `style={{ width: '100%' }}`. Never a string. * Images must be under 10MB. CI rejects anything larger, and it rejects a `src` that points at a missing file. * Do not commit screenshots sitting in the repo root. Those are local leftovers. ## Preview Run `npm run dev` from the repo root and open `http://localhost:3333` plus the article path. Check the changed page before asking for a PR. Do not push until that review is approved. ## Pull request * One sentence on why, then a short point-form body. No extra commentary. * Assign the reviewers named in the request. * A merge to `main` publishes the site. # How to use AI Expand Source: https://help.opus.pro/opus-labs/ai-expand AI Expand changes the aspect ratio of a video by generating new visual area around the original footage. Use it to adapt one clip for vertical, landscape, square, portrait, or cinematic formats without cropping away the original frame. > [card] [Learn about AI Expand](https://labs.opus.pro/ai-expand-intro) > > See when to use AI Expand and how it keeps the whole scene in frame. ## Supported inputs and limits * **File types:** MP4, MOV, or WebM. * **Video length:** 4 to 90 seconds. * **File size:** up to 500 MB. * **Resolution:** the shorter side must be at least 360 pixels; 720 pixels or more is recommended. * **Target frames:** 9:16, 16:9, 1:1, 4:3, 3:4, or 21:9. AI Expand works best with camera footage and natural scenes. Generated areas can vary between results. Review important faces, objects, logos, and text before publishing. ## How to use AI Expand ![The AI Expand creation screen with Target frame, Model, and Resolution controls on the left and the upload area on the right.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BozY0S2zazZaj_wg/images/imgs/opus-labs-ai-expand-create.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=BozY0S2zazZaj_wg\&q=85\&s=99cca3797e0943448e2653fd341f4f7a) *AI Expand controls and upload area before a source video is added.* 1. Open [AI Expand](https://labs.opus.pro/ai-expand). You can also go to [Opus Labs](https://labs.opus.pro/), find **AI Expand**, and select **Try it now**. 2. Drop a video into the upload area, or select **browse** to choose a file. 3. Wait for the upload and video analysis to finish. 4. Under **Target frame**, select the aspect ratio you want to create. 5. Under **Model**, select **Standard — Hailuo 3** or **Premium — Seedance 2.5**. 6. Under **Resolution**, select an available output resolution. 7. Review the credit cost shown on the action button. 8. Select **Expand to \[target frame]**. For example, select **Expand to 9:16** for a vertical result. 9. Wait for processing to finish, then preview the result. 10. Download or share the result if it looks correct. ![Animation of the AI Expand workflow: selecting a target frame, model, and resolution, uploading a clip, and submitting the job.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/BozY0S2zazZaj_wg/images/imgs/opus-labs-ai-expand-demo.gif?s=abd12bf65c739c3b079ceb4338fe809f) *Choose a target frame, model, and resolution before uploading and submitting.* ## Find a result later Select **Library** in AI Expand to view submitted jobs and completed results. ## Credits and availability AI Expand uses credits. The cost depends on the selected model, resolution, source duration, and target frame. The exact estimate appears before you submit the job. Available models and resolutions can change while AI Expand is in beta. ## Troubleshooting ### The action button is disabled Confirm that a video has finished uploading, then select a target frame, model, and resolution. The target frame must be different from the source video's aspect ratio. ### The upload is rejected Confirm that the file is MP4, MOV, or WebM; 4 to 90 seconds long; no larger than 500 MB; and at least 360 pixels on the shorter side. ### The generated area looks incorrect Try a different model or use a source clip with a clear subject and less camera movement. Always review generated faces, hands, text, logos, and objects. ### The job is taking longer than expected You can leave the creation screen after submitting the job. Return to **Library** to check its status. ## Frequently asked questions ### Does AI Expand crop my source video? No. AI Expand keeps the original frame and generates additional visual area to reach the selected aspect ratio. ### Can I select the same aspect ratio as my source video? No. Select a different target frame. AI Expand is designed to create a new aspect ratio. ### Can I close the page while a job is processing? Yes. After the job has been submitted, return to **Library** to check the status and open the result. # How to use Audio to Image Video Source: https://help.opus.pro/opus-labs/audio-to-image-video Audio to Image Video turns a voiceover into an illustrated video. Upload audio or video, or record your voice; choose a visual style, frame, and pace; review the planned scenes; then generate and download a final video. ## Supported inputs and limits * **File content:** Must be voiceover. * **File type:** MP3, M4A, WAV, AAC, OGG, Opus, FLAC, MP4, MOV, M4V, and WebM. * **File size:** up to 50 MB. * **Voiceover length:** up to 5 minutes. * **Picture styles:** 25 visual styles to choose from. * **Aspect ratios:** 16:9 landscape, 9:16 portrait, or 1:1 square. * **Visual pacing:** **Calm** uses longer shots, **Balanced** uses a natural mix, and **Dynamic** changes visuals more frequently. * **Limits:** up to 200 scenes and up to 8 recurring visual references. ## How to use Audio to Image Video ![The Audio to Image Video creation screen with Add speech, picture style, aspect ratio, and visual pacing controls.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/M04cAwhK2nno4hU_/images/imgs/opus-labs-audio-to-image-video-create.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=M04cAwhK2nno4hU_\&q=85\&s=118007f58e1f7c7f1de1fa8e1b461206) *Add speech, choose a picture style, aspect ratio, and visual pacing, then create a story plan.* 1. Open [Audio to Image Video](https://labs.opus.pro/storyslides). You can also go to [Opus Labs](https://labs.opus.pro/), find **Audio to Image Video**, and select **Try it now**. 2. In **Add speech**, upload or record an audio or video file. If you upload a video, only its audio is used. 3. Choose a picture style, aspect ratio, and visual pacing. 4. Select **Create story plan**. 5. Review the plan. For each scene, edit the visual description or select **Regenerate description**. ![A scene in the story plan with options to edit the visual description or regenerate it.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/M04cAwhK2nno4hU_/images/imgs/opus-labs-audio-to-image-video-scene.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=M04cAwhK2nno4hU_\&q=85\&s=5ef843f30ba2f4c823332d82426bfd88) *Open a scene to edit what it should show or regenerate its description.* 6. To change a visual reference, select **Edit references**, edit its description, and select **Redraw**. ![The Edit references panel for updating how a recurring person, place, or object should look.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/M04cAwhK2nno4hU_/images/imgs/opus-labs-audio-to-image-video-references.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=M04cAwhK2nno4hU_\&q=85\&s=70c2e02b1b48faf9b387bfa9050b0a9d) *Edit how a recurring person, place, or object should look, then select **Redraw**.* 7. Review the displayed credit price, then select **Generate video** to confirm the plan and start generation. 8. When the video is ready, preview it and select **Download MP4**. ![The finished story preview with scene thumbnails and a Download MP4 button.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/M04cAwhK2nno4hU_/images/imgs/opus-labs-audio-to-image-video-preview.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=M04cAwhK2nno4hU_\&q=85\&s=34d529d54b389b4edea6fc231536f40c) *Preview the finished story, choose a scene, or select **Download MP4**.* ## Find your projects Select **Projects** in Audio to Image Video. You will see all your past projects here. ![The Projects list in Audio to Image Video showing past story projects and their status.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/M04cAwhK2nno4hU_/images/imgs/opus-labs-audio-to-image-video-projects.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=M04cAwhK2nno4hU_\&q=85\&s=a6ac16aff944b7df78de4001cebece5e) ## Credits Audio to Image Video and OpusClip use the same credit balance. The **Generate video** button shows the current price for the reviewed story before you spend credits. The displayed amount is reserved when generation starts. Credits are charged only when the video finishes generating. If generation cannot finish and the reservation is released, no credits are charged. ## Troubleshooting ### The upload is rejected Confirm that the file contains playable audio, is no larger than 50 MB, and is no longer than 5 minutes. Try one of the supported audio or video formats listed above. ### Recording does not start Allow microphone access when your browser asks. If access was previously blocked, open the site permissions for labs.opus.pro, enable the microphone, and try **Record** again. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I close the page while Audio to Image Video is working? Yes, after the initial upload finishes and the saved project opens. Planning, visual generation, and MP4 rendering continue in the background. Return from **Projects**. Keep the page open during the initial upload. ### What happens when I upload a video? Audio to Image Video uses the audio track as the voiceover. It does not reuse the source video's pictures; it creates new illustrated scenes. ### Does correcting the transcript change my voiceover? No. Transcript corrections help the scene plan and narration text, but the exported video continues to use the original audio. ### Why does my story have no visual references? Some stories do not repeat a person, place, or object often enough to need a reusable reference. You can still review the scene plan and generate the story. ### Does the exported video include captions, music, or transitions? No. The current beta exports the original voiceover with generated scene images and hard cuts. Captions and music are not burned into the MP4. # How to use Live Clipping Source: https://help.opus.pro/opus-labs/live-clipping Live Clipping records a live stream while it airs, cuts it into chunks, and sends each chunk to OpusClip to turn into short clips. Paste a YouTube, Twitch, Kick, or TikTok live link, choose how often to cut, and find the clips in Live Clipping and your OpusClip projects. > [card] [Learn about Live Clipping](https://labs.opus.pro/live-clipping-intro) > > See how Live Clipping turns a long live stream into short clips while you're still live. ## Before you start * **Access:** Live Clipping is in private beta. Sign in with your OpusClip account. If your workspace doesn't have access yet, you'll see **Live Clipping isn't available for this workspace yet**. If you use more than one OpusClip workspace, select **Sign out** and sign back in to switch. * **Sources:** a live link from YouTube, Twitch, Kick, or TikTok, or a stream address in HLS (.m3u8), DASH (.mpd), RTMP, RTSP, or SRT. * **Live only:** a platform link to a past broadcast or a regular video isn't recorded. * **Your content:** only record streams you own or have permission to use. ## How to use Live Clipping ![The Live Clipping Streams page with the live link box, the Start clipping button, and the supported platforms below it.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/KgadncHBSvdj453o/images/imgs/opus-labs-live-clipping-start.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=KgadncHBSvdj453o\&q=85\&s=b1c5465f03156d438a63e2d8e603a659) *Paste a live link into the box at the top of **Streams**.* 1. Open [Live Clipping](https://live-clipping.labs.opus.pro/). You can also open the [Live Clipping intro page](https://labs.opus.pro/live-clipping-intro) and select **Start clipping now**. 2. On **Streams**, paste a live link into the box. A preview of the stream and the clip settings appear below it. 3. Under **Cut every**, choose how long each chunk is: **\~15 min**, **\~30 min**, or **\~1 hr**. A chunk ends at the first keyframe after this time, so lengths vary slightly. 4. Optional: under **Overlap**, choose **+1 min**, **+2 min**, or **+5 min** to keep each chunk recording for a little longer after the next one starts. A moment that happens right at a cut then stays whole in one chunk. Overlap is **Off** by default. 5. Choose the OpusClip settings for every chunk: **Clip model**, **Genre**, **Clip length**, **Aspect ratio**, **Auto headline**, and **Auto zoom**. Optional: in **Include specific moments**, describe what you want clipped. 6. Leave **Keep recording through drops and restarts** on if you want recording to pick up again on its own when the stream drops or goes live again. 7. Select **Start clipping**. The first chunk goes to OpusClip after about one chunk length. 8. Each time a chunk ends, OpusClip turns it into clips. Open **Clips** to see them, ranked by score, or select **View clips** on the stream's card. 9. Select **Open in OpusClip** on a clip to edit, export, or publish it. ![The clip settings shown after pasting a link: Cut every, Overlap, Clip model, Genre, Clip length, Aspect ratio, Auto headline, Auto zoom, Include specific moments, and Keep recording through drops and restarts.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/KgadncHBSvdj453o/images/imgs/opus-labs-live-clipping-settings.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=KgadncHBSvdj453o\&q=85\&s=e960c3ce09db6343ecc269c709b1f078) *Choose how often to cut and how OpusClip should clip each chunk.* ## Stop recording Recording continues until you stop it, the broadcast ends, or your workspace runs out of credits. You can close the page while a stream is recording. * To stop and send the chunk in progress to OpusClip, select **Stop & create project** on the stream's card. When the chunk is too short to become a project, the button reads **Stop recording**. * To stop without using credits for the chunk in progress, select the red stop button, then **Stop and discard**. Chunks already sent to OpusClip keep their projects. * To record the same stream again, select **Start recording** on its card. ## Credits Live Clipping uses the same credit balance as OpusClip. Each chunk uses credits when OpusClip creates its project, at about 1 credit per minute recorded. A stream that records around the clock uses about 1,440 credits a day. * Overlap minutes are recorded into two chunks, so they use credits twice. * Adding a stream, previewing a link, and waiting for a free recorder don't use credits. * When your balance is low, a banner shows about how many minutes of recording are left. * When your workspace runs out of credits, streams stop recording and can't start again until you top up. Chunks already recorded wait instead of becoming projects, and go to OpusClip automatically once you add credits, oldest first. ## Find your clips later * **Clips** lists every clip from your streams. Filter by stream, search clip titles, or turn on **Top picks only**. * **Activity** shows what happened to each stream and chunk. * Each chunk also becomes a project in your OpusClip workspace. ## Troubleshooting ### The stream says Not live or Waiting for the stream to go live The channel isn't broadcasting right now. With **Keep recording through drops and restarts** on, recording starts on its own when the stream goes live. ### The stream says Queued or Waiting for a free recorder All recorders are busy. The stream starts recording when one frees up. Waiting doesn't use credits. ### A clip shows a Recording gap card The stream's signal was lost for a while, or part of the recording is missing. Instead of splitting the chunk, Live Clipping inserts a short **Recording gap** card and carries on. ### The card shows Black screen, No picture, or No sound These notices describe what the source is sending. Recording continues and still uses credits. Stop the stream if you don't want to clip that part. ### The link isn't accepted Paste the full link, starting with https\://, rtmp\://, rtsp\://, or srt://. If the stream says **This link is a recording or a regular video, not a live stream**, use the link to a broadcast that is live. ### You're out of credits Top up your OpusClip credits, then select **Start recording** on each stream that stopped. Chunks already recorded go to OpusClip on their own. ### You need help In Live Clipping, select **Contact support** (the headset button in the bottom-right corner). Include the stream link and roughly when the problem happened. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I close the page while a stream is recording? Yes. Recording runs on Opus servers and continues until you stop it, the broadcast ends, or credits run out. ### Can I change the chunk length or overlap while recording? Yes. Open the stream's details and change **Cut every** or **Overlap**. The change applies to chunks that finish from then on. ### Where do the clips go? Each chunk becomes a project in your OpusClip workspace. You can see its clips in **Clips** in Live Clipping, or open them in OpusClip to edit and publish. # How to use Motion Studio Source: https://help.opus.pro/opus-labs/motion-studio Motion Studio turns a written idea and optional reference files into a shot plan and a generated motion-graphics video. Use it for logo animations, title sequences, product explainers, visual packages, and other short motion concepts. > [card] [Learn about Motion Studio](https://labs.opus.pro/motion-studio-intro) > > See what Motion Studio can create from one prompt, optional references, and templates. ## Before you start * **Idea:** describe what happens, how the video should feel, and how it should end. * **References:** optional. You can upload up to 30 images, 10 videos, and 10 audio files. * **Credits:** review the estimate shown beside **Create shot plan** before continuing. ## How to use Motion Studio ![The Motion Studio creation screen with a sample prompt and video settings on the left, the optional references area at the top, and the template gallery below.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/k-lqYgupEUno6p0d/images/imgs/opus-labs-motion-studio-create.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=k-lqYgupEUno6p0d\&q=85\&s=6ab9b855ff73a8b6ca5c1fef7f022a8d) *Motion Studio with a sample prompt, optional references, templates, and video settings.* 1. Open [Motion Studio](https://labs.opus.pro/motion-studio). You can also go to [Opus Labs](https://labs.opus.pro/), find **Motion Studio**, and select **Try it now**. 2. In **Describe your idea**, write a direct description of the video you want. 3. Optional: select a template under **Start from a template**. Edit the template prompt so it matches your project. 4. Optional: select **Add references** to upload images, videos, or audio. 5. To mention an uploaded reference in the prompt, type `@` and select the file. 6. Choose the **Model**, **Style**, **Length**, **Aspect**, and **Audio** settings. 7. Review the credit estimate shown beside **Create shot plan**. 8. Select **Create shot plan**. 9. Review the timed shots. If needed, revise the idea or update the shot plan. 10. When the plan is correct, select **Submit project** to start rendering. 11. You can leave the page after submission. Select **Projects** to check progress and open completed results. ![Animation of the Motion Studio workflow: writing a prompt, selecting an aspect ratio, and turning audio off before creating the shot plan.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/k-lqYgupEUno6p0d/images/imgs/opus-labs-motion-studio-demo.gif?s=1dbf0b078b7120996f9d533879fb8fc8) *Write a prompt, select an aspect ratio, and turn audio off before creating the shot plan.* ## How to write a useful prompt Use short, concrete instructions. Include the subject, action, visual style, pacing, and ending. **Example**: *Create an 8-second logo animation. Start with a dark background, reveal the logo with a soft light sweep, and end on a clean title card.* ## Credits and availability Motion Studio uses credits. The estimate depends on the selected settings. Review the amount before creating the shot plan and again before submitting the project. Available models, settings, and prices can change while Motion Studio is in beta. ## Troubleshooting ### Create shot plan is unavailable Add a description in **Describe your idea**. If you uploaded references, wait until each upload finishes. ### I cannot mention a reference with @ Upload the reference first and wait for it to finish. Then place the cursor in the prompt, type `@`, and select the file. ### The result does not match my idea Make the prompt more specific. Describe the subject, movement, timing, colors, style, and final frame. Add reference files when visual consistency matters. ### The project is taking longer than expected Select **Projects** to check the current status. Do not submit the same project repeatedly while the first job is still processing. ## Frequently asked questions ### Are reference files required? No. You can start with only a written idea. References help when you need a specific logo, visual style, clip, or sound. ### Can I change the shot plan before rendering? Yes. Review and revise the shot plan before selecting **Submit project**. ### Can I turn generated audio off? Yes. Change the **Audio** setting before creating the shot plan. # How to use Multi-Angle Source: https://help.opus.pro/opus-labs/multi-angle **Multi-Angle** adds AI-generated shots to your podcast, interview, or talking-head recording while keeping the original audio. Upload one video, choose how much extra coverage you want, review the planned moments, then render, refine, and download your edit. ## Supported inputs and limits * **File types:** MP4, MOV, and WebM. * **File size:** up to 4 GB. * **Recording length:** up to 1 hour. * **Recommended footage:** continuous single-camera recordings with clear faces and a relatively stable scene. * **Generated-shot quality:** 480p or 720p. * **Shot coverage:** Fewer, Balanced, or More. These are not fixed shot counts. ## How to use Multi-Angle ### Upload your recording 1. Open [Multi-Angle](https://multi-angle.labs.opus.pro/) and sign in with your OpusClip account. 2. Select **Upload a source video** and choose your recording. 3. Keep the page open while the source uploads and is prepared. When preparation finishes, your video opens in the editor. ### Choose coverage and create a plan 1. In **Part of the video**, keep the full recording or select a section. Drag the range handles or enter the **Start** and **End** times in seconds. 2. Under **Shot coverage**, choose **Fewer** for key moments, **Balanced** for a natural pace, or **More** for more frequent extra shots. 3. Select **Create shot plan**. The editor shows the proposed moments and their time ranges. Planning does not start paid video rendering. ![The Multi-Angle editor with Part of the video, Shot coverage, and Create shot plan controls.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7znZxgjZsq46O1TF/images/imgs/opus-labs-multi-angle-setup.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7znZxgjZsq46O1TF\&q=85\&s=f8e132dfad25f36b13b88834f0f3627c) *Choose the video section and coverage. In an existing project, **Edit setup** opens these controls and the planning button reads **Create a new plan**.* ### Review the planned moments 1. Select a shot in **Planned moments** or on the timeline to inspect its timing and the reason it was selected. 2. Drag either edge of its timeline tile to shorten the shot within its original window. You cannot move the entire tile to an unrelated moment or extend it beyond the available window. 3. To add coverage elsewhere, seek to that moment and select **+ Add shot**. If the position overlaps another shot, the button may offer a nearby available gap. 4. Use **Delete** to remove a moment you do not want. To change the overall setup, select **Edit setup**, adjust the section or coverage, and select **Create a new plan**. Read the replacement confirmation before continuing: planner-created shots are replaced, manually added shots stay, and previous render charges are not refunded. ### Render the shots 1. Choose **Render quality**: 480p or 720p. 2. Review the credit amount displayed on the render button. The amount can change with shot duration, quality, and the current discount. 3. Select **Render \[number] shots** to start the planned batch, or open a planned shot and select **Render shot** to render it individually. Clicking the priced button confirms the paid action. 4. Follow the shot statuses while rendering runs. A shot waiting in the queue is not necessarily failed. Completed shots remain available even if another shot fails. ### Review and refine the results 1. Play the main video to review the edit with the original audio. Open an individual shot to inspect the actual **Generated shot**. 2. Turn off **Show this shot** to use the source footage at that moment instead. This changes the main edit; the individual Generated shot preview still shows the generated result. 3. Drag the shot's timeline edges to shorten it. After rendering, trimming is limited to the footage that was generated. 4. If you want a different result, enable **Show this shot**, review the new credit amount, and select **Regenerate shot**. Regeneration is a new paid render, not a free revision. ![An individual generated shot with Show this shot and Regenerate shot controls.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/7znZxgjZsq46O1TF/images/imgs/opus-labs-multi-angle-generated-shot.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=7znZxgjZsq46O1TF\&q=85\&s=263840901482ba39711454e3640e158d) *Review the actual generated video. **Show this shot** controls whether the main edit uses this result or the original footage.* ### Download your edit 1. Review your final shot selection and trims. 2. Select **Download**. The button changes to **Preparing download…** while the current edit is assembled. 3. Wait for the download to finish, then watch the MP4 with sound. If you change the edit afterward, download again to get the updated version. ## Find your projects Select **Projects** to return to **Your projects**, then open a saved project to continue reviewing or editing. A project link does not grant access to someone else's account; use the OpusClip account and organization that own the project. Sources and generated outputs expire 30 days after the initial upload. Opening a project or rendering more shots does not extend that period. Download the edits you want to keep before expiry. ## Credits Multi-Angle and OpusClip use the same credit balance. Uploading, planning, reviewing, trimming, and downloading do not have a separate customer credit charge. Paid video rendering shows its current credit amount before you start. * **When rendering starts:** the displayed amount is reserved. Credits are charged as each shot completes. * **Completed shots:** charged even if you hide or delete them, or decide the result is not useful. Quality dissatisfaction does not automatically refund a completed render. * **Technical failures:** reserved credits for definitively failed renders are released. If the outcome is still being checked, the reservation may remain until it is resolved. * **Automatic recovery:** continues the existing attempt without an additional render charge. * **Regenerate shot or an explicit paid retry:** a new attempt with a new displayed price. If your balance is insufficient, your plan stays saved. Return when you have enough credits, or choose fewer shots or a lower render quality and review the updated price. ## Troubleshooting ### The upload is rejected or preparation fails Check that the video is a playable MP4, MOV, or WebM within the 4 GB and 1-hour limits. Keep the upload page open and check your connection. If the app offers **Choose another video**, choose a supported source and try again. If preparation repeatedly fails, contact support with the project link and the displayed error. ### Planning fails Check the displayed error and confirm the selected section is at least 8 seconds long. If the app is reconnecting or work is already running, wait for its status to update before retrying. Contact support if the problem continues. ### Some shots fail Open each failed shot to read its error and credit status. You can review the completed shots separately. Use **Retry shot** only when it is available and you have reviewed the displayed price. If the message asks you to change the source or shot, make that correction instead of repeating the same request. ### The render start was not confirmed Select **Refresh shot status** before trying again: the original attempt may already be running. If the shot or credit status says recovery is required, do not start another render to replace it. Contact support with the project link so the existing attempt can be checked. ### The result looks too similar to the source, or the person or background changes AI-generated shots can change facial detail, lighting, background, or motion, and the new viewpoint may be subtle. Turn off **Show this shot** to keep the original footage, or try a new paid regeneration. Review results yourself; no exact angle or guaranteed improvement is promised. ### Turning off Show this shot does not change the small preview This is expected. The checkbox controls the main edit, not the individual Generated shot preview. Close the shot panel and play the main video at that moment to compare. If the main player still shows the disabled result after the update finishes, refresh the project and contact support if it persists. ### A download fails Your edit stays saved. Check the displayed message, reopen the project, and try **Download** again when no rendering or other editing action is in progress. Do not render the shots again just to retry a download. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I choose a precise camera angle or see an image preview before rendering? No. You choose coverage and timing; Multi-Angle chooses the camera treatment. The plan shows proposed moments, not an image promising the final result. Review the actual generated video after rendering. ### Does Multi-Angle replace my audio? No. The main edit and downloaded video use the original recording's audio. The individual Generated shot preview is muted by default; use the main player to review with sound. ### Can I close the page while it is working? Keep the page open until upload and preparation finish. Once the saved editor is available, accepted planning and rendering work runs in the background. Return through **Projects** to check progress. ### Does trimming or hiding a shot refund credits? No. These actions change how the completed result is used, not the render that was already paid for. Trimming before a render also may not reduce the charge below the generator's minimum duration; always check the price shown. ### How do I send feedback or get help? Use **Contact support** in the app for help. Include your project link and the error or behavior you saw. After results are available, use **Rate this project** to leave a rating and optional comment. # What is Opus Labs? Source: https://help.opus.pro/opus-labs/overview Opus Labs is an early-access catalog of experimental AI creation tools that you open with your OpusClip account. Opus Labs is an early-access product catalog for new AI creation tools. It is a separate product from OpusClip, but you sign in with the same OpusClip account. Use Opus Labs when you want to try an experimental workflow before it becomes part of a wider OpusClip release. ## How Opus Labs differs from OpusClip OpusClip is the main product for turning long videos into short clips. Opus Labs contains standalone beta products, each with its own workflow, availability, and help article. A Labs product may change while it is in beta. Its interface, supported inputs, models, and credit price can be updated independently from OpusClip. ## How to open a product ![The Opus Labs catalog showing AI Expand, Motion Studio, and Opus Model Hub cards, each with a Try it now button.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/MscIuq1mPk_4jhy6/images/imgs/opus-labs-overview-catalog.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=MscIuq1mPk_4jhy6\&q=85\&s=f257330972a6977049ef659cc0c044c2) *The Opus Labs catalog. Select **Try it now** to open a product.* 1. Go to [labs.opus.pro](https://labs.opus.pro/). 2. Find the product you want to use. 3. Select **Try it now**. 4. If asked, sign in with your OpusClip account. ## Which products are available? The catalog shows the Labs products that are currently available to your account. The initial Help Center section covers AI Expand and Motion Studio. If you cannot find a product, confirm that you are signed in with the correct account. The product may also be limited to a beta group. ## Vote for what comes next At the bottom of the Opus Labs catalog, the **Coming next** section shows product ideas that the team is considering. Vote for the ideas you want most. ![The Coming next section showing three product idea cards, each with a vote-count button and a Get early access button.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/MscIuq1mPk_4jhy6/images/imgs/opus-labs-overview-coming-next.jpeg?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=MscIuq1mPk_4jhy6\&q=85\&s=b7a8103f323ffd0babf0bd3215af994d) *The **Coming next** section shows each idea's vote count and a separate **Get early access** button.* 1. Go to [Coming next](https://labs.opus.pro/#coming-next). 2. Find an idea you want Opus Labs to build. 3. Select the vote-count button on the card. 4. If asked, sign in with your OpusClip account. Each signed-in account can cast one vote for each idea. Select the vote-count button again to remove your vote. Voting does not use credits and does not automatically give you access to the product. > [!NOTE] > > To ask for access when the idea becomes available, select **Get early access**. Voting and joining the early-access list are separate actions. ## Access and credits Opus Labs and OpusClip use the same credit balance. Credits used in an Opus Labs product are deducted from the balance on your OpusClip account. Each product shows the estimated cost before you start a generation step, so review that amount before continuing. ## Get help Each Labs product has its own Help Center article. When contacting support, include the product name, the step where the problem happened, and a screenshot of any error message. Do not include passwords, API keys, or private customer media. ## Frequently asked questions ### Is Opus Labs the same as OpusClip? No. Opus Labs is a separate beta product catalog. It uses your OpusClip account for sign-in and shares the same credit balance. ### Why can I see a product that another user cannot see? Product access can be enabled for specific beta groups. The catalog only shows products available to the signed-in account. ### Can a Labs product change? Yes. A product can change while it is in beta, including its interface, supported models, limits, and pricing. ### Does voting use credits? No. Voting is free and does not change your OpusClip credit balance. ### Does voting give me early access? No. Voting and early-access signup are separate. Select **Get early access** on the idea card to join the list. # How to use Product Ad Studio Source: https://help.opus.pro/opus-labs/product-ad-studio Product Ad Studio creates product ad images, posters, and campaign visuals from your own photos, a written idea, or a template. Sign in with your OpusClip account, review the credit price before generating, and download finished images from Projects. > [card] [Learn about Product Ad Studio](https://labs.opus.pro/product-ad-studio-intro) > > See what you can create from a product photo or an idea, and check access on Opus Labs. ## Before you start ![The Opus Labs catalog with Sign in to check access on the Product Ad Studio card.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/9uihOP0bDaD70pw1/images/imgs/opus-labs-product-ad-studio-access.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=9uihOP0bDaD70pw1\&q=85\&s=9591494f8e07ca39a0f82857b56b4af9) On Opus Labs, select **Sign in to check access** to open Product Ad Studio. On the Opus Labs page, select **Sign in to check access** and sign in with your OpusClip account. If your workspace does not have access yet, you will see an access message. You can create from a written idea without uploading an image. For a template, provide the product image or saved Product requested by that template. Uploads must finish before they can be used. ## Create from your own idea ![The Product Ad Studio Create screen with Describe your ad, optional product photos, and image settings.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/9uihOP0bDaD70pw1/images/imgs/opus-labs-product-ad-studio-create.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=9uihOP0bDaD70pw1\&q=85\&s=71acdb26efdd2cc4074fc4815691a2a9) *On **Create**, describe your ad or browse templates. Sign in to generate images.* 1. Open [Product Ad Studio](https://product-ad-studio.labs.opus.pro/) and stay on **Create**. 2. In **Describe your ad**, enter the product visual you want. Include the product, setting, background, mood, and any text you want in the image. For example: “A clean launch poster for my skincare bottle on pale stone, with warm light and room for a headline.” 3. Optional: select **Add product photos** to upload or choose reference images. You can also start from a saved Product or an earlier image in the media picker. 4. Choose the **Model**, **Quality**, **Aspect ratio**, and number of **Images**. You can create up to four images at once. 5. Review the credit price shown on **Create images**, then select it to start generating. 6. The studio opens the Project page while images generate. When an image is ready, open it and select **Download**. Use **Projects** to return later. ## Create from a template 1. On **Create**, browse the template gallery and select a design. 2. Add the product image or saved Product requested by the template. For a people-focused template, you can optionally choose a person image; leaving it empty keeps the person in the template. 3. Optional: use **Describe your edit (optional)** to specify changes, such as a background color or headline. The template's design instructions stay in place. 4. Choose the image settings and count, review the displayed credit price, and select **Recreate**. 5. Open the Project to track progress and download finished images. ## Credits and saved work Product Ad Studio uses the same credit balance as OpusClip. The credit price depends on your settings and number of images. Review it before each generation. Browsing templates and preparing your inputs do not use credits. **Projects** lists submitted work and lets you reopen results; only submitted generations appear in **Projects**. ## If something does not work ### Create images or Recreate is unavailable Finish the required written idea or template product input, wait for uploads, and check the displayed credit price. A template that is no longer available cannot start a new generation; choose another template. ### You are unsure whether a submission went through Select **Check submission** if the studio offers it. Do not start another paid run until the original submission is resolved. ### Images are still processing Open **Projects** and check the Project. Generation can continue after you leave the page. ### You need help In the signed-in studio, use **Contact support**. Include the Project link and a description of what happened; do not share sensitive source images in a public message. ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I need to upload a product photo? No for an idea-based creation. A template may require a product image or saved Product. ### Can I make more than one image at once? Yes. Choose one to four images before submitting. The displayed credit price updates with the selected settings. ### Where are my results? Select **Projects**, open the submitted Project, and download the finished images there. # How to use Product Launch Video Plugin Source: https://help.opus.pro/opus-labs/product-launch-video-plugin **Product Launch Video Plugin** gives your coding agent 34 open-source launch-video templates to customize for your product. Choose a logo reveal, headline, showcase, product UI demo, or data story; then Codex or Claude Code edits the source, adds your assets, previews the motion, and renders the final video. ## Start with our open-source templates * **34 ready-to-use motion templates** for brand intros, titles and announcements, showcases and portfolios, product and UI demos, and data and results. * **9 complete launch-video examples** that show how the components can become full product stories. * [Open the public GitHub repository](https://github.com/opus-pro/opus-video-studio) to inspect, clone, and customize the editable Remotion source. ## What the plugin can do | Capability | What your coding agent can do | | - | - | | **Get Started** | Choose a template workflow or start with a request for new video, images, voiceover, music, or sound effects. | | **Motion UI** | Edit product screens, typography, logos, colors, transitions, and timing in a code-driven video project. | | **Media Tools** | Create images, keyframes, voiceover, music, and sound effects; transcribe audio; import assets; and recover existing jobs. | | **Video Director** | Plan shots, improve prompts, and generate new AI video clips with the video models currently available to your account. | | **Local Remotion** | Preview the editable project and render MP4 files locally while keeping the complete source for future changes. | ## Tools available to your coding agent | Tool | Purpose | | - | - | | **opus\_video\_tools\_whoami** | Confirm the connected Opus account and organization. | | **create\_project** | Create the managed project used for generated media and storage. | | **import\_assets** | Register reference images, audio, and other media with the project. | | **generate\_keyframes** | Create still images and keyframes for a scene. | | **generate\_audio** | Create speech, music, or sound effects. | | **transcribe\_audio** | Transcribe audio for dialogue, timing, or captions. | | **generate\_video\_clips** | Create new AI video footage after the script and generation request are reviewed. | | **get\_status, list\_jobs, resolve\_job** | Track asynchronous work and recover a previous job without starting it again. | The live tool list in Codex or Claude Code is the source of truth. Available models and options can change. ## How to use Product Launch Video Plugin 1. Open [Product Launch Video Plugin](https://product-videos.labs.opus.pro/). 2. Select **View on GitHub** to explore the open-source repository, templates, examples, and installation guides. 3. On the product page, expand **Create video, audio and images with your coding agent**. 4. Choose **Codex** or **Claude Code**, copy the setup prompt, and paste it into a new conversation. Follow the installation and Opus sign-in steps shown by your agent. 5. Choose one of the 34 templates. Filter the gallery by Brand Intros, Titles & Announcements, Showcase & Portfolio, Product & UI Demos, or Data & Results. 6. Give your coding agent the template link and your brief: product name, website, audience, main message, logo, colors, real product screens, call to action, duration, and output formats. 7. The agent downloads and verifies the original source, renders the unchanged baseline, then replaces the sample brand, copy, interface, and assets. 8. If the video needs newly generated media, review the exact image, audio, or video request and its credit use before approving it. 9. Review the complete video with sound. Request any copy, timing, motion, or format changes, then keep both the final MP4 and the editable source project. ![The template gallery filtered by purpose, showing launch-video styles to customize.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/KHsLQFLDnOYTVqVB/images/imgs/opus-labs-product-launch-video-plugin-templates.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=KHsLQFLDnOYTVqVB\&q=85\&s=c3c67e70d4a459006492816234095012) *Browse 34 templates by purpose, then choose a style to customize.* ![A template detail view with preview, coding-agent prompt, and download options.](https://mintcdn.com/opusclip-c3e48c12/KHsLQFLDnOYTVqVB/images/imgs/opus-labs-product-launch-video-plugin-template-detail.png?fit=max\&auto=format\&n=KHsLQFLDnOYTVqVB\&q=85\&s=3126379fb217ff642d172a3edc852e7c) *Open a template to preview it, copy its coding-agent prompt, or download the editable source package.* ## Example prompts * Make a 20-second launch video for \[Brand Name] \[template link]. Use our real product screens and render it in 16:9, 1:1, and 9:16. * Turn \[template link] into a four-second logo reveal. Use the logo in ./brand/logo.svg and match our brand colors. * Write and generate a 30-second music bed for our product demo. ## Credits and access Installing the plugin, using the open-source templates, previewing locally, and rendering locally are free and do not require an Opus account. Generated voiceover, music, sound effects, images, and AI video require an authorized Opus account, product access, and credits. Your coding agent shows the exact request before it spends credits. Installing the plugin does not automatically grant access to every model or managed service. ## Troubleshooting ### The plugin is installed, but the agent does not recognize it Start a new Codex or Claude Code conversation so the plugin skills can load. If you just updated the plugin, reload the client before trying again. ### The agent cannot connect to the media tools Follow the current sign-in steps for your coding agent, then ask it to run **opus\_video\_tools\_whoami**. A successful website login or connection badge alone does not confirm that the tools are ready. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I use the repository without the plugin? Yes. You can clone the GitHub repository and run a template directly as a Remotion project. The plugin is the guided path: it helps your coding agent choose the workflow, download and verify source, edit the template, create media, and review the result. ### Can I render for different social platforms? Yes. Ask your coding agent for 16:9, 1:1, or 9:16 versions for YouTube, LinkedIn, feeds, Reels, Shorts, or TikTok. Review each version because text and product UI may need layout adjustments. ### Where are my videos and source files saved? Local template projects and rendered MP4 files are saved in the project folder used by Codex or Claude Code. Managed media is also recorded under its Opus project so the agent can track and reuse completed assets.